Home

QGIS User Guide - QGIS Documentation

Contents

1. 18 2 Rendering mode 18 3 Composer Items 18 4 Itemalignment 18 5 Atlas generation 18 6 Creating Output 18 7 Manage the Composer 19 Plugin 19 1 Plugin QGIS 19 2 Menggunakan OGIS Plugin Inti 19 3 Plugin Mengambil Koordinat 19 4 Plugin Pengelola DB 19 5 Plugin Pengonversi Dxf2Shp 19 6 eVis Plugin 19 7 Plugin fTools 19 8 Plugin Alat GDAL 19 9 Plugin Georeferencer 19 10 Plugin Interpolasi 19 11 Plugin Mengedit Diluar Jaringan Offline 19 12 Oracle GeoRaster Plugin 19 13 Plugin Raster Analisis Terrain 19 14 Heatmap Plugin 19 15 Plugin Grafik Jalan 19 16 Plugin Spasial Query 19 17 Plugin SQL Anywhere 19 18 Topology Checker Plugin 19 19 Plugin Statistik Zonal 20 Bantuan dan Dukungan 201 Mils oenehebee oeha ws 207 IRC 2 eae eee ee ee Se eS 203 Busltacket ss ras esena 20 4 Blog 6 cache bh Se aan 205 PU s sares oe da eee 200 Wiki seniri 21 Appendix 21 1 GNU General Public License 21 2 GNU Free Documentation License 22 Literatur dan Referensi Web Indeks 157 157 159 166 172 174 179 180 186 189 190 192 193 206 207 209 210 211 211 214 214 215 216 217 226 229 232 235 236 237 239 240 243 244 245 246 248 249 249 250 250 251 251 251 253 253 25
2. amp majrivers r amp lakes A regions Control rendering order Gambar 7 2 Mendefiniskan legenda urutan lapisan tersendiri 4b 7 4 Tampilan Peta Ini business end dari QGIS peta tampil di area ini Peta yang ditampilkan dalam jendela ini tergantung pada lapisan vektor dan raster yang telah Anda pilih lihat bagian informasi lebih lanjut tentang cara untuk memuat lapisan Tampilan peta dapat digeser mengalihkan fokus tampilan peta untuk daerah lain dan memperbesar atau memperkecilnya Berbagai operasi lainnya dapat dilakukan pada peta seperti yang dijelaskan dalam deskrip si toolbar di atas Tampilan peta dan legenda terikat erat satu sama lain peta dalam tampilan mencerminkan perubahan yang Anda buat di daerah legenda Tip Perbesar peta dengan tetikus Anda dapat menggunakan tetikus untuk memperbesar dan memperkecil peta Tempatkan kursor tetikus di dalam area peta dan roll roda depan jauh dari Anda untuk memperbesar dan belakang ke arah Anda untuk memperke cil Posisi kursor tetikus adalah pusat di mana perubahan terjadi Anda dapat menyesuaikan perilaku pembesaran roda tetikus menggunakan menu Alat Peta dalam menu Pengaturan Opsi Tip Menggeser peta dengan tombol panah dan spasi bar Anda dapat menggunakan tombol panah untuk menggeser peta empatkan kursor tetikus dalam area peta dan klik panah kanan untuk menggeser ke Timur panah kiri untuk menggeser ke Barat panah atas untuk menggeser ke Utara dan
3. Lakukan peregangan untuk MinMax Peregangan dan Klip ke MinMax dan juga Clip ke MinMax 7 Batas minimum maksimum Kumulatif jumlah potong pixel Minimum Maksimum Berarti standar deviasi Kumulatif batas jumlah potong pixel Standar deviasi multiplier Debugging Tampilkan peristiwa ini dalam panel Log Pesan di bawah tab render Refresh kanvas peta 9 3 5 Menu Kanvas dan Legenda Standar penampilan peta diganti oleh proyek properti Tetapkan Seleksi warna dan Warna latar Legenda lapisan Dobel klik pada legenda Anda dapat Buka properti lapisan atau Buka atribut tabel dengan dobel klik mengikuti Gaya item legenda g Nama lapisan kapital g Nama lapisan tebal g Nama grup tebal g Tampilkan klasifikasi nama atribut E Buat ikon raster mungkin lambat g Tambah lapisan baru ke grup sekarang atau yang dipilih 9 3 Opsi 51 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 9 3 6 Menu perangkat Peta Identifikasi amp Buka hasil identifikasi di dock window dibutuhkan restart OGIS e Pengaturan Mode menentukan lapisan akan ditampilkan oleh alat Identifikasi Dengan beralih ke Top down atau Top down stop at first dan bukan Current layer atribut untuk semua lapisan diidentifikasi lihat bagian properti Proyek di bawah Proyek untuk mengatur lapisan yang dapat diidentifikasi akan ditampilkan dalam alat Identifikasi amp Buka form fitur jika fitur tu
4. The first time you use a PostGIS data source you must create a connection to the PostgreSQL database that contains the data Begin by clicking on the g dd PostGIS Layer toolbar button selecting the z Add PostGIS Layer option from the Layer menu or typing Ctrl Shift D You can also open the Add Vector Layer dialog and select 2 Database The Add PostGIS Table s dialog will be displayed To access the connection manager click on the New button to display the Create a New PostGIS Connection dialog The parameters required for a connection are e Name A name for this connection Can be the same as Database e Service Service parameter to be used alternatively to hostname port and potentially database This can be defined in pg_service conf e Host Name of the database host This must be a resolvable host name the same as would be used to open a telnet connection or ping the host If the database is on the same computer as QGIS simply enter localhost here e Port Port number the PostgreSQL database server listens on The default port is 5432 e Database Name of the database e SSL mode How the SSL connection will be negotiated with the server Note that massive speedups in PostGIS layer rendering can be achieved by disabling SSL in the connection editor Following options are available disable only try an unencrypted SSL connection 66 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0
5. a Oracle Spatial GeoR Help Close Gambar 19 1 Pengelola Plugin 8 In the Installed menu you can see the path if it is an external plugin External plugins are only installed in your home directory while core plugins are stored in usr Dokumentasi rinci tentang penggunaan minimum versi QGIS homepage penulis dan informasi penting lainnya yang disediakan untuk Repositori Resmi QGIS di http plugins ggis org plugins Untuk repositori eksternal lainnya mungkin tersedia dengan plugin eksternal sendiri Secara umum tidak termasuk dalam panduan ini Saat ini ada lebih dari 150 plugin eksternal yang tersedia di Repositori Resmi QGIS Beberapa plugin ini menawarkan fungsi yang akan dibutuhkan oleh banyak pengguna contoh menyediakan pengguna dengan ke mampuan untuk melihat dan mengedit data OpenStreetMap atau untuk menambahkan lapisan GoogleMap se mentara yang lain menawarkan fungsi yang sangat khusus contoh menghitung diameter pipa untuk jaringan pasokan air Hal ini bagaimanapun cukup mudah untuk mencari semua plugin eksternal yang tersedia dengan menggunakan kata kunci memilih nama repositori dan atau menyaring pada status plugin saat ini terpasang atau dihapus dalam sistem Anda Pencarian dan penyaringan dilakukan dari Pemasang Plugin Python QGIS Tip Tambah repositori Untuk menambah repositori penulis eksternal buka Pemasang Plugin 13 Manage and Install Plugins ke menu coe Settings dan klik Tambah
6. 4 s gt saga vegetationindex slopebased This result might change depending on the algorithms you have available It is easier now to find the algorithm you are looking for and its command line name in this case saga slopeaspectcurvature Once you know the command line name of the algorithm the next thing to do is to know the right syntax to execute it That means knowing which parameters are needed and the order in which they have to be passed when calling the runalg method There is a method to describe an algorithm in detail which can be used to get a list of the parameters that an algorithms require and the outputs that it will generate To do it you can use the alghelp name of the algorithm method Use the command line name of the algorithm not the full descriptive name Calling the method with saga slopeaspectcurvature as parameter you get the following description gt gt gt processing alghelp Saga slopeaspectcurvature ALGORITHM Slope Aspect Curvature ELEVATION sParameterkaster METHOD lt ParameterSelection gt SLOPE lt OutputRaster gt ASPECT lt OutputRaster gt CURV lt OutputRaster gt HCURV lt OutputRaster gt VCURV lt OutputRaster gt Now you have everything you need to run any algorithm As we have already mentioned there is only one single command to execute algorithms runalg Its syntax is as follows gt gt gt processing runalg name_of_the_algorithm paraml param2
7. By luminosity and By average For one hue in the color table you can modiy the Strength Resampling The Resampling option makes it appearance when you zoom in and out of the image Resampling modes can optimize the appearance of the map They calculate a new gray value matrix through a geometric transformation While applying the Nearest neighbour method the map can have a pixelated structure when zooming in This appearance can be improved by using the Bilinear or Cubic method Sharp features are caused to be blurred now The effect is a smoother image The method can be applied e g to digital topographic raster maps 13 2 3 Transparency Menu QGIS has the ability to display each raster layer at varying transparency levels Use the transparency slider to indicate to what extent the underlying layers if any should be visible though the current raster layer This is very useful if you like to overlay more than one rasterlayer e g a shaded relief map overlayed by a classified rastermap This will make the look of the map more three dimensional Additionally you can enter a rastervalue which should be treated as NODATA in the Additional no data value menu An even more flexible way to customize the transparency can be done in the Custom transparency options section The transparency of every pixel can be set here As an example we want to set the water of our example raster file Landcover tif
8. C Draw coordinates Gambar 18 6 Map Grid Dialog 8 e The A Show grid checkbox allows to overlay a grid to the map element As grid type you can specify to use solid line or cross Symbology of the grid can be chosen See Section Rendering Mode Furthermore you can define an interval in X and Y direction an X and Y offset and the width used for cross or line grid type e You can choose to paint the frame with a Zebra style If not selected general frame option is used See Section Frame_dialog Advanced rendering mode is also available for grids See Section Rendering_mode e The fF Draw coordinates checkbox allows to add coordinates to the map frame The annotation can be drawn inside or outside the map frame The annotation direction can be defined as horizontal vertical horizontal and vertical or boundary direction for each border individually Units can be in meters or in degrees Finally you can define the grid color the annotation font the annotation distance from the map frame and the precision of the drawn coordinates Overview The Overview dialog of the map Item Properties tab provides following functionalities see Figure composer 7 If the composer has more than one map you can choose to use a map to show the extents of a second map The Overview dialog of the map Item Properties tab allows to customize the appearance of that feature e The Overview frame combolist references the map item whose extents will be drawn
9. Open the properties dialog of the heatmap airports layer select the layer heatmap airports open the context menu with the right mouse button and select Properties Select the Style tab Change the Render type MI to Singleband pseudocolor Select a suitable Color map hd for instance YlOrRed Bab 19 Plugin QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 5 Click the Load button to fetch the minimum and maximum values from the raster then click the Classify button 6 Press OK to update the layer The final result is shown in Figure_Heatmap_4 Quantum GIS eb47ff5 lew Layer Settings Plugins Vector Raster Dat H FH bA m Tha E 8 A D D N Gd i UB gt gt PALI PPAS A WH R BE mv OD to Layers o w v amp airports 0 KN amp gt MG 4 heatmap_airports rn y majrivers YI A lakes v A alaska gt BI landcover Coordinate 6877403 7758555 Scale 27740717 v Y Render eEpsc 2964 Gambar 19 24 Styled heatmap of airports of Alaska A 19 15 Plugin Grafik Jalan Plugin Grafik Jalan merupakan plugin C untuk QGIS yang menghitung jalur terpendek antara dua titik pada setiap lapisan polyline dan plot jalan ini melalui jaringan jalan QGIS 2 0 1 Dufour DEARA PR VETAR i oY Qe N HLan paame OS PS HSRPOAS Layers amp v V Road Network x d Shortest path Q NU a p 1 04099e 06 4 6
10. x5 Plugin Manager opens the Plugin Manager Dialog Activate the A GPS Tools checkbox When this plugin is loaded two buttons with a small handheld GPS device will show up in the toolbar aa e LO Create new GPX Layer ca e Dey GPS Tools For working with GPS data we provide an example GPX file available in the QGIS sample dataset qgis_sample_data gps national_monuments gpx See Section Contoh data for more information about the sample data cija 1 Select Vector GPS GPS Tools or click the 3 SPS Tools icon in the toolbar and open the Load GPX file tab see figure GPS 1 2 Browse to the folder ggis sample data gps select the GPX file national monuments gpx and click Open Use the Browse button to select the GPX file then use the checkboxes to select the feature types you want to load from that GPX file Each feature type will be loaded in a separate layer when you click OK The file national_monuments gpx only includes waypoints Catatan GPS units allow to store data in different coordinate systems When downloading a GPX file from your GPS unit or a web site and then loading it in QGIS be sure that the data stored in the 133 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 d e GPS Tools D o og Load GPXfile Importotherfile Download from GPS Uploadto GPS GPX Conver 4 File home d ass auiqgi s_sample_d ata g p s nation al_m onume nis wg s8 4g px Feature types x Waypoints Routes Tracks
11. 42464246 84658 6 eo 844 w 8S Oh Ge Se Oe DEES ERAGE 16 Si Peran Les Ma ea Soe ete REESE GEESE OHSS oe ee ees 16 Memulai 17 Gl Pemasangan Instalasi S EG ewe Ee ERE EE ee eH ES 17 602 Conohdaa cea ee ee ae sa dG OE ee tee ES PEERS Ee oe Ree ee eee as 17 GD Oo oma 2 245456 eee eed nee eee eb bute ee he oe eee dar ab ee eR 18 6 4 Memulai dan Menghentikan QGIS 0 0 0 0 eee ee 19 6 3 Pilihan Baris Perintah ca cowaeseces esek EEHLEREESR OSHS Ku Os HESS 19 GO Proyek seatgeecaereet eee abet ee oe ia Eau as P 21 07 Keluaran OUUU s s cod S666 ee Pe bRSe ESE Ee GH HEB ES ee HR GHG 21 QGIS GUI 23 te dee NGM co oa eo ERG ee eee Ee Re ee eG 24 Va WOOGIE 62426 0 4564 G4 amp woe be eee EERE Hewes SORE Ewe ea 29 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 La Bes ec a e SA a ae a a er a aaa a a a ee ee A 29 Ta Tapai gee cuecaee eee ee eee PARES OHS R ERE e SCHEER ERK es AR 32 Go SAWS bass a odes ANI Ra anh i a ORES AEDES ERESES EES SEE AI DEES 32 Peralatan Umum 35 Sb Tuo 62 lt 4 hon ete eeeeeheR BESS HESS EE ERS 35 92 Soda Papanktuk 2228 cee ce cd bee SE Ge heb Oei Bh Ge Soe EES eee e 36 So Konteks Bantuan se e scimi a one nana Bea GR ORD REEMA ORDER EES 37 Oe Kendeng 22 5565 6866865684 SDS ha ee ee Nee ee ee es 37 20 Menu Dee LA a ee e E a RO REESE RGR EERE ME ee ES 38 60 Dekon an kg tee eee RE eee REDS R ORES eS 40 8 7 Peralatan Anotasi bea Nu be Oa Koo bb nba an 42 So Bookmark Spasial seen Loe
12. Date and Time Functions This group contains functions for handling date and time data QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Snow current date and time age difference between two dates year extract the year part from a date or the number of years from a Interval month extract the month part from a date or the number of months from a Interval week extract the week number from a date or the number of weeks from a Interval day extract the day from a date or the number of days from a Interval hour extract the hour from a datetime or time or the number of hours from a Interval minute extract the minute from a datetime or time Or the number of minutes from a Interval second extract the second from a datetime or time or the number of minutes from a Interval String Functions This group contains functions that operate on strings e g replace convert to upper case lower convert string a to lower case upper convert string a to upper case title converts all words of a string to title case all words lower case with leading capital letter trim removes all leading and trailing whitespace spaces tabs etc from a string length length of string a replace returns a string with the the supplied string replaced regexp_replace a this that returns a string with the supplied regular expression replaced regexp_substr returns the portion of a string which matches a supplied regular expression substr xax from len returns a part of a string concat co
13. Help yok Cancel Gambar 15 1 The GPS Tools dialog window GPX file uses WGS84 latitude longitude QGIS expects this and it is the official GPX specification See http www topografix com GPX 1 1 15 1 3 GPSBabel Since OGIS uses GPX files you need a way to convert other GPS file formats to GPX This can be done for many formats using the free program GPSBabel which is available at http www gpsbabel org This program can also transfer GPS data between your computer and a GPS device OGIS uses GPSBabel to do these things so it is recommended that you install it However if you just want to load GPS data from GPX files you will not need it Version 1 2 3 of GPSBabel is known to work with OGIS but you should be able to use later versions without any problems 15 1 4 Importing GPS data To import GPS data from a file that is not a GPX file you use the tool Import other file in the GPS Tools dialog Here you select the file that you want to import and the file type which feature type you want to import from it where you want to store the converted GPX file and what the name of the new layer should be Note that not all GPS data formats will support all three feature types so for many formats you will only be able to choose between one Or two types 15 1 5 Downloading GPS data from a device OGIS can use GPSBabel to download data from a GPS device directly as new vector layers For this we use the Download from GPS tab of th
14. The options shown in figure projection 1 are e L Prompt for CRS e Use project CRS 57 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Fi Coordinate Reference System CRS aA General ad System Default CRS for new projects amp Automatically enable on the fly reprojection if layers have different CRS Data Sources Enable on the fly reprojection by default d Rendering Always start new projects with this CRS png Canvas amp EPSG 4326 WGS 84 Select Legend EX Map Tool oe CRS for new layers a Digitizing When a new layer is created or when a layer is loaded that has no CRS Prompt for CRS we AD COAL Use project CRS Use default CRS displayed below oo EPSG 4326 WGS 84 Select Network Help cancel KS Gambar 10 1 CRS tab in the QGIS Options Dialog e Use default CRS displayed below If you want to define the coordinate reference system for a certain layer without CRS information you can also do that in the General menu of the raster see General Menu and vector see General Menu properties dialog If your layer already has a CRS defined it will be displayed as shown in Vector Layer Properties Dialog Tip CRS in the Map Legend Right clicking on a layer in the Map Legend Section Legenda Peta provides two CRS short cuts Set layer CRS takes you directly to the Coordinate Reference System Selector dialog see figure_projection_2 Set project CRS from Layer redefines the project CRS usi
15. ada data a Kk Kedekatan Kisi Interpolasi DEM Terrain model QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Utilitas ini menghilangkan raster poligon lebih kecil dari ukuran ambang batas yang disediakan dalam piksel dan menggantikan mereka dengan nilai piksel dari tetangga poligon terbesar Hasilnya dapat ditulis kembali ke pita raster yang sudah ada atau disalin ke dalam sebuah berkas baru Untuk informasi lebih lanjut lihat http www gdal org gdal sieve html Utilitas ini akan memindai gambar dan mencoba untuk mengatur semua piksel yang hampir hitam atau hampir putih di sekitar tepi persis hitam atau putih Hal ini sering digunakan untuk fix up berkurangnya kompresi foto udara sehingga warna piksel dapat diperlakukan sebagai transparan ketika mosaicing Lihat juga http www gdal org nearblack html Utilitas ini mengisi seleksi raster area biasanya tidak ada data area dengan interpolasi dari piksel yang valid di sekitar tepi area Lihat juga http www gdal org gdal fillnodata html Utilitas ini menghasilkan peta raster kedekatan menunjukkan jarak dari pusat setiap piksel ke pusat piksel terdekat diidentifikasi sebagai piksel sasaran Target piksel adalah pada raster sumber yang nilai raster piksel di set dari nilai target piksel Untuk informasi lebih lanjut lihat http www gdal org gdal proximity html Utilitas ini menciptakan kisi biasa raster dari data yang tersebar dibaca dari sumber data OGR Masukan data ak
16. e The Search directories area allows to add and remove directories with images in SVG format to the picture database e Image can be rotate with the Rotation 0 field e Activating the SF Sync with map checkbox synchronizes the rotation of a picture in the QGIS map canvas i e a rotated north arrow with the appropriate print composer image 18 3 4 Adding a Legend item to the Print Composer To add a map legend click the 9 Add new legend icon place the element with the left mouse button on the print composer canvas and position and customize their appearance in the legend Item Properties tab The Item properties of a legend item tab provides following functionalities see figure composer 14 Item Properties E Legend Main properties Legend items Fonts Columns Symbol Spacing Position and size _ Frame amp Background Item ID rroTrTr rT rT NA A TF TF YF Rendering Gambar 18 13 Legend Item properties Tab 4b Main properties The Main properties dialog of the legend Item Properties tab provides following functionalities see fig ure_composer_14 Main properties Title Legend Map Map 0 Wrap text on Gambar 18 14 Legend Main properties Dialog e Here you can adapt the legend title e Choose which Map item the current legend will refer to in the select list e Since QGIS 1 8 you can wrap the text of the legend title to a given character 18 3 Composer Items 199 QGIS User Gu
17. field e The C Equal columns widths sets how legend columns should be adjusted e The E Split layers option allows a categorized or a graduated layer legend to be divided upon columns e You can change width and height of the legend symbol in this dialog e Spacing aroung title group subgroup symbol icon label box space or column space can be customized throught that dialog 18 3 5 Adding a Scalebar item to the Print Composer To add a scalebar click the Add new scalebar icon place the element with the left mouse button on the print composer canvas and position and customize their appearance in the scalebar Item Properties tab The Item properties of a scalebar item tab provides following functionalities see figure composer 17 200 Bab 18 Print Composer Fonts Columns Title Font Subgroup Font Group Font Item Font Font color Count 4 Equal column widths Split layers v Symbol Symbol width 7 00 mm Symbol height 4 00 mm Spacing Title space Group Space Subgroup space Symbol space Icon label space Box space Column space 2 00mm 2 00 mm 2 00 mm 2 00 mm 2 00 mm 2 00 mm 2 00 mm QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Gambar 18 16 Legend Fonts Columns Symbol and Spacing Dialogs Main properties Units Segments Display Fonts and colors Position and size Frame amp Background Item ID T YY YY rT A
18. module switches to the Output tab and you see information about the analysis process If all works well you will finally see a Successfully finished message Manual The Manual tab shows the HTML help page of the GRASS module You can use it to check further module parameters and flags or to get a deeper knowledge about the purpose of the module At the end of each module manual page you see further links to the Main Help index the Thematic index and the Full index These links provide the same information as if you use the module g manual Tip Display results immediately If you want to display your calculation results immediately in your map canvas you can use the View Output button at the bottom of the module tab 16 9 2 GRASS module examples The following examples will demonstrate the power of some of the GRASS modules Creating contour lines The first example creates a vector contour map from an elevation raster DEM Assuming you have the Alaska LOCATION set up as explained in Section Importing data into a GRASS LOCATION 16 9 The GRASS toolbox 149 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 GRASS Tools alaska demo Tree Modules List Browser Ja Module v buffer Options Output Manual NAME v buffer Creates a buffer around features of given type areas must contain centroid KEYWORDS vector buffer Run Close Gambar 16 11 GRASS Toolbox Module Manual Fa First open the location by clicking t
19. to locate the file containing the SQL queries When the queries are loaded their titles as defined in the XML file will appear in the dropdown menu located just below the L Open File icon the full description of the query is displayed in the text window under the dropdown menu Select the query you want to run from the dropdown menu and then click on the SQL Query tab to see that the query has been loaded into the query window If it is the first time you are running a predefined query or are switching databases you need to be sure to connect to the database Click on the Run Query button in the SQL Query tab to execute the command If the query is successful a Database File Selection window will be displayed If the query is not successful an error message will appear in the Output Console window 1 Open File Launches the Open File file browser to search for the XML file holding the predefined queries 2 Predefined Queries A dropdown list with all of the queries defined by the predefined queries XML file 19 6 eVis Plugin 223 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Database Connection Predefined Queries a Alexandre Dropbox Trabalho QGIS qgis si Import all photo points This command will import all of the data in the SQLite database to Database Connection SOL Query Output Console gt polygons sidx polygons geometry sidx polygons geometry node sidx polygons geometry rowid gt idx_poly
20. 1 v Configuration Composer map Map 0 Coverage layer airports 2 Nome Region Nearby ar par w Visibility 156 NASA Lam ina PA a a e Hidden coverage layer gt Feature sorting zd ssa CE E see f gt Feature filtering T v Scaling 25 saran ata rogom B mp e a one Fixed scale i 1 v Output Output filename expression output_ feature Help Close Single file export when possible Gambar 18 30 Print Composer with map view legend image scalebar coordinates text and HTML frame added 9 The print composer allows you to create several output formats and it is possible to define the resolution print guality and paper size The EP Print icon allows to print the layout to a connected printer or a Postscript file depending on installed printer drivers The Fi JPG Export as image icon exports the composer canvas in several image formats such as PNG BPM TIF rey e The Fa Export as PDF saves the defined print composer canvas directly as a PDF e The Er Export as SVG icon saves the print composer canvas as a SVG Scalable Vector Graphic Catatan Currently the SVG output is very basic This is not a QGIS problem but a problem of the underlaying Qt library This will hopefully be sorted out in future versions Export big raster can sometimes fail even if there seems to be enough memory This is also a problem of the underlaying Qt managemen
21. 154 PARAMETER false easting 0 J PARAMETER false northing 0J UNIT us survey feet 0 304800609601219211 Jika Anda berniat untuk menggunakan frontend QGIS sebagai grafis GRASS Anda dapat mene mukan pilihan contoh lokasi misalnya Spearfish atau South Dakota di situs resmi GRASS GIS http grass osgeo org download sample data 6 3 Sesi Contoh Sekarang Anda OGIS sudah terpasang dan contoh dataset tersedia kami ingin menunjukkan sesi contoh OGIS singkat dan sederhana Kami akan memvisualisasikan lapisan layer raster dan vektor Kami akan menggunakan lapisan layer raster tutupan lahan ggis sample data raster landcover img dan lapisan layer vektor danau ggis sample data gml lakes gml 6 3 1 Mulai AGIS 9 Mulai OGIS dengan mengetik OGIS di terminal atau menggunakan bineri precompiled menggu nakan menu Aplikasi e Mulai QGIS menggunakan menu Start atau shortcut desktop atau dobel klik di berkas proyek QGIS X Dobel klik ikon pada folder Aplikasi 6 3 2 Muat lapisan layer raster dan vektor dari contoh dataset 1 Klik di ikon al Load Raster 2 Lihat ke folder qgis_sample_data raster pilih berkas ERDAS Img landcover img dan klik Buka 3 Jika berkas tidak ada dalam daftar periksa apakah combobox jenis berkas di bagian bawah dialog diatur pada jenis yang tepat dalam kasus ini Erdas Imagine Images x img IMG 4 Sekarang klik di ikon Va ban 5 2 Berkas harus dipilih sebagai Je
22. 48 Images H Raster Lt geg Raster vector HB Vector E 8 Models OD Scripts Tools Example scripts Gambar 17 5 Processing Toolbox 7 The toolbox contains all the available algorithms divided into predefined groups All these groups are found under a single tree entry named Geoalgorithms Additionally two more entries are found namely Models and Scripts These include user created algorithms and allow you to define your own workflows and processing tasks We will devote a full section to them a bit later In the upper part of the toolbox you can find a text box To reduce the number of algorithms shown in the toolbox and make it easier to find the one you need you can enter any word or phrase on the text box Notice that as you type the number of algorithms in the toolbox is reduced to just those which contain the text you have entered in their names In the lower part you will find a box that allows you to switch between the simplified algorithm list the one explained above and the advanced list If you change to the advanced mode the toolbox will look like this In the advanced view each group represents a so called algorithm provider which is a set of algorithms coming from the same source for instance from a third party application with geoprocessing capabilities Some of this groups represent algorithms from one of such third party applications like SAGA GRASS or R while other
23. 6761566 5287365 Scale 27740717 v Y MJ Render Gambar 19 21 Airports of Alaska 9 1 Select the Heatmap toolbutton to open the Heatmap dialog see Figure Heatmap 2 19 14 Heatmap Plugin 241 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 In the Input point layer 211 field select ai rports from the list of point layers loaded in current project Specify an output file name by clicking the button next to the Output raster field Enter the file name heatmap_airports no file extension is necessary Leave the Output format as the default format GeoTIFF Change the Radius to 1000000 meters Click on OK to create and load the airports heatmap see Figure Heatmap 3 Heatmap Plugin a Input point layer airports Output raster sample_data raster heatmap_airport Output format GeoTIFF a Radius 1000000 meters Advanced Gambar 19 22 The Heatmap Dialog 8 OGIS will generate the heatmap and add the results to your map window By default the heatmap is shaded in greyscale with lighter areas showing higher concentrations of airports The heatmap can now be styled in OGIS to improve its appearance 242 Quantum GIS eb47ff5 Layers vg airports gt amp D heatmap_airports v MV majrivers v YG lakes v amp alaska D gt amp j landcover 6877403 1 Coordinate 2803800 7140758 Scale 27740717 v Y Render Gambar 19 23 The heatmap after loading looks like a grey surface
24. 9 Dengan asumsi bahwa OGIS dipasang di PATH Anda dapat memulai OGIS dengan mengetik ggis pada terminal atau dengan mengklik dobel pada link aplikasi OGIS atau shortcut pada desktop atau dalam menu aplikasi e Mulai QGIS menggunakan menu Start atau shortcut dekstop atau dobel klik pada berkas proyek QGIS X Dobel klik ikon di folder Aplikasi Anda Jika Anda memulai QGIS di terminal jalankan path to installation executable Contents MacOS Qgis Untuk menghentikan QGIS klik menu Y Berkas X QGIS Keluar atau menggunakan shortcut Ctr1 Q 6 5 Pilihan Baris Perintah 4 QGIS mendukung sejumlah pilihan ketika dimulai dari baris perintah Untuk mendapatkan daftar opsi enter qgis help pada baris perintah Pernyataan penggunaan untuk QGIS adalah ggis help QGIS 2 0 1 Dufour Dufour exported OGIS is a user friendly Open Source Geographic Information System Usage ggis OPTION FILE options snapshot filename emit snapshot of loaded datasets to given fi_e width width width of snapshot to emit height height height of snapshot to emit I lang language use language for interface text project projectfile load the given QGIS project extent xmin ymin xmax ymax set initial map extent no logo hide splash screen noplugins don t restore plugins on startup P nocustomizat on don t apply GUI customization optionspath path use the given QSettings path configpath path use the
25. A value of 0 5 indicates that pixels at the edge of the radius will be given half the heat as pixels at the centre of the search radius A value of 1 means the heat is spread evenly over the whole search radius circle This is equivalent to the Uniform kernel A value greater than 1 indicates that the heat is higher towards the edge of the search radius then at the centre The input point layer may also have attribute fields which can affect how they influence the heatmap e Use radius from field sets the search radius for each feature from an attribute field in the input layer e Use weight from field allows input features to be weighted by an attribute field This can be used to increase the influence certain features have on the resultant heatmap When an output raster file name is specified the OK button can be used to create the heatmap 19 14 3 Tutorial Creating a Heatmap For the following example we will use the airports vector point layer from the QGIS sample dataset see Contoh data Another exellent QGIS tutorial on making heatmaps can be found at http qgis spatialthoughts com In Figure Heatmap 1 the airports of Alaska are shown Quantum GIS eb47ff5 Project Edit View Layer Settings gs Plugins o j Ee A be Mh Mi Ka 8 g A be UB SS DO PHPPAAA TTE R TUM aE Layers K g airports YB V majrivers v MG lakes v amp alaska O gt B landcover Coordinate
26. Gambar 12 4 Map in lat lon crossing the 180 longitude line A workaround is to transform the longitude values using PostGIS and the ST_Shift_Longitude function This function reads every point vertex in every component of every feature in a geometry and 1f the longitude coordi nate is lt 0 adds 360 to it The result would be a 0 360 version of the data to be plotted in a 180 centric map Gambar 12 5 Crossing 180 longitude applying the ST_Shift_Longitude function Usage e Import data to PostGIS Importing Data into PostgreSQL using for example the DB Manager plugin e Use the PostGIS command line interface to issue the following command this is an example where TA BLE is the actual name of your PostGIS table gis_data update TABLE set the geom ST Shift Longitude the_geom e If everything went right you should receive a confirmation about the number of features that were updated then you ll be able to load the map and see the difference Figure_vector_5 12 1 8 SpatiaLite Layers Le The first time you load data from a SpatiaLite database begin by clicking on the fa Add Spatialite Layer 4 oolbar button or by selecting the Add SpatiaLite Layer option from the Layer menu or by typing Ct r1 ShifttL 70 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 This will bring up a window which will allow you to either connect to a SpatiaLite database already known to QGIS which you
27. If you are not an advanced user and you are running QGIS on windows you might not be interested in reading the rest of this chapter Make sure you install QGIS in your system using the OSGeo4W application That will automatically install SAGA GRASS and OTB in your system and configure them so they can be run from QGIS All the algorithms in the simplified view of the toolbox will be ready to be run without needing any further configuration If you want to know more about how these providers work or want to use some algorithms not included in the simplified toolbox such as R scripts keep on reading 17 7 2 A note on file formats When using an external software opening a file in QGIS does not mean that it can be opened and processed as well on that other software In most cases it can read what you have opened in QGIS but in some cases that might not be the case When using databases or uncommon file formats whether for raster of vector layers problems might arise If that happens try to use well known file formats that you are sure that are understood by both programs and check to console output in the history and log dialog for knowing more about what is going wrong Using GRASS raster layers is for instance one case in which you might have trouble and not be able to complete your work if you call an external algorithm using such a layer as input For this reason these layers will not appear as available to algorithms You sho
28. Kanan Bawah kotak drop down 4 Pastikan kotak centang telah ditandai aktifkan Aktifkan Label Hak Cipta 5 Klik OK Dalam contoh di atas default QGIS menempatkan simbol hak cipta diikuti dengan tanggal di bagian bawah sudut kanan dari kanvas peta 8 6 3 Panah Utara A Panah Utara menempatkan panah utara sederhana di kanvas peta Saat ini hanya ada satu gaya yang tersedia Anda dapat mengatur sudut panah atau membiarkan QGIS mengatur arah secara otomatis Jika Anda memilih untuk membiarkan QGIS menentukan arah itu membuat QGIS menebak yang terbaik bagaimana panah harus berorientasi Untuk penempatan panah Anda memiliki empat pilihan sesuai dengan empat penjuru kanvas peta North Arrow Decoration Angle o 2 Placement Bottom Left Enable North Arrow Set direction automatically Help Cancel Look Gambar 8 8 Dialog Panah Utara 9 8 6 4 Bar Skala Lo Skala Bar menambahkan bar skala sederhana untuk kanvas peta Anda mengontrol gaya dan penempatan serta pelabelan bar OGIS hanya mendukung menampilkan skala dalam satuan yang sama dengan kerangka peta Anda Jadi jika satuan lapisan Anda dalam meter Anda tidak dapat membuat skala bar dalam kaki feet Demikian juga jika Anda menggunakan derajat desimal Anda tidak dapat membuat skala bar untuk menampilkan jarak dalam meter 8 6 Dekorasi 41 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Scale Bar Decoration Placement Top Riqht Scale bar style Tick Down
29. Saat ini memungkinkan memilih lebih dari satu lapisan atau grup pada waktu yang sama dengan menekan tombol Ctrl sambil memilih lapisan dengan tombol kiri tetikus Kemudian Anda dapat memindah semua lapisan terpilih ke dalam grup baru pada waktu yang sama Anda juga dapat menghapus lebih dari satu Lapisan atau Grup sekaligus dengan memilih beberapa Lapisan layer dengan menekan tombol Ct r1 dan setelah itu Ct r1 D Dengan cara ini semua Lapisan atau Grup terpilih akan dibuang dari daftar lapisan 7 3 1 Bekerja dengan Legenda urutan lapisan tersendiri Terdapat widget yang memungkinkan untuk mendefinisikan urutan legenda gambar independen Anda dapat mengaktifkannya dari menu Pengaturan Panel Urutan Lapisan Di sini menentukan urutan gambar dari lapisan dalam tampilan peta Melakukan hal ini memungkinkan untuk mengurutkan lapisan Anda dalam urutan kepentingan sebagai contoh tapi masih menampilkan mereka dalam urutan yang benar lihat figure layer order Mengaktifkan kotak fF Kontrol urutan rendering bawah daftar lapisan akan menyebabkan kembali ke suatu perilaku standar 7 3 Legenda Peta 31 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Layers ek i v M Boundaries Group m 3S gt B regions v MG alaska a v water Group gt MV majrivers F v lakes gt amp swamp gA v MA group1 oe M popp gt p m en ee al v airports e Pre on 2 4 S sa a Layer order K P amp swamp amp airports Z popp
30. Wp E N gt ve tabel ai FP SEXTANTE algorithm Slope length SEXTANTE algorithm Slope aspect curvature SEXTANTE algorithm Downslope distance gradient SEXTANTE algorithm Relative heights and slope positions SEXTANTE algorithm Upslope Area SEXTANTE algorithm Dtm filter slope based SEXTANTE algorithm Vegetation index Islope based SEXTANTE algorithm r slope aspect Generates raster layers of slope aspect cu SEXTANTE algorithm r fow Construction of slope curves flowlines flowpath le m Gambar 17 31 The SEXTANTE Commander 7 The commander is started from the Analysis menu or more practically pressing Shift Ctrl M you can change that default keyboard shortcut in the QGIS configuration if you prefer a different one Apart from executing SEXTANTE algorithms the commander gives you access to most of the functionality in QGIS which means that it gives you a practical and efficient way of running QGIS tasks and allows you to control QGIS reducing the usage of buttons and menus Moreover the commander is configurable and you can add your custom commands and have them just a few keystrokes away making it a powerful tool to become more productive in your daily work with QGIS 17 8 1 Available commands The commands available in the commander fall in the following categories 186 Bab 17 QGIS kerangka pengolahan QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 e SEXTANTE algorithms T
31. aes oei Orientation Landscape Export resolution 300 dpi 200 Print as raster gt amp Snap to grid gt amp Snap to alignments Help Close Gambar 18 1 Print Composer 4 The print composer provides four tabs e The Composition tab allows you to set paper size orientation the print quality for the output file in dpi and to activate snapping to a grid of a defined resolution You can also choose the Number of pages your composition will have Please note the fF Snap to grid feature only works if you define a grid resolution gt 0 Furthermore you can also activate the fF Print as raster checkbox This means all elements will be rastered before printing or saving as Postscript or PDF e The Item Properties tab displays the properties for the selected item element Click the FP Select Move item icon to select an element e g legend scalebar or label on the canvas Then click the Item Properties tab and customize the settings for the selected element e The Command history tab hidden by default displays a history of all changes applied to the print composer layout With a mouse click it is possible to undo and redo layout steps back and forth to a certain status 190 Bab 18 Print Composer QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 The Atlas generation tab allows to enable the generation of an atlas for the current composer and gives access to its parameters You can add multiple elements to the composer It is also possible to
32. allow try a non SSL connection if that fails try an SSL connection prefer the default try an SSL connection if that fails try a non SSL connection require only try an SSL connection e Username User name used to login to the database e Password Password used with Username to connect to the database Optional you can activate following checkboxes Ti Save Username 2 Save Password 3 Only look in the geometry_columns table E Don t resolve type of unrestricted columns GEOMETRY 3 Only look in the public schema E Also list tables with no geometry E Use estimated table metadata Once all parameters and options are set you can test the connection by clicking on the Test Connect button Tip QGIS User Settings and Security Depending on your computing environment storing passwords in your QGIS settings may be a security risk Your customized settings for QGIS are stored based on the operating system A the settings are stored in your home directory in qgis2 e the settings are stored in the registry Loading a PostGIS Layer Once you have one or more connections defined you can load layers from the PostgreSQL database Of course this requires having data in PostgreSQL See Section mporting Data into PostgreSQL for a discussion on importing data into the database To load a layer from PostGIS perform the following steps If the Add PostGIS layers dialog is not already open se
33. lihat figure_plugins_2 Jika Anda tidak ingin salah satu atau lebih dari repositori ditambahkan dapat dinonaktifkan melalui tombol Sunting atau benar benar dihapus dengan tombol Hapus Dengan demikian kita tidak bisa bertanggung jawab untuk mereka Anda juga dapat mengelola daftar repositori secara manual yaitu menambah menghapus dan mengedit data Tip Periksa Pembaruan Anda tetap dapat informasi tentang plugin Aktifkan kotak centang fF Check for updates on startup dari menu Settings QGIS akan memberitahu Anda setiap kali sebuah plugin atau pembaruan plugin tersedia 212 Bab 19 Plugin QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Plugin Manager E Installed a M check for updates on startup da every time QGIS starts er Settings Note If this function is enabled QGIS will inform you whenever a new plugin or plugin update is available Otherwise fetching repositories will be performed during opening of the Plugin Manager window M Show also experimental plugins Note Experimental plugins are generally unsuitable for production use These plugins are in early stages of development and should be considered incomplete or proof of concept tools QGIS does not recommend installing these plugins unless you intend to use them for testing purposes Plugin repositories Status Name URL connected QGIS Official Plugin Repository http plugins qgis org plugins plugins xml qgis Reload repository Addis Edit
34. sesuai dengan kebutuhan Anda Proxy Standar Proxy ditentukan berdasarkan aplikasi pengaturan menggunakan proxy Socks5Proxy Proxy generik untuk setiap jenis koneksi Mendukung TCP UDP mengikat ke port koneksi masuk dan otentikasi HttpProxy Menggunakan perintah CONNECT mendukung hanya koneksi TCP mendukung oten tikasi HttpCachingProxy Menggunakan perintah normal HTTP itu hanya berguna dalam konteks per mintaan HTTP FtpCachingProxy Menggunakan proxy FTP itu hanya berguna dalam konteks permintaan FTP Tidak termasuk beberapa URL dapat ditambahkan ke kotak teks di bawah pengaturan proxy lihat Fig ure_Network_Tab Jika Anda membutuhkan informasi lebih rinci tentang pengaturan proxy yang berbeda silakan lihat panduan QT librari dokumentasi di http doc trolltech com 4 5 qnetworkproxy html ProxyType enum Tip Menggunakan Proxi Menggunakan proxi kadang kadang bisa rumit Hal ini berguna untuk coba dan eror jenis proxi di atas dan memeriksa apakah mereka berhasil dalam kasus Anda Anda dapat mengubah pilihan sesuai dengan kebutuhan Anda Beberapa perubahan mungkin memerlukan restart QGIS sebelum berjalan efektif 8 Pengaturan tersimpan di berkas teks SHOME config 0OGIS ggis conf 54 Bab 9 Konfigurasi QGIS QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 X Anda dapat menemukan pengaturan Anda di SHOME Library Preferences org qgis qgis plist e pengaturan terkirim ke registri HKEY CURRENT_
35. tion Here we simply click on the button Set current QGIS extent to apply the extend of the loaded layer alaska shp as the GRASS default region extend Click Next We also need to define a MAPSET within our new LOCATION You can name it whatever you like we used demo when creating a new LOCATION GRASS automatically creates a special MAPSET called 16 3 GRASS LOCATION and MAPSET A QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 14 15 16 PERMANENT designed to store the core data for the project its default spatial extend and coordinate system definitions Neteler amp Mitasova 2008 Literatur dan Referensi Web Check out the summary to make sure it s correct and click Finish The new LOCATION alaska and two MAPSETs demo and PERMANENT are created The currently opened working set is demo as you defined Notice that some of the tools in the GRASS toolbar that were disabled are now enabled 3G New Mapset GRASS Location Location Create new location The GRASS location is a collection of maps for a particular territory or project lt Back Next gt Cancel Gambar 16 2 Creating a new GRASS LOCATION or a new MAPSET in QGIS If that seemed like a lot of steps it s really not all that bad and a very quick way to create a LOCATION The LOCATION alaska is now ready for data import see section Importing data into a GRASS LOCATION You can also use the already existing vector
36. vektor Untuk lapisan vektor GRASS Y Toggle mengedit tidak tersedia Lihat bagian Digitizing and editing a GRASS vector layer untuk informasi menyunting lapisan layer vektor GRASS Tombol kanan tetikus untuk lapisan raster Perbesar lapisan extent e Perbesar Skala Terbaik 100 e Peregangan Menggunakan Luas Terkini e Tampilkan di overview e Buang e Duplikat e Atur CRS Lapisan e Atur CRS Proyek dari Lapisan e Simpan sebagai e Properti e Ubah Nama e Gaya Salin e Tambah Grup Baru Perlihatkan semua e Tutup semua e Pembaruan Pesanan Drawing Selain itu menurut posisi dan seleksi lapisan layer e Ubah jadi item tingkat teratas e Grup dipilih Tombol kanan tetikus menu untuk lapisan vektor Perbesar ke Lapisan Extent e Tampilkan di Overview e Buang e Duplikat e Atur CRS Lapisan e Atur CRS Proyek dari Lapisan e Buka Tabel Atribut 30 Bab 7 AGIS GUI QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 e Toggle Mengedit tidak tersedia untuk Lapisan GRASS e Simpan Sebagai e Simpan Yang Diseleksi Sebagai e Saring e Tampilkan Fitur Hitung e Properti e Ubah Nama e Gaya Salin e Tambah Grup Baru Perlihatkan semua e Tutup semua e Pembaruan Pesanan Drawing Selain itu menurut posisi dan seleksi lapisan layer e Ubah jadi item tingkat teratas e Grup dipilih Tombol kanan tetikus menu untuk grup lapisan Perbesar ke Grup e Buang e Atur Grup CRS e Ubah Nama e Tambah Grup Baru Perlihatkan semua e Tutup semua e Pembaruan Pesanan Drawing
37. 133 Rastet Caleulator o ac D oe oe Se PG SSS See eb wwe a ee we 120 Pekerjaan dengan Data OGC 121 14 1 QGIS as OGC Data Client 2 2 ee 121 14 2 QGIS as OGC Data Server sa hss eb ww irar eee ERR Se bw we Reb we ea ae Oe 129 Pekerjaan dengan Data GPS 133 oh OPS Weise eee oa eee ee ee eee ee ee ohh Soe eee eae 133 52 Live GPS macking 4 eg eet SEE tsdrisi SHE SEEEESEE ESTEE GK CE OG 136 GRASS GIS Integration 139 16 1 Starting the GRASS plugin Lo esses PARES Eee EEE ew OEE EEE EE we ee GS 139 16 2 Loading GRASS raster and vector layers o noaoo 140 16 3 GRASS LOCATION and MAPSET 0 0 00 00 00 eee eee ee 140 16 4 Importing data into a GRASS LOCATION 2 2 2 2 00002 ee eee 143 16 5 The GRASS vector data model Erra 143 16 6 Creating anew GRASS vector layer 2 se dbee dees eSEoe ee SR BN BAKU RE HS 144 16 7 Digitizing and editing a GRASS vector layer 144 lOS The GRASS reman 00 oo tae bem EGER GEG PAIP OER EOE Ee EH 147 16 9 The GRASS toolbox ERED ERODE HED HERE REE ER nm 147 17 QGIS kerangka pengolahan 171 Pengantar x srsasas 17 2 Thetoolbox 17 3 The graphical modeler 17 4 The batch processing interface 17 5 Using processing algorithms from the console 17 6 The history manager 17 7 Configuring external applications 17 8 The SEXTANTE Commander 18 Print Composer 18 1 Firststeps
38. 17 4 The batch processing interface 17 4 1 Introduction All algorithms including models can be executed as a batch process That is they can be executed using not a single set of inputs but several of them executing the algorithm as many times as needed This is useful when processing large amounts of data since it is not necessary to launch the algorithm many times from the toolbox To execute an algorithm as a batch process right click on its name in the toolbox and select the Execute as batch process option in the pop up menu that will appear Gambar 17 26 Batch Processing Right Click 7 17 4 2 The parameters table Executing a batch process is similar to performing a single execution of an algorithm Parameter values have to be defined but in this case we need not just a single value for each parameter but a set of them instead one for each time the algorithm has to be executed Values are introduced using a table like the one shown next Batch Processing Gaussian Filter xl Deleterow Caneel Gambar 17 27 Batch Processing 7 Each line of this table represents a single execution of the algorithm and each cell contains the value of one of the parameters It is similar to the parameters dialog that you see when executing an algorithm from the toolbox but with a different arrangement By default the table contains just two rows You can add or remove rows u
39. 5 Attribute information window All of the attribute information for the point associated with the photo graph being viewed is displayed here If the file type being referenced in the displayed record is not an image but is of a file type defined in the Configure External Applications tab then when you double click on the value of the field containing the path to the file the application to open the file will be launched to view or hear the contents of the file If the file extension is recognized the attribute data will be displayed in green 6 Navigation buttons Use the Previous and Next buttons to load the previous or next feature when more than one feature is selected Understanding the Options window Event Browser Displaying records 03 of 76 Display Options Configure External Applications File path Attribute containing path to file image 2 Path is relative 1 Remember this amp Reset Compass bearing Attribute containing compass bearing B _ Display compass bearing Remember this amp Reset Compass offset Manual Cc From Attribute ELEV Remember this Reset Relative paths The base path or url From which images and documents can be relative Oz Path 51 Alexandre Dropbox Trabalho OGIS agis sample data photos Remember this amp Reset E g Replace entire path url stored in image path attribute with user defined 5 Base Path i e keep only filename
40. Delete Close Help Gambar 19 2 Pengaturan Plugin 19 1 Plugin QGIS 213 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 19 2 Menggunakan QGIS Plugin Inti Referensi Panduan Tangkapan Koordinat Pengelola DB a amp Pengubah DXF2Shape eVis fTools Perangkat GPS 54 He Gy cae GRASS Alat GDAL Pemberi Georeferensi GDAL Heatmap E Plugin Interpolasi Menyunting di luar jaringan Oracle Spasial Georaster Pengelola Plugin Ke 8 lt Analisis Raster Terrain Plugin Grafik Jalan Plugin SQL Anywhere Query Spasial Statistik Zonal Tetikus menangkap koordinat di CRS yang berbeda Mengelola basis data Anda dengan QGIS Mengubah berkas format dari DXF ke SHP Alat Visualisasi Perangkat alat vektor Alat untuk bongkar impor data GPS Fungsionalitas GRASS Fungsionalitas raster GDAL Georeferensi Raster dengan GDAL Membuat heatmap raster dari memasukkan titik vektos Interpolasi pada dasar simpul dari lapisan vektor Penyuntingan di luar jaringan dan sinkronisasi dengan basis data Akses Oracle Spasial GeoRaster Mengelola inti dan plugin eksternal Fitur menghitung geomorfologi dari DEM Analisis jalur terpendek Akses SQL dimanapun DB Query spasial pada vektor Hitung statistik raster untuk poligon vektor 19 3 Plugin Mengambil Koordinat ref coordcapt Plugin Pengelola DB Plugin Pengonversi Dxf2Shp eVis Plugin Plugin flools GPS Plugin GRASS GIS Integrati
41. Document and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on These may be placed in the History section You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission 11 For any section Entitled Acknowledgements or Dedications Preserve the Title of the section and pre serve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and or dedica tions given therein 12 Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document unaltered in their text and in their titles Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles 13 Delete any section Entitled Endorsements Such a section may not be included in the Modified Version 14 Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled Endorsements or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section 15 Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers If the Modified Version includes new front matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant To do this add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version s license notice These titles must be distinct from any other section titles You may add a sec
42. E QGIS styled kotak grup g Gunakan dialog pemilih warna live updating Berkas proyek e Buka proyek pada peluncuran alas memilih antara Baru Terbaru dan Khusus Ketika memilih khusus menggunakan untuk menentukan proyek 3 Buat proyek baru dari proyek default Anda memiliki kemungkinan untuk menekan Atur proyek sekarang sebagai default atau pada Reset default Anda dapat menelusuri melalui berkas berkas dan menen tukan direktori dimana Anda menemukan pengguna ditetapkan proyek template Anda Akan ada sebuah entri di Project Baru dari Template jika Anda pertama kali mengaktifkan Buat proyek baru dari proyek default dan kemudian simpan proyek dalam folder proyek template E Prompt untuk menyimpan proyek dan sumber data perubahan bila diperlukan E Peringatkan ketika membuka berkas proyek yang disimpan dengan versi lama dari lggl Aktifkan macro MI Opsi ini diciptakan untuk menangani macro yang ditulis untuk melakukan aksi pada proyek Anda bisa memilih diantara Tidak pernah Bertanya Hanya untuk sesi ini dan Selalu tidak direkomendasikan 9 3 2 Menu Sistem Lingkungan Sistem lingkungan variabel saat ini dapat dilihat dan banyak dikonfigurasi dalam menu Lingkungan lihat fig ure_environment_variables Hal ini berguna untuk platform seperti Mac di mana aplikasi GUI tidak selalu mewarisi lingkungan shell pengguna Ini juga berguna untuk pengaturan melihat lingkungan
43. Gambar 12 21 Resulting built in form in a data entry session e Update Extents information for a layer e View or change the projection of the specific vector layer clicking on Specify E Scale dependent visibility e You can set the Maximum inclusive and Minimum exclusive scale The scale can also be set by the Current buttons Feature subset e With the Query Builder button you can create a subset of the features in the layer that will be visualized also refer to section Save selected features as new layer Layer Properties regions General nr General w Layer info amp Style Layer name regions displayed as regions abe Labels Layer source S1 Alexandre Dropbox Trabalho OGIS agis sample data shapefiles regions shp Labels ng deprecated Data source encoding System 5 Fields v Coordinate reference system Ga Display dn EPSG 2964 NAD27 Alaska Albers Specify 2 Actions Create spatial index Update extents ef Joins law iia v Scale dependent visibility Metadata w Feature subset Restore Default Style Save As Default Load Style NE Save Style v Help Apply Cancel OK Gambar 12 22 General menu in vector layers properties dialog 86 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 12 2 5 Display Menu L In QGIS 2 0 there is now an own menu for the map tips It includes a new feature Map Tip display text in HTML While
44. Informasi Peta D Bookmark Baru yooh Lihat Bookmarks he Refresh 7 1 5 Lapisan Pilihan Menu Baru Lekatkan Lapisan dan Grup Tambah Lapisan Vektor i Tambahkan Lapisan Raster x Tambah Lapisan PostGIS Le Tambahkan Lapisan SpatiaLite J Tambahkan Lapisan MSSQL Spasial at Tambah Lapisan Oracle GeoRaster yA Tambah Lapisan SQL Anywhere Tambah Lapisan WMS WMTS Tambah Lapisan WCS va Tambah Lapisan WFS 2 Gaya Salin Tambahkan Lapisan Delimited Teks Gaya Tempel 26 Ctrl B Ctrl Shift B Cor ls Cora lihat Pilih dan lepas fitur Cer lbrsenicer lihat Mengukur kbd Ctrl Shift F Ctrli J Navigasi Peta Navigasi Peta Navigasi Peta Navigasi Peta Atribut Atribut Atribut Navigasi Peta Navigasi Peta Navigasi Peta Navigasi Peta Navigasi Peta Navigasi Peta lihat Dekorasi Ctrl tR kbd Ctrl Shift V CLUrIl shilit k Ceri oat Se ea Ctrl Shift4 M Ctrl Shift w lihat Bookmark Spasial lihat Bookmark Spasial Atribut Atribut Atribut Navigasi Peta Shortcut Referensi lihat Creating new Vector layers lihat Proyek proyek Nesting lihat Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor lihat Loading raster data in OGIS lihat PostGIS Layers lihat SpatiaLite Layers lihat label mssgl lihat Oracle GeoRaster Plugin Lihat Plugin SOL Anywhere lihat WMS WMTS Client lihat WCS Client lihat WFS and WFS T Client lihat Menambahkan Lapisan Teks Delimited Delimited Text Lay
45. P E amp Modeler D E Example models Ha E r 6 Example scripts El amp saga Contributions E Georeferencing DEM GF Geostatistics Grid Analysis Grid Calculus Grid Filter Grid Gridding Grid Spline amp Grid Tools Grid Visualization Imagery Classification Imagery RGA Slope Aspect Curvature Catchment Area Flow Tracing Imagery Segmentation G Imagery Tools iging Projections and Transformations amp Shapes Transect Simulation CA amp Simulation Ecosystems BH Simulation Fire Spreading Topographic Wetness Index TWI amp Simulation Hydrology zz Terrain Analysis Channels G Terrain Analysis Hydrology El Terrain Analysis Lighting ID i a amp Terrain Analysis Morphometry TE ra E HH in Analvsis Profiles i K ale Gambar 17 21 Model Parameters 7 Elements can be dragged to a different position within the canvas to change the way the module structure is displayed and make it more clear and intuitive Links between elements are update automatically You can run your algorithm anytime clicking on the Run button However in order to use it from the toolbox it has to be saved and the modeler dialog closed to allow the toolbox to refresh its contents 17 3 3 Saving and loading models Use the Save button to save the current model and the Open one to open
46. Perbedaan Tampilan lapisan seperti keluaran yang berisi daerah yang tidak memotong lapisan klip Larut Menggabungkan fitur berdasarkan masukan bidang Semua fitur dengan nilai masukan yang identik digabungkan untuk membentuk satu fitur tunggal Menghilangkan Menggabungkan fitur yang dipilih dengan poligon tetangga dengan daerah poligon sepotong terbesar atau batas umum terbesar Tabel Ftools 3 fTools Peralatan Geoprocessing 19 7 Plugin fTools 227 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 19 7 4 Peralatan Geometri wona kemen TT Periksa validitas geometri Ekspor Tambah kolom geometri Polygon centroids Triangulasi Delaunay Poligon Voronoi Sederhanakan geometri Geometri densify Multipart ke singgelpart Singgelpart ke multipart Poligon ke garis Garis ke poligon Ekstrak simpul Periksa poligon untuk persimpangan ditutup lubang dan memperbaiki pengurutan node Tambah lapisan vektor geometri ke lapisan poin XCOORD YCOORD garis LENGTH atau poligon AREA PERIMETER Menghitung centroid berlaku untuk setiap poligon dalam masukan lapisan poligon Menghitung dan keluaran sebagai poligon triangulasi Delaunay dari masukan lapisan vektor titik Menghitung poligon voronoi dari masukan lapisan vektor Generalisasi garis atau poligon dengan algoritma Douglas Peucker dimodifikasi Densify garis atau poligon dengan menambahkan simpul Mengkonversi fitur multipart ke beberapa fitur singgelpart Membuat polig
47. This may not be a problem for most applications but it is something to consider Offset Curves The Offset Curve tool creates parallel shifts of line layers The tool can be applied to the edited layer the geometries are modified or also to background layers creates copies of the lines rings and adds it to the the edited layer It is thus ideally suited for the creation of distance line layers The displacement is shown at the bottom left of the taskbar To create a shift of a line layer you have to go into editing mode and then select the feature You can make the ZY Ofset Curve tool active and drag the cross to the desired distance Your changes then can be saved with the save Layer Edits tool Split Features You can split features using the os Split Features icon on the toolbar Just draw a line across the feature you want to split Merge selected features E3 The 2 Merge Selected Features too allows to merge features that have common boundaries and the same attributes Merge attributes of selected features The min Merse Attributes of Selected Features too allows to merge attributes of features with common boundaries and at tributes without merging their boundaries You can merge the attributes when selecting several features at once Then press the mim Merse Attributes of Selected Features button Now QGIS offers you which attributes are to be applied to all selected objects As a result all objects have the same a
48. When would the copy and paste function come in handy Well it turns out that you can edit more than one layer at a time and copy paste features between layers Why would we want to do this Say we need to do some work on a new layer but only need one or two lakes not the 5 000 on our big_lakes layer We can create a new layer and use copy paste to plop the needed lakes into it As an example we are copying some lakes to a new layer 1 Load the layer you want to copy from source layer 2 Load or create the layer you want to copy to target layer 98 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 3 Start editing for target layer 4 Make the source layer active by clicking on it in the legend DI Select Single Feature 5 Use the amp 8 IC tool to select the feature s on the source layer 6 Click on the Copy Features tool 7 Make the destination layer active by clicking on it in the legend 8 Click on the Paste Features too 9 Stop editing and save the changes What happens if the source and target layers have different schemas field names and types are not the same QGIS populates what matches and ignores the rest If you don t care about the attributes being copied to the target layer it doesn t matter how you design the fields and data types If you want to make sure everything feature and its attributes gets copied make sure the schemas match Tip Congruency of Pasted Features If your sou
49. aktifkan tombol custom delimiter dan jika setiap baris dalam file dibagi menggunakan ekspresi reguler silakan aktifkan tombol Iradiobuttononl guilabel Regular expression delimiter 2 Sebagai berkas teks Opsi Rekam biasanya menyediakan baris header dipisahkan kolom nama Ini biasanya baris pertama dalam berkas teks Jika tidak ada baris header yang tersedia nonaktfikan kotak centang C rekaman pertama adalah kolom nama Dan jika baris header bukan baris pertama dari berkas teks tentukan jumlah baris header untuk dibuang 3 Sebagai Opsi Lapangan Anda dapat memotong spasi kolom leading dan trailing dari mengaktifkan kotak centang CA Trim fields Anda bisa C Discard empty fields di setiap rekaman dan Anda juga bisa menen tukan bahwa C Sebagai pemisah desimal adalah koma Jika tidak akan menjadi titik 4 Sebagai Definisi Geometri berkas teks khas menyediakan 2 Koordinate Poin Ini berarti harus ada kolom X dan Y dengan nilai koordinat Jika berkas teks menyediakan kolom Well Known Text maka harus ada kolom WKT dengan informasi geometri untuk byek poin garis atau poligon Kolom ini dapat memi liki nama apapun Jika tabel atribut mendefinisikan tidak geometri Koordinat x dan y harus spesifik sebagai angka Sistem koordinat tidak penting Jika didefinisikan dalam derajat menit detik aktfikan kota centang C Koordinat DMS 5 Sebagai Pengaturan Lapisan Anda bisa mengaktifkan C Gunakan Indeks Spasial
50. cation mode Equal interval you only need to select the number of classes 902 and press the button Classify You can invert the colors of the the color map by clicking the C Invert checkbox In case of the Mode Continous QGIS creates classes depending on the Min and Max automatically Defining Min Max values can be done with the help of Load min max values section A lot of images have few very low and high data These outliers can be eliminated using the 2 Cumulative count cut setting The standard data range is set from 2 until 98 of the data values and can be adapted manually With this setting the gray character of the image can disappear With the scaling option Min max QGIS creates a color table with the whole data included in the original image E g QGIS creates a color table with 256 values given the fact that you have 8bit bands You can also calculate your color table using the Mean standard deviation x 80 Then only the values within the standard deviation or within multiple standard deviations are considered for the color table Color rendering For every Band rendering a Color rendering 1s possible You can achieve special rendering effects for your raster file s using one one of the blending modes see blend_modes Further settings can be made in modifiying the Brightness the Saturation and the Contrast You can use a Grayscale option where you can choose between By lightness
51. cations in the Modified Version together with at least five of the principal authors of the Document all of its principal authors if it has fewer than five unless they release you from this requirement State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the Modified Version as the publisher Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices oe IN ae ae Include immediately after the copyright notices a license notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms of this License in the form shown in the Addendum below 258 Bab 21 Appendix QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 7 Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document s license notice 8 Include an unaltered copy of this License 9 Preserve the section Entitled History Preserve its Title and add to it an item stating at least the title year new authors and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page If there is no section Entitled History in the Document create one stating the title year authors and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence 10 Preserve the network location if any given in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the
52. dalam Quantum GIS tidak pernah punya makna khusus dan dualitas mengacu pada proyek kami baik sebagai Quantum GIS dan OGIS menyebabkan beberapa kebingungan Kami merampingkan proyek kami dan sebagai bagian dari proses kita secara resmi menjatuhkan penggunaan kata Quantum selanjutnya kita akan dikenal hanya sebagai OGIS dieja dengan 5 7 Alat Analisis 15 semua huruf dalam huruf besar Kami akan memperbarui semua kode kita dan bahan publikasi untuk mencerminkan hal ini 5 10 Legenda Pelapis layer e Legenda umpan balik dan pilihan visual Jumlah total untuk fitur pada lapisan layer serta per simbol Lapisan layer vektor dalam mode sunting kini memiliki ikon pensil merah untuk menunjukkan proses belum disimpan suntingan Lapisan layer yang aktif sekarang digarisbawahi untuk menunjukkan itu pilihan dalam lapisan lay er banyak atau ketika tidak ada pilihan Mengklik di spasi non list item sekarang membersihkan seleksi Klik kanan Right clicks sekarang diperlakukan sebagai klik kiri left click sebelum menampilkan menu utama memungkinkan untuk satu kali klik bukan dua Kelompok dan lapisan layer dapat opsional dengan huruf tebal Ikon pratinjau lapisan layer raster yang dihasilkan sekarang dapat dimatikan untuk proyek proyek di mana render tersebut mungkin berjalan lambat e Duplicate existing map layer Duplikat lapisan layer vektor dan raster dipilih dalam legenda lapisan peta Mirip dengan mengim
53. dempart demparti Gambar 17 13 Multiple Selection Click on the button on the right side to see the table and edit its values T Gambar 17 14 Fixed Table 7 Depending on the algorithm the number of rows can be modified or not using the buttons on the right side of the window You will find a Help tab in the the parameters dialog If a help file is available it will be shown giving you more information about the algorithms and detailed descriptions of what each parameter does Unfortunately most algorithms lack good documentation but if you feel like contributing to the project this would be a good place to start A note on projections Algorithms run from the processing framework and also most of the external applications whose algorithms are exposed through it do not perform any reprojection on input layers and assumes that all of them are already in a common coordinate system and ready to be analized Whenever you use more than one layer as input to an algorithm whether vector or raster it is up to you to make sure that they are all in the same coordinate system Note that due to QGIS s on the fly reprojecting capabilities although two layers might seem to overlap and match that might not be true if their original coordinates are used without reprojecting them onto a common coordinate system That reprojection should be done manually and then use t
54. e Tambahkan beberapa lapisan dan simbol sebelum menggambar e Tambahkan satu atau lebih lapisan dan atur skala ketergantungan sebelum menggambar e Tambahkan satu atau lebih lapisan dan perbesar ke tampilan yang spesifik sebelum menggambar e Kombinasi dari yang ada di atas Aktifkan kotak centang C Render mengaktifkan rendering dan dan menyebabkan refresh langsung dari kanvas peta 8 3 Konteks Bantuan 37 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Pengaturan Lapisan Tambah Opsi Anda dapat mengatur pilihan untuk selalu memuat lapisan baru tanpa menggambar mereka Ini berarti lapisan akan ditambahkan ke peta namun visibilitas kotak centang dalam legenda akan dicentang secara default Untuk mengatur opsi ini pilih menu opsi Pengaturan Opsi dan klik pada menu Rendering Hapus tanda centang A Secara standar lapisan baru ditambahkan ke peta selalu ditampilkan Setiap lapisan ditambahkan ke peta akan tidak terlihat secara standar Opsi lain di menu Pengaturan Opsi Rendering kotak centang fF Aktifkan buffer Ini memberikan kin erja grafis yang lebih baik pada kemungkinan kehilangan biaya untuk membatalkan rendering dan menggambar fitur tambahan Jika tidak dicentang Anda dapat mengatur Jumlah fitur untuk menarik sebelum memperbarui tampilan selain itu tidak aktif Akhirnya Anda bisa mengaktifkan kotak centang ag Gunakan render caching mungkin untuk mempercepat gam bar ulang Menghentikan Rendering Untuk menghentikan penggambaran p
55. gt amp PostGIS v SpatiaLite poligonos testes v spatialite test db sglite E Spatialindex E geom cols ref sys General info E geometry columns E geometry columns auth Relation type Table E idx poligonos testes ROWS 2 EF idx poligonos testes B idx_poligonos_testes_ SpatiaLite E idx_poligonos_testes_ poligonos_testes Column geometry E spatial_ref_sys Geometry MULTIPOLYGON EF spatialite history Dimension XY E sqlite_sequence Spatial ref Datum 73 Modified Portuguese Grid E views geometry colu 27493 E virts geometry columns Extent unknown Find out Fields Gambar 19 4 Dialog Pengelola DB 8 jika belum melakukannya Tab Tabel menampilkan semua atribut dan tab Pratinjau render geometri sebagai prat injau 19 5 Plugin Pengonversi Dxf2Shp Plugin pengonversi dxf2shape dapat digunakan untuk mengkonversi data vektor dari DXF ke format Shapefile Hal ini membutuhkan parameter berikut harus ditentukan sebelum menjalankan g har Dxf Importer D g ey Input and output Input Daf file lafggis sample data gps gsodata dxf m Outputfile qgis sample data gps geodata shp Export text labels Output file type 3 Polyline Ds da Gambar 19 5 Plugin Pengonversi Dxf2Shp e Masukan berkas DXF Masukkan path ke berkas DXF yang akan dikonversi e Keluaran berkas SHP Masukkan nama yang diinginkan dari Shapefile yang akan dibuat Keluara
56. river200m Areas lo i P rivers Islands lo sii North 6502586 8303 472 South 1433525 7988 7208 East 4615124 9789 8512 West 4480198 522 21446 Gambar 16 15 GRASS LOCATION browser 2 The toolbar inside the Browser tab offers following tools to manage the selected LOCATION N Add selected map to canvas Copy selected map Rename selected map i Delete selected map LI Set current region to selected map Refresh browser window The Rename selected map and i Delete selected map only work with maps inside your currently selected MAP SET All other tools also work with raster and vector layers in another MAP SET 16 9 4 Customizing the GRASS Toolbox Nearly all GRASS modules can be added to the GRASS toolbox A XML interface is provided to parse the pretty simple XML files which configures the modules appearance and parameters inside the toolbox A sample XML file for generating the module v buf fer v buffer qgm looks like this 154 Bab 16 GRASS GIS Integration QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt DOCTYPE ggisgrassmodule SYSTEM http mrcc com ggisgrassmodule dtd gt lt qgisgrassmodule label Vector buffer module v buffer gt lt option key input typeoption type layeroption layer gt lt option key buffer gt lt option key output gt lt qgisgrassmodule gt The parser reads this definition and creates a new tab inside the toolb
57. y xX arcustangens of y x using the signs of the two arguments to determine the guadrant of the result exp exponential of an value in value of the natural logarithm of the passed expression log10 value of the base 10 logarithm of the passed expression log value of the logarithm of the passed value and base round number to number of decimal places rand random integer within the range specified by the minimum and maximum argument inclusive randf random float within the range specified by the minimum and maximum argument inclusive max largest value in a set of values min smallest value in a set of values clamp restricts an input value to a specified range scale linear transforms a given value from an input domain to an output range using linear interpolation scale_exp transforms a given value from an input domain to an output range using an exponential curve floor rounds a number downwards ceil rounds a number upwards Spi pi as value tor calculations Conversions This group contains functions to convert on data type to another e g string to integer integer to string toint converts a string to integer number toreal converts a string to real number tostring convert number to string todatetime convert a string into Qt data time type todate convert a string into Qt data type totime convert a string into Qt time type tointerval converts a string to a interval type Can be used to take days hours month etc off a date
58. 10 Help Close Select layer s Gambar 14 2 Dialog for adding a WMS server showing its available layers 8 The Options field provides a text field where you can add a Layer name for the WMS layer This name will be presented in the legend after loading the layer Below the layer name you can define Tile size if you want to set tile sizes eg 256x256 to split up the WMS reguest into multiple reguests The Feature limit for GetFeatureInfo defines what features from the server to query If you selecta WMS from the list a field with the default projection provided by the mapserver appears If the Change button is active you can click on it and change the default projection of the WMS to another CRS provided by the WMS server Layer Order The tab Layer Order lists the selected layers available from the current connected WMS server You may notice that some layers are expandable this means that the layer can be displayed in a choice of image styles You can select several layers at once but only one image style per layer When several layers are selected they will be combined at the WMS Server and transmitted to OGIS in one g0 Tip WMS Layer Ordering WMS layers rendered by a server are overlaid in the order listed in the Layers section from top to bottom of the list If you want to change the overlay order you can use the tab Layer Order Transparency In this version of OGIS the Global transparency setting from t
59. 150 0800000000 Acacia mearnsii 34 9000000000 150 1200000000 Acacia mearnsii 35 2200000000 149 9300000000 Acacia mearnsii 32 2700000000 150 4100000000 As an exercise we create an action that does a Google search on the lakes layer First we need to determine the URL needed to perform a search on a keyword This is easily done by just going to Google and doing a simple search then grabbing the URL from the address bar in your browser From this little effort we see that the format is http google com search q qgis where QGIS is the search term Armed with this information we can proceed 1 Make sure the lakes layer is loaded 2 Open the Layer Properties dialog by double clicking on the layer in the legend or right click and choose Properties from the popup menu 3 Click on the Actions menu 4 Enter a name for the action for example Google Search 5 For the action we need to provide the name of the external program to run In this case we can use Firefox If the program is not in your path you need to provide the full path 6 Following the name of the external application add the URL used for doing a Google search up to but not included the search term http google com search q 7 The text in the Action field should now look like this firefox http google com search q 8 Click on the drop down box containing the field names for the lakes layer It s located just to the left of the Insert Field button 9 Fr
60. 7 17 3 2 Definition of the workflow Once the inputs have been defined it is time to define the algorithms to apply on them Algorithms can be found in the Algorithms tab grouped much in the same way as they are in the toolbox rocessing modeler xi Bai Gambar 17 19 Model Parameters 7 The appearance of the toolbox has two modes here as well simplified and advanced However there is no element 17 3 The graphical modeler 167 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 to switch between views in the modeler and you have to do it in the toolbox The mode that is selected in the toolbox is the one that will be used for the list of algorithms in the modeler To add an algorithm to a model double click on its name An execution dialog will appear with a content similar to the one found in the execution panel that is shown when executing the algorithm from the toolbox The one shown next correspond to the SAGA Convergence index algorithm the same one we saw in the section dedicated to the toolbox Parameters Help Elevation DEM v Method 0 Aspect x Gradient Calculation 0 2x2 2 Convergence Index OutputRaster gt Parent algorithms 0 elements selected Gambar 17 20 Model Parameters 7 As you can see some differences exist Instead of the file output box that was used to set the filepath for output layers and tables a simple text box is If the layer generated by the algorithm is just a tempo
61. ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IM PLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL ITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFEC TIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDIS TRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES IN CLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PRO GRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILI TY OF SUCH DAMAGES QGIS Qt exception for GPL In addition as a special exception the QGIS Development Team gives permission to link the code of this program with the Qt library including but not limited to the following versions both free and commercial Qt Non commerical Windows Qt Windows Qt X11 Qt Mac and Qt Embedded or with modified versions of Qt that use the same license as Qt and distribute linked combinations including the two You must obey the GNU General Public License in all respects for all of the code us
62. But this License is not limited to software manuals it can be used for any textual work regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference 1 APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS This License applies to any manual or other work in any medium that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License Such a notice grants a world wide royalty free license unlimited in duration to use that work under the conditions stated herein The Document below refers to any such manual or work Any member of the public is a licensee and is addressed as you You accept the license if you copy modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law A Modified Version of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it either copied verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language A Secondary Section is a named appendix or a front matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document s overall subject or to related matters and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject Thus if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics The relationshi
63. Connection window The window has three tabs Predefined Queries Database Connection and SQL Query The Output Console window at the bottom of the window displays the status of actions initiated by the different sections of this module Connect to a database Click on the Database Connection tab to open the database connection interface Next use the Database Type T combobox to select the type of database that you want to connect to If a password or username is required that information can be entered in the Username and Password textboxes Enter the database host in the Database Host textbox This option is not available if you selected MS Access as the database type If the database resides on your desktop you should enter localhost Enter the name of the database in the Database Name textbox If you selected ODBC as the database type you need to enter the data source name When all of the parameters are filled in click on the Connect button If the connection is successful a message will be written in the Output Console window stating that the connection was established If a connection was not established you will need to check that the correct parameters were entered above 1 Database Type A dropdown list to specify the type of database that will be used Database Host The name of the database host Port The port number if a MySQL or PostgreSQL database type is selected Database Name The name of
64. DPI 300 amp e OPACITIES parameter Opacity can be set on layer or group level Allowed values range from 0 fully transparent to 255 fully opaque Example http localhost cgi bin ggis_mapserv fcgi REQUEST GetMap amp LAYERS mylayerl mylayer2 amp OPACITIES 125 2008 132 Bab 14 Pekerjaan dengan Data OGC BAB 15 Pekerjaan dengan Data GPS 15 1 GPS Plugin 15 1 1 What is GPS GPS the Global Positioning System is a satellite based system that allows anyone with a GPS receiver to find their exact position anywhere in the world It is used as an aid in navigation for example in airplanes in boats and by hikers The GPS receiver uses the signals from the satellites to calculate its latitude longitude and sometimes elevation Most receivers also have the capability to store locations known as waypoints sequences of locations that make up a planned route and a tracklog or track of the receivers movement over time Waypoints routes and tracks are the three basic feature types in GPS data QGIS displays waypoints in point layers while routes and tracks are displayed in linestring layers 15 1 2 Loading GPS data from a file There are dozens of different file formats for storing GPS data The format that QGIS uses is called GPX GPS eXchange format which is a standard interchange format that can contain any number of waypoints routes and tracks in the same file To load a GPX file you first need to load the plugin Plugins
65. File keluaran Masukkan nama untuk file raster yang dihasilkan Tambah hasil ke proyek untuk memuat hasil kedalam kanvas peta Z Interpolation plugin V Y amp Input Output Vector layers elevp Y Interpolation method Triangular interpolation TIN v Interpolation attribute ELEV Y Number of columns 998 amp Number of rows 854 lt gt lt gt _ Use z Coordinate for interpolation Cellsize X 5000 00000 Cellsize Y 5000 00000 Add Remove X min 2 818e 06 Xmax 2 17236e 06 Vector layer Attribute Type Ymin 4 10224e 06 Ymax 8 376e 06 elevp ELEV Points Set to current extent Output file am Tp V Add result to project amp OK Cancel Gambar 19 16 Plugin Interpolasi 19 10 1 Menggunakan plugin interpolasi 1 Mulai QGIS dan muat lapisan vektor titik seperti elevp csv 2 Muat plugin interpolasi di Pengelola Plugin lihat Bagian Memuat QGIS Plugin Inti dan klik pada ikon yi Interpolasi vang muncul dalam menu toolbar QGIS Dialog plugin Interploasi ditunjukkan dalam Fig ure interpolation 1 3 Pilih layer masukan seperti elevp Eka dan kolom seperti ELEV untuk interpolasi 4 Pilih metode interpolasi seperti Triangulated Irregular Network TINY dan masukkan ukuran sel 5000 serta isikan juga nama file keluaran seperti elevation tin 5 Klik OK 19 11 Plugin Mengedit Diluar Jaringan Offline Untuk pengumpulan data merupakan situasi umum bekerja dengan laptop atau p
66. GPS tab of the GPS Tools dialog To do this you simply select the layer that you want to upload which must be a GPX layer your GPS device type and the port or usb that it is connected to Just as with the download tool you can specify new device types if your device isn t in the list This tool is very useful in combination with the vector editing capabilities of QGIS It allows you to load a map create waypoints and routes and then upload them and use them on your GPS device 15 1 7 Defining new device types There are lots of different types of GPS devices The QGIS developers can t test all of them so if you have one that does not work with any of the device types listed in the Download from GPS and Upload to GPS tools you can define your own device type for it You do this by using the GPS device editor which you start by clicking the Edit devices button in the download or the upload tabs To define a new device you simply click the New device button enter a name a download command and an upload command for your device and click the Update device button The name will be listed in the device menus in the upload and download windows and can be any string The download command is the command that is used to download data from the device to a GPX file This will probably be a GPSBabel command but you can use any other command line program that can create a GPX file QGIS will replace the keywords St ype Sin and Sout when it
67. General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns 21 1 GNU General Public License 255 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 10 Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 11 12 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTH ERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
68. Hapus Konfirmasi Anda pilih dengan klik Ya atau batal menghapus dengan klik Tidak 8 9 Proyek proyek Nesting Jika Anda ingin menanamkan embed isi dari berkas proyek lain kedalam proyek Anda Anda bisa memilih Lapisan Tanam Lapisan dan Grup 8 9 1 Menanam Embedding lapisan Mengkuti dialog memungkinkan Anda untuk menanam embed lapisan dari proyek proyek lain 1 Tekan untuk mencari proyek lain dari dataset Alaska Aa Bab 8 Peralatan Umum QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 2 Pilih berkas proyek grassland Anda bisa melihat konten dari proyek lihat figure embed dialog 3 Tekan Ctrl dan klik pada lapisan grassland dan wilayah Lapisan akan ditanam dalam legenda peta dan tampilan peta sekarang Select layers and groups to embed Project file sample data grassland ggsi regions grassland Cancel OKI Gambar 8 12 Pilih lapisan lapisan dan grup grup untuk ditanam embed Sementara lapisan lapisan yang ditanam embedded adalah bisa diedit Anda tidak bisa merubah properti seperti gaya dan pelabelan Menghapus lapisan lapisan ditanam embdded Klik kanan pada lapisan yang ditanam embedded dan pilih F Marus 8 10 Menambahkan Lapisan Teks Delimited Delimited Text Layer Fungsi ini memungkinkan Anda memuat berkas teks delimited sebagai lapisan di QGIS Pengaturan berikut perlu didefinisikan 1 Format Berkas biasanya CSV comma separated values Jika delimiter lain digunakan
69. Po Sey eo ore BE ee ee EE ee oe Ged 43 8 9 Proyek proyek Nesting uns ea de eee dd even fe ead 44 8 10 Menambahkan Lapisan Teks Delimited Delimited Text Layer 45 Konfigurasi QGIS 47 91 Pan neldan Toolbar oe ses raserer ee Oe OR Ge ee Ee ee ee ee 47 92 Properti Proyek o s 24 cc cde eh bird Daehn Geode beet De Keb eeds bene 48 D Pie eas Dam ee eeaee ee eeunek be eee ee in cu eee ee ee eee eB 48 9 4 Penyesuaian Customization ee bbe eee eee RHEE eee eee 55 Working with Projections 57 10 1 Overview ot Projection Support 2 444 HER SESE REER ESS GC BE ae Bh ana 57 10 2 Global Projection Specification se so 54255 6684446648 Ghee oe PES R ERE ES 57 10 3 Define On The Fly OTF Reprojection ME RAE RRR EERE ES 58 10 4 Custom Coordinate Reference System a sc s csi wh Ae me ee wR EERE Ewe SE EY 59 QGIS Peramban 61 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor 63 121 Supported Data Formats s 62426455 6644846644644 468 HOS 5 SSE ae HS oH 63 12 2 The Vector Properties Dialog 4 44 64h HSH SY REER OS III EREG SG 73 2 5 Boa 5a kt chee PARSER HES EP EE GROSSE Po Gee eee eee Os 93 24 Quern Bulder serere demier Aa bees bah eek amp Soe EARS Ia 107 lo ea ee ee et eee ee ee Re eee eee ee ee ee Ge 108 Pekerjaan dengan Data Raster 113 13 1 Working with Raster Data ee we ERR ED SKE KR SES 113 13 2 Raster Properties Dialog o sas 53 6 46e5 44464466884 266 Se eee eK eK ew 114
70. Processing Toolbox x El Recently used algorithms Watershed from DEM and threshold ig Convergence index 598 Polygon centroids 1 raspect Generates raster maps of aspect from a elevation amp v voronoi Creates a Voronoi diagram from an input vector Beg Cartographic to geographic coordinates conversion El amp Geoalgorithms E 88 Domain specific Hu Images E Raster 8 Raster vector Vector Models Scripts GH H 4 e HF ra Tools H Example scripts Py J Gambar 17 1 Toolbox Pengolahan e Modeler grafis Beberapa algoritma dapat dikombinasikan secara grafis dengan menggunakan modeler untuk mendefinisikan alur kerja menciptakan satu proses yang melibatkan beberapa sub proses e Sejarah pengelola Semua tindakan dilakukan dengan menggunakan salah satu elemen tersebut disimpan dalam berkas sejarah dan dapat kemudian dengan mudah direproduksi menggunakan manajer sejarah e Antarmuka pengolahan batch Antarmuka ini memungkinkan Anda untuk menjalankan proses batch dan mengotomatisasi eksekusi algoritma tunggal pada beberapa dataset 157 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Processing modeler s Vectorising grid classes 3 Out E Thu Oct 10 2013 13 07 46 processing runalg grass v voronoi C Users Volaya agis2 python plugins proces ie L ES Thu Oct 10 2013 13 07 29 processing runalg saga polygoncentroids C WUsers Volaya qgis2 python plugins ERROR C Us
71. QGIS the information below may help you understand any QGIS messages and give you direction on changing the PostgreSQL table or view definition to allow QGIS to load it QGIS requires that PostgreSQL layers contain a column that can be used as a unique key for the layer For tables this usually means that the table needs a primary key or a column with a unique constraint on it In QGIS this column needs to be of type int4 an integer of size 4 bytes Alternatively the ctid column can be used as primary key If a table lacks these items the oid column will be used instead Performance will be improved if the column is indexed note that primary keys are automatically indexed in PostgreSQL If the PostgreSQL layer is a view the same requirement exists but views do not have primary keys or columns with unique constraints on them You have to define a primary key field has to be integer in the QGIS dialog before you can load the view If a suitable column cannot does not exist in the view QGIS will not load the layer If this occurs the solution is to alter the view so that it does include a suitable column a type of integer and either a primary key or with a unique constraint preferably indexed QGIS offers a checkbox Select at id that is activated by default This option gets the ids without the attributes which is faster in most cases It can make sense to disable this option when you use expensive views 12 1 6 Importing Data into Postgre
72. Quote Escape Record options Number of header lines to discard 0 First record has field names Field options Trim fields Discard empty fields Decimal separator is comma Geometry definition Point coordinates Well known text WKT No geometry attribute only table X field X 2 Y field Y _ DMS coordinates Layer settings _ Use spatial index _ Use subset index _ Watch file X Y ELEV 1 300120 7689960 13 2 654360 7562040 52 3 1640 7512840 3 Help cancel SRD Gambar 8 13 Dialog Teks Delimited 8 Pertama pilih berkas seperti ggis sample data csv elevp csv untuk impor dengan mengklik pada tombol Penjelajah Sekali berkas dipilih upaya OGIS untuk mem parsing berkas menggunakan delimiter yang terakhir digunakan dalam kasus ini titikkoma Untuk mem parsing berkas dengan benar Ini penting untuk memilih delimiter yang benar Mengubah delimiter penggunaan tab t ini adalah ekspresi reguler untuk karakter tab Setelah berkas diuraikan buat sebuah Definsi Geometri Koordinat Poin dan pilih kolom X dan Y dari daftar Akhirnya masukkan nama lapisan seperti elevp seperti dalam figure delimited text 1 Untuk menambahkan lapisan ke dalam peta klik OK Berkas teks delimited yang sekarang berperilaku seperti halnya lapisan peta lainnya di OGIS 46 Bab 8 Peralatan Umum BAB 9 Konfigurasi QGIS QGIS dapat dikonfigurasi melalui menu Pengaturan Pilih diantara Panel Toolbar Properti Proyek Opsi dan
73. Some of the algorithms i e Douglas Peuker and Vertex reduction simplify the line by removing some of the vertices The resulting vector will load faster This process will be used when you have a highly detailed vector but you are creating a very small scale map so the detail is unnecessary Tip The simplify tool Note that the QGIS fTools plugin has a Simplify geometries tool that works just like the GRASS v generalize Douglas Peuker algorithm 150 Bab 16 GRASS GIS Integration QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 However the purpose of this example is different The contour lines created by r contour have sharp angles that should be smoothed Among the v generalize algorithms there is Chaikens which does just that also Hermite splines Be aware that these algorithms can add additional vertices to the vector causing it to load even more slowly e Open the GRASS toolbox and double click the categories Vector Develop map Generalization then click on the v generalize module to open its options window Check that the ctour 100 vector appears as the Name of input vector e From the list of algorithms choose Chaiken s Leave all other options at their default and scroll down to the last row to enter in the field Name for output vector map ctour_100_smooth and click Run e The process takes several moments Once Successfully finished appears in the output windows click View output and then close e You may
74. Tab Metadata berisi informasi umum tentang berkas lihat Metadata Menu Dengan tab Preview Anda bisa melihat lihat di berkas Anda tanpa mengimpor mereka ke proyek QGIS Anda Ini juga mungkin untuk melihat atribut berkas Anda dalam tab Atribut 62 Bab 11 QGIS Peramban BAB 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor 12 1 Supported Data Formats QGIS uses the OGR library to read and write vector data formats including ESRI Shapefiles MapInfo Microsta tion file formats and many more GRASS vector PostGIS MSSQL Spatial and Oracle Spatial support is supplied by native QGIS data providers Vector data can also be loaded in read mode from zip and gzip archives into QGIS At the date of this document 69 vector formats are supported by the OGR library see OGR SOFTWARE SUITE Literatur dan Referensi Web The complete list of supported vector data formats by the OGR library see OGR SOFTWARE SUITE Literatur dan Referensi Web 1s available at http www gdal org ogr ogr_formats html Catatan Not all of the listed formats may work in QGIS for various reasons For example some require external commercial libraries or the GDAL OGR installation of your OS was not build to support the format you want to use Only those formats that have been well tested will appear in the list of file types when loading a vector into QGIS Other untested formats can be loaded by selecting x x Working with GRASS vector data is described in Section GRASS GIS Integration This
75. YA Fr F Rendering Gambar 18 17 Scalebar Item properties Tab 8 18 3 Composer Items 201 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Main properties The Main properties dialog of the scalebar Item Properties tab provides following functionalities see fig ure composer 18 Main properties Map Map 0 Style Line Ticks Up Gambar 18 18 Scalebar Main properties Dialog e First choose the map the scalebar will be attached to e then choose the style of your scalebar Six styles are available e Single box and Double box styles which contain one or two lines of boxes alternating colors e Middle Up or Down line ticks e Numeric the scale ratio is printed 1 e 1 50000 Units and Segments The Units and Segments dialogs of the scalebar Item Properties tab provide following functionalities see fig ure_composer_19 Y Units Meters Label km Map units per bar unit 1000 00 v Segments Segments left 2 right 4 Size 500000 00 units Height 3mm Gambar 18 19 Scalebar Units and Segments Dialogs In those two dialogs you can set how the scalebar will be represented e Select the map units used There s three possible choices Map Units is the automated unit selection Meters or Feet force unit conversions e The Label field defines the text used to describe the unit of the scalebar e The Map units per bar unit allows to fix the ratio between a map unit and its representation in the scalebar e You can defi
76. a translation of this License and all the license notices in the Document and any Warranty Disclaimers provided that you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer the original version will prevail If a section in the Document is Entitled Acknowledgements Dedications or History the requirement sec tion 4 to Preserve its Title section 1 will typically require changing the actual title 9 TERMINATION You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Document except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute it is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However if you cease all violation of this License then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated a provisionally unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license and b permanently if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation Moreover your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means this is the first time you have received notice of violati
77. alaska shp This will import the shapefile alaska shp into the PostGIS database postgis using the user postgres with the password topsecret on host server myhost de Note that OGR must be built with PostgreSQL to support PostGIS You can see this by typing ogrinto Lormacts grep 1 post If you like to use PostgreSQL s COPY command instead of the default INSERT INTO method you can export the following environment variable at least available on A and X export PG USE COPY YES ogr2ogr does not create spatial indexes like shp2pgsl does You need to create them manually using the nor mal SQL command CREATE INDEX afterwards as an extra step as described in the next section Improving Performance Improving Performance Retrieving features from a PostgreSQL database can be time consuming especially over a network You can improve the drawing performance of PostgreSQL layers by ensuring that a PostGIS spatial index exists on each layer in the database PostGIS supports creation of a GiST Generalized Search Tree index to speed up spatial searches of the data GiST index information is taken from the PostGIS documentation available at http postgis refractions net The syntax for creating a GiST index is CREATE INDEX indexname ON tablename USING GIST geometryfield GIST_GEOMETRY_OPS Note that for large tables creating the index can take a long time Once the index is created you should perform a VACUUM ANALYZE S
78. and landscape planning This plugin enables users to easily link geocoded 1 e referenced with latitude and longitude or X and Y coordinates photographs and other supporting documents to vector data in QGIS eVis is now automatically installed and enabled in new versions of QGIS and as with all plugins it can be disabled and enabled using the Plugin Manager See Mengelola Plugin The eVis plugin is made up of three modules the Database Connection tool Event ID tool and the Event Browser These work together to allow viewing of geocoded photographs and other documents that are linked to features stored in vector files databases or spreadsheets 19 6 1 Event Browser The Event Browser module provides the functionality to display geocoded photographs that are linked to vector features displayed in the QGIS map window Point data for example can be from a vector file that can be input using QGIS or it can be from the result of a database query The vector feature must have attribute information associated with it to describe the location and name of the file containing the photograph and optionally the compass direction the camera was pointed when the image was acquired Your vector layer must be loaded into QGIS before running the Event Browser Launch the Event Browser module To launch the Event browser module either click on the men eVis Event Browser icon or click on Database eVis eVis Event Browser This
79. and raster data in the sample GRASS LOCATION alaska included in the QGIS Alaska dataset Contoh data and move on to Section The GRASS vector data model 16 3 2 Adding a new MAPSET A user has only write access to a GRASS MAP SET he created This means that besides access to his own MAP SET each user can read maps in other user s MAP SET s but he can modify or remove only the maps in his own MAP SET All MAPSETs include a WIND file that stores the current boundary coordinate values and the currently selected raster resolution Neteler amp Mitasova 2008 Literatur dan Referensi Web see Section The GRASS region tool L 2 Select the GRASS database GISDBASE folder grassdata with the LOCATION alaska where we 142 Start QGIS and make sure the GRASS plugin is loaded In the GRASS toolbar click on the Mise New mapset icon to bring up the MAPSET wizard want to add a further MAP SET called test Click Next We can use this wizard to create a new MAPSET within an existing LOCATION or to create a new LOCATION altogether Click on the radio button 5 Select location see figure grass location 2 and click Next Enter the name text for the new MAP SET Below in the wizard you see a list of existing MAPSETs and its owners Click Next check out the summary to make sure it s all correct and click Finish Bab 16 GRASS GIS Integration QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 16 4 Importing data
80. base path onto which the relative path defined in Figure_eVis_2 A will be appended 5 Replace path If this checkbox is checked only the file name from the A will be appended to the Base Path 6 Apply rule to all documents If checked the same path rules that are defined for photographs will be used for non image documents such as movies text documents and sound files If not checked the path rules will only apply to photographs and other documents will ignore the Base Path parameter 7 Remember settings If the checkbox is checked the values for the associated parameters will be saved for the next session when the window is closed or when the Save button below is pressed 8 Reset values Resets the values on this line to the default setting 9 Restore defaults This will reset all of the fields to their default settings It has the same effect as clicking all of the Reset buttons 10 Save This will save the settings without closing the Options pane Understanding the Configure External Applications window Event Browser Displaying records 03 of 76 Display Options Configure External Applications File extension and external application in which to load a document of that type Extension Application B A 1 pdf usr bin evince CG E 2 html usr bin google chrome Q 3 odt usr bin write Gambar 19 8 The eVis External Applications window 1 File reference table A table containing file types that can be opened usi
81. bounding box When moving items on the composer canvas alignment helper lines appear when borders centers or corners are aligned 206 Bab 18 Print Composer QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 alaska1 Composer View Layout sO RR Bek yO Bese libarxa e te BRE awe 10 jo poj po po jo po jo jpo jo e Item Properties E3 Scalebar v Main properties 14 Map Map oO 500 0 500 Style Line Ticks Up uw h w Units Meters Legend Label km Map 1000 00 na units amp airports majrivers alaska E al 2 Is e popp regions lakes A w Segments Segments left 2 lt fight 1 Size 500000 00 units Height 3mm gt Display gt Fonts and colors p Position and size Help J E Close b Frame Gambar 18 27 Alignment helper lines in the Print Composer 4b 18 4 1 Revert and Restore tools During the layout process it is possible to revert and restore changes This can be done with the revert and restore tools P S3 Revert last changes e Restore last changes or by mouse click within the Command history tab see figure_composer_28 Command history E Scalebar segment size Item deleted Change item position Change item position Map added Item z order changed Change item position Man crale rhanna Gambar 18 28 Command history in the Print Composer 18 5 Atlas generation The print composer includes generation functions that allow to create map books in an automate
82. by Elevation Select elements on the tree and fill their description in the text box below The elevation layer Values must be expressed in meters Clipping layer Clipping layer An optional dipping layer Outputs Gambar 17 25 Help Edition On the right hand side you will see a simple HTML page created using the description of the input parameters and outputs of the algorithm along with some additional items like a general description of the model or its author The first time you open the help editor all those descriptions are empty but you can edit them using the elements on the left hand side of the dialog Select an element on the upper part and the write its description in the text box below Model help is saved in a file in the same folder as the model itself You do not have to worry about saving it since it is done automatically 17 3 7 About available algorithms You might notice that some algorithms that can be be executed from the toolbox do not appear in the list of available ones when you are designing a model To be included in a model and algorithm must have a correct semantic so as to be properly linked to other in the workflow If an algorithm does not have such well defined semantic for instance if the number of output layers cannot be know in advance then it is not possible to use it within a model and thus does not appear in the list of them that you can find in the modeler dialog Additionally you w
83. can choose from the dropdown menu or to define a new connection to a new database To define a new connection click on New and use the file browser to point to your SpatiaLite database which is a file with a sqlite extension If you want to save a vector layer to SpatiaLite format you can do this by right clicking the layer in the legend Then click on Save as define the name of the output file select SpatiaLite as format and the CRS Also you can select SQLite as format and then add SPATIALITE YES in the OGR data source creation option field This tells OGR to create a SpatiaLite database See also http www gdal org ogr drv_sqlite html QGIS also supports editable views in SpatiaLite Creating a new SpatiaLite layer If you want to create a new SpatiaLite layer please refer to section Creating a new SpatiaLite layer Tip SpatiaLite data management Plugins For SpatiaLite data management you can also use several Python plugins QSpatiaLite SpatiaLite Manager or DB Manager core plugin recommended They can be downloaded and installed with the Plugin Installer 12 1 9 MSSQL Spatial Layers J QGIS also provides native MS SQL 2008 support The Add MSSQL Spatial Layer ig part of the new toolbar button or available in the MS SQL node in the QBrowser tree providing drag and drop import support 12 1 10 ORACLE Spatial Layers Q QGIS also provides native ORACLE Locator Spatial support The Add ORACLE Spatial Layer ig
84. change the color of the vector to display it clearly on the raster background and to contrast with the original contour lines You will notice that the new contour lines have smoother corners than the original while staying faithful to the original overall shape QGIS 2 0 1 Dufour Project Edit View Layer Settings Plugins Vector Raster Database Processing Help OCE KY LL SO S RpppaAne 4 amp N Q amp 88 Bee MAMMAARB Layers v MV ctour100 smooth y v MV ctour100 BW 4 gtopo30 Layers Browser 2 Coordinate 709731 4587246 Scale 1 90000 9 M Render EPSG 2964 Gambar 16 12 GRASS module v generalize to smooth a vector map Tip Other uses for r contour The procedure described above can be used in other equivalent situations If you have a raster map of precipitation data for example then the same method will be used to create a vector map of isohyetal constant rainfall lines Creating a Hillshade 3D effect Several methods are used to display elevation layers and give a 3D effect to maps The use of contour lines as shown above is one popular method often chosen to produce topographic maps Another way to display a 3D effect is by hillshading The hillshade effect is created from a DEM elevation raster by first calculating the slope and aspect of each cell then simulating the sun s position in the sky and giving a reflectance value to each cell Thus y
85. example US state polygons do not have any gaps between them must not have invalid geometries Checks whether the geometries are valid Some of the rules that define a valid geometry are Polygon rings must close Rings that define holes should be inside rings that define exterior boundaries Rings may not self intersect they may neither touch nor cross one another Rings may not touch other rings except at a point must not have multi part geometries Sometimes a geometry is actually a collection of simple single part geometries Such a geometry is called multi part geometry If it contains just one type of simple geometry we call it multi point multi linestring or multi polygon For example a country consisting of multiple islands can be represented as a multi polygon must not overlap Adjacent polygons should not share common area must not overlap with Adjacent polygons from one layer should not share common area with polygons from another layer 19 18 Topology Checker Plugin 247 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 19 19 Plugin Statistik Zonal Dengan 5 Plugin Statistik Zonal Anda dapat menganalisis hasil klasifikasi tematik Hal ini memungkinkan untuk menghitung beberapa nilai nilai piksel dari lapisan raster dengan bantuan lapisan vektor poligonal lihat fig ure zonal statistics Anda dapat menghitung jumlah nilai rata rata dan jumlah total piksel yang berada di dalam poligon Plugin menghasilkan kolom kel
86. fitur hanya menyalin atribut Bersihkan hasil hasil di jendela telah dihapus Bersihkan highlight fitur highlight pada peta telah dihapus Highlight semua Highlight lapisan Properti lapisa buka jendel properti lapisan Perluas expand semua Runtuh collapse semua Shortcut Papanketik QGIS menyediakan standar shortcut papan ketik untuk banyak fitur Anda menemukannya di Bagian Bar Menu Selain itu di menu opsi Pengaturan Konfigurasi Shortcut memungkinkan merubah standar shortcut papanketik dan menambah shortcut papanketik baru ke fitur QGIS Configure shortcuts Action Shortcut Add MSSQL Spatial Layer Ctrl Shift M Add Part S Add PostGIS Layers Ctrl Shift D Y Add Raster Layer Ctrl Shift R 28 Add Ring S Add SpatiaLite Layer Ctrl Shift L ta Add to Overview Ctrl Shift o YE Add Vector Layer Ctrl Shift V al Add WCS Layer Vi Add WFS Layer Change Setnone Set default None Load Save Close Gambar 8 2 Tentukan pilihan shortcut A Gnome Konfigurasi sederhana Hanya pilih fitur dari daftar dan klik pada Ubah Atur none atau Atur Standar Setelah Anda telah menemukan konfigurasi Anda dapat menyimpannya sebagai berkas XML dan muat pada instalasi QGIS lain 36 Bab 8 Peralatan Umum QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 8 3 Konteks Bantuan Saat Anda membutuhkan bantuan dengan topik yang spesifik Anda dapat mengakses konteks bantuan melalui
87. have more than one map view or legend or scalebar in the print composer canvas on one or several pages Each element has its own properties and in the case of the map its own extent If you want to remove any elements from the composer canvas you can do that with the Delete or the Backspace key Navigation tools To navigate in the canvas layout the print composer provides 4 general tools ge Zoom in 3 Zoom out ea a Zoom to full extend e Meg Refresh the view if you find the view in an inconsistent state 18 1 3 Composition tab General composition setup In the Composition tab you can define the global settings of your composition You can choose one of the Presets for your papersheet or enter your custom width and height Composition can now be parted on several pages For instance a first page can show a map canvas and a second page will show the attribute table associated to a layer while a third ons shows a HTML frame linking to your organization website Set the Number of pages to the desired value Choose the page Orientation and its Exported resolution When checked the C print as raster means all elements will be rasterized before printing or saving as Postscript or PDF Snap to grid and Snap to alignements tools make accomplishing some tasks much easier There s three types of grid Dots Solid lines and Crosses You can adjust spacings offsets and color to your need Selection tolerance defines the maxim
88. huruf fixed width PROJCS NAD 1927 Albers GEOGCS GCS North American 1927 2 3 Petunjuk Spesifik Platform Urutan GUI dan sejumlah kecil teks dapat diformat inline Klik 4 EY Berkas X QGIS Keluar untuk tutup OGIS Hal ini menunjukkan bahwa di Linux Unix dan platform Windows klik pilihan menu pertama Berkas kemudian Keluar dari menu dropdown sementara di Macintosh OSX platform klik QGIS menu pilihan pertama kemudian Keluar dari menu dropdown A melakukan ini e melakukan itu X melakukan sesuatu yang lain atau sebagai paragraf A X Lakukan ini dan ini dan ini Kemudian melakukan ini dan ini dan ini dan ini dan ini dan ini dan ini dan ini dan ini 9 Lakukan itu Kemudian melakukan itu dan itu dan itu dan itu dan itu dan itu dan itu dan itu dan itu dan itu dan itu dan itu dan itu dan itu dan itu Layar yang muncul di seluruh buku panduan telah dibuat pada platform yang berbeda platform ditunjukkan dengan ikon platform tertentu pada akhir gambar keterangan 4 Bab 2 Konvensi BAB 3 Kata Pengantar Selamat datang di dunia indah dari Sistem Informasi Geografis GIS QGIS adalah Sistem Informasi Geografis Sumber Terbuka Open Source Proyek ini lahir di bulan Mei 2002 dan didirikan sebagai sebuah proyek di SourceForge pada bulan Juni tahun yang sama Kami telah bekerja keras membuat perangkat lunak GIS merupakan perangkat lunak proprietary tradisional mahal prospek yang layak bagi siapa saja den
89. just double click on the color and the Select color dialog appears Style AN bena wv Band rendering Render type Paletted v P Transparency Band Band 1 Palette 4 ff Pyramids a Value Color D Histogram Metadata COVOMPUNYO Gambar 13 3 Raster Renderer Paletted A Contrast enhancement Catatan When adding GRASS rasters the option Contrast enhancement will be always set to automatically to stretch to min max regardless if the QGIS general options this is set to another value Singleband gray This renderer allows you to render a single band layer with a Color gradient Black to white or White to black You can define a Min and a Max value with choosing the Extend first and then pressing Load QGIS can QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Estimate faster the Min and Max values of the bands or use the Actual slower Accuracy Style RR General w Band rendering Style Render type Singleband gray v la Transparency Gray band Band 1 Palette Vv Load min max values EA Pyramids lor gradient Black to whit lati Color gradient ack to white Vv Cumulative A A re Histogram count cut 20 amp 98 0 Y Min 45 63 Min max Metadata Max 574 515 Mean Contrast 2 standard deviation x 100 a ras Stretch and clip to MinMax v enhancement Extent Accuracy e Full e Estimate faster _ Current _ Actual slower Load Gambar 13 4 Raster Renderer Singleba
90. lihat Style Menu lihat Style Menu Lanjut ke Bab 7 AGIS GUI QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Tabel 7 1 lanjutan dari halaman sebelumnya Pilihan Menu Shortcut Referensi Buka Tabel Atribut lihat Working with the Attribute Table J Toggle Mengedit lihat Digitizing an existing layer Simpan Lapisan diedit lihat Digitizing an existing layer W Diedit Sekarang Simpan Sebagai Simpan terpilih sebagai berkas vektor lihat Digitizing an existing layer Lihat Working with the Attribute Table Ctrl D Ctrl Shift c d Buang Lapisan Atur CRS Lapisan Atur CRS proyek dari Lapisan Properti Query Pelabelan UU Tambahkan ke Overview Cterl shitt o UU Tambahkan Semua ke Overview Menghapus Semua dari Overview Lihat Semua Lapisan Cera sai fou Ctrl Shift H Da Sembunyikan Semua Lapisan 7 1 6 Pengaturan Pilihan Menu Shortcut Panel Lihat Panel dan Toolbar Toolbar Lihat Panel dan Toolbar Toggle Mode Layar Penuh Ctr1 F f Proyek Properti Ctrl Shift P lihat Proyek Ubah CRS lihat Custom Coordinate Reference System Pengelola Gaya lihat vector_style_manager R Konfigurasi shortcut Y Kustomisasi lihat Penyesuaian Customization RR Opsi lihat Opsi Opsi Snapping 711 7 Plugin Pilihan Menu Shortcut xs Kelola dan Pasang Plugin lihat Mengelola Plugin Konsol Python GRASS lihat GRASS GIS Integration Saat memulai QGIS untuk pertama kali tid
91. memungkinkan untuk menambahkan koordinat kisi grid dan koordinat anotasi untuk kanvas peta amp Enable grid Interval X Interval Y Grid type Line symbol Marker symbol Offset X Offset Y Help 100000 100000 Line Draw annotation Update Interval Offset From Canvas Extents Active Raster Layer Apply cancel OK Gambar 8 6 Dialog Kisi Grid A 1 Pilih dari menu Tampilan Decorasi Kisi Mulai dialog lihat figure decorations 1 2 Aktifkan kotak centang fF Aktifkan Kisi dan menetapkan definisi kisi grid sesuai dengan lapisan yang dimuat dalam kanvas peta 3 Aktifkan kotak centang Gambar anotasi dan menetapkan definisi anotasi sesuai dengan lapisan yang dimuat dalam kanvas peta 4 Klik Terapkan untuk memeriksa jika terlihat seperti yang diharapkan 5 Klik OK untuk menutup dialog 8 6 2 Label Hak Cipta G Label Hak Cipta menambahkan label hak cipta menggunakan teks untuk peta 40 Bab 8 Peralatan Umum QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Copyright Label Decoration _ Enable copyright label Enter your copyright label here amp copy QGIS 2013 Placement Bottom Right m Color S Help Cancel OK Gambar 8 7 Dialog Hak Cipta 8 1 Pilih dari menu Tampilan Dekorasi Label hak Cipta lihat figure decorations 2 2 Masukkan teks yang Anda ingin tempatkan di peta Anda bisa menggunakan HTML seperti dalam contoh 3 Pilih penempatan label dari Penempatan
92. negative values black is displayed 18 3 Composer Items 18 3 1 Adding a current QGIS map canvas to the Print Composer Click on the amp Add new map toolbar button in the print composer toolbar to add the QGIS map canvas Now drag a rectangle on the composer canvas with the left mouse button to add the map To display the current map you can choose between three different modes in the map Item Properties tab e Rectangle is the default setting It only displays an empty box with a message Map will be printed here e Cache renders the map in the current screen resolution If case you zoom in or out the composer window the map is not rendered again but the image will be scaled e Render means that if you zoom in or out the composer window the map will be rendered again but for space reasons only up to a maximum resolution Cache is default preview mode for newly added print composer maps You can resize the map element by clicking on the P Select Move item button selecting the element and dragging one of the blue handles in the corner of the map With the map selected you can now adapt more properties in the map Item Properties tab To move layers within the map element select the map element click the LE Move item content icon and move the layers within the map element frame with the left mouse button After you found the right place for an element you can lock the element position within the print composer canvas Sel
93. of the diagrams is possible Here you can use at tributes to define the position of the diagram Also a scale dependent visibility that you can find in the Appearance tab is possible 12 2 9 Metadata Menu D The Metadata menu consists of a Description Attribution MetadataURL and Properties section In the Properties section you get general information about the layer including specifics about the type and location number of features feature type and the editing capabilities in the Properties section The Extents table provides you with layer extent information and the Layer Spatial Reference System information providing information about the CRS of the layer This is a quick way to get information about the layer Additionally you can add edit a title for the layer and some abstract information in the Description Also it s possible to define a Keyword list here These keyword lists can be used in a metadata catalogue If you want to use a title from an XML metadata file you have to fill in a link in the DataUrl field Use Attribution to get Atrribute data from an XML metadata catalogue In MetadataUrl you can define the general path to the XML metadata catalogue These information will be saved in the QGIS project file for following sessions and will be used for QGIS server 12 3 Editing QGIS supports various capabilities for editing OGR SpatiaLite PostGIS MSSQL Spatial and Oracle Spatial vector layers and tables Catatan The
94. ogc gml text html b using OGR output is generated by OGR it is send as multipart and contains XSD in MAP define OUTPUTFORMAT example OUTPUTFORMAT NAME OGRGML MIMETYPE ogr gml DRIVER OGR GML FORMATOPTION FORM multipart END in WEB METADATA define formats example wms getfeatureinto formatlist OGRGML text html Viewing Properties Once you have added a WMS server you can view its properties by right clicking on it in the legend and selecting Properties Metadata Tab The tab Metadata displays a wealth of information about the WMS server generally collected from the Capabil ities statement returned from that server Many definitions can be cleaned by reading the WMS standards see OPEN GEOSPATIAL CONSORTIUM Literatur dan Referensi Web but here are a few handy definitions e Server Properties WMS Version The WMS version supported by the server Image Formats The list of MIME types the server can respond with when drawing the map OGIS supports whatever formats the underlying Ot libraries were built with which is typically at least image png and image jpeg Identity Formats The list of MIME types the server can respond with when you use the Identify tool Currently QGIS supports the text plain type e Layer Properties Selected Whether or not this layer was selected when its server was added to this project 126 Bab 14 Pekerjaan dengan Data OGC QGIS User Guide Ril
95. on the present map item e The Overview Style allows to change the frame color See Section vector style manager 18 3 Composer Items 195 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 vY Overview Overview Frame None Overview style Change Overview blending mode Normal Invert overview Gambar 18 7 Map Overview Dialog 8 e The Overview Blend mode allows different transparency blend modes to enhance visibility of the frame See Rendering_Mode e If checked the fF Invert overview creates a mask around the extents the referenced map extents are shown clearly whereas everything else is blended with the frame color 18 3 2 Adding a Label item to the Print Composer 1 To add a label click the 3 Add label icon place the element with the left mouse button on the print composer canvas and position and customize its appearance in the label Item Properties tab The Item Properties tab of a Label item provides following functionalities Item Properties xl Label Main properties Alignment Display Position and size b b b b gt Frame b amp Background p Item ID b Rendering Gambar 18 8 Label Item properties Tab Main properties The Main properties dialog of the Label Item Properties tab provides following functionalities see Fig ure_composer_9 e The Main properties dialog is where is inserted the text html or not or the expression needed to fill the label added to the composer canvas e Label
96. pana bawah untuk menggeser ke Selatan Anda juga dapat menggeser peta dengan menggunakan bar spasi atau klik pada tetikus hanya menggerakkan tetikus bersamaan menekan bar spasi atau klik tetikus 7 5 Status Bar Bar status melihatkan posisi kursor Anda dalam koordinat peta misal meter atau derajat desimal sesuai dengan titik kursor tetikus bergerak pada tampilan peta Di sebelah kiri tampilan koordinat di bar status adalah tombol kecil yang akan beralih antara menampilkan posisi koordinat atau menampilkan luasan peta saat Anda menggeser dan memperbesar memperkecil tampilan peta Sebelah tampilan koordinat Anda menemukan tampilan skala Itu menunjukkan skala dari tampilan peta Jika Anda memperbesar atau memperkecil QGIS berisi skala saat ini Ada pemilih skala yang memungkinkan Anda untuk memilih skala standar dari 1 500 sampai 1 1000000 32 Bab 7 QGIS GUI QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Suatu perkembangan progres bar di status bar menunjukkan kemajuan progres render karena setiap lapisan yang diubah di tampilan peta Dalam beberapa kasus seperti pengumpulan statistik di lapisan raster progress bar akan menunjukkan status panjangnya operasi Jika ada plugin baru atau pembaruan plugin tersedia Anda akan melihat pesan sebelah kiri dari bar status Di sisi kanan status bar adalah kotak centang kecil yang dapat digunakan untuk lapisan sementara yang diberikan ke tampilan peta lihat Bagian Rendering Ikon menghentikan proses rendering pet
97. paramN Outputl Output2 OutputN The list of parameters and outputs to add depends on the algorithm you want to run and is exactly the list that the alghelp method gives you in the same order as shown Depending on the type of parameter values are introduced differently The next one is a quick review of how to introduce values for each type of input parameter e Raster Layer Vector Layer or Table Simply use a string with the name that identifies the data object to use the name it has in the QGIS Table of Contents or a filename if the corresponding layer is not opened it will be opened but not added to the map canvas If you have an instance of a QGIS object representing the layer you can also pass it as parameter If the input is optional and you do not want to use any data object use None e Selection If an algorithm has a selection parameter the value of that parameter should be entered using an integer value To know the available options you can use the algoptions command as shown in the following example gt gt gt processing algoptions Saga slopeaspectcurvature METHOD Method 0 0 Maximum Slope Travis et al 1975 1 1 Maximum Triangle Slope Tarboton 1997 17 5 Using processing algorithms from the console 175 Least Squares Fitted Plane Horn 1981 Costa Cabral amp Burgess 1996 Fit 2 Degree Polynom Bauer Rohdenburg Bork 1985 Pic 2 Fit 2 Degree Polynom Zevenbergen amp T
98. region 16 1 Starting the GRASS plugin To use GRASS functionalities and or visualize GRASS vector and raster layers in QGIS you must select and load the GRASS plugin with the Plugin Manager Therefore go to the menu Plugins x5 Manage Plugins select Ef GRASS and click OK You can now start loading raster and vector layers from an existing GRASS LOCATION see section sec_load_grassdata Or you create a new GRASS LOCATION with QGIS see section Creating a new GRASS LOCATION and import some raster and vector data see Section Importing data into a GRASS LOCATION for further analysis with the GRASS Toolbox see section The GRASS toolbox 139 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 16 2 Loading GRASS raster and vector layers With the GRASS plugin you can load vector or raster layers using the appropriate button on the toolbar menu As an example we use the QGIS alaska dataset see Section Contoh data It includes a small sample GRASS LOCATION with 3 vector layers and 1 raster elevation map 1 Create anew folder grassdata download the QGIS Alaska dataset ggis sample data zip from http download osgeo org qgis data and unzip the file into grassdata 2 Start QGIS 3 If not already done in a previous QGIS session load the GRASS plugin clicking on Plugins xs Manage Plugins and activate A GRASS The GRASS toolbar appears in the QGIS main window 4 In the GRASS toolbar click the Te Open mapset icon to bring up the MAPSET wiz
99. regions 15 gaps regions 16 gaps regions 17 gaps regions 18 gaps regions 19 gaps regions oy gt es a z Nhe BB e 2 aam Qs APSPHPHPLPAAR Layers amp naaa Topology Checker DRE 7 BB gopi Error Layer Feature ID amp popp M 0 gaps regions 0 Topology Rule Settings 1 gaps regions 0 2 gaps regions 0 Current Rules 3 gaps regions 0 airports must be inside alaska 2 4 gaps regions 0 Ka 5 gaps regions 0 i amp Delete Rule Add Rule 6 gaps regions 0 gt Rule Layer 1 Layer 2 Tolerance a gaps da 2 8 gaps regions 0 1 must be inside popp alaska No tolerance 9 gaps regions 0 2 must not have gaps regions Nolayer No tolerance 10 gaps regions 0 J 11 gaps regions 0 3 must not have invalid geometries lakes No layer No tolerance 12 gaps regions 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 20 gaps regions Help Cancel Bt Configure L ae validate All Di validate Extent amp majrivers gt Apa amp Control rendering order Becharof Lake 5 a Sa amp amp Show errors 81 errors were found Coordinate 495242 3850406 Scale 2206834 9 MM Render EPSG 2964 A Gambar 19 29 The Topology Checker Plugin Topology describes the relationships between points lines and polygons that represent the features of a geographic region With the Topology Checker plugin you can look over your vector files and check the topology with several topology rules These rules check with spatial relations whether your features Eq
100. returned to QGIS 17 7 Configuring external applications 183 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 If your algorithm generates raster layers the way they are saved will depend on whether you have used or not the dontuserasterpackage option In you have used it layers are saved using the writeGDAL method If not the writeRaster method from the raster package will be used If you have used the passfilename option outputs are generated using the raster package with writeRaster even though it is not used for the inputs If you algorithm does not generate any layer but a text result in the console instead you have to indicate that you want the console to be shown once the execution is finished To do so just start the command lines that produce the results you want to print with the gt greater sign The output of all other lines will not be shown For instance here is the description file of an algorithm that performs a normality test on a given field column of the attributes of a vector layer layer vector f1eld field layer nortest group library nortest gt lillie test layer field The output ot the last line is printed but the output of the first is not and neither are the outputs from other command lines added automatically by QGIS If your algorithm creates any kind of graphics using the plot method add the following line showplots This will cause QGIS to redirect all R graphical outpu
101. section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copy righted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in Or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the
102. sejumlah besar outlier meng hasilkan gambar yang memiliki penampilan washed out QGIS versi 2 0 memperkenalkan kontrol yang lebih baik atas proses rendering raster termasuk menggunakan kumulatif 2 98 persen dipotong secara default ketika menentukan ruang warna gambar Identifikasi format WMS Memilih format mengidentifikasi hasil untuk lapisan layer WMS jika beberapa dikenal format yang didukung oleh server Format yang didukung adalah HTML fitur GML dan teks biasa Jika format GML dipilih hasilnya adalah dalam bentuk yang sama seperti untuk lapisan vektor geometri dapat disorot dan fitur termasuk atribut dan geometri dapat disalin ke papan klip dan disisipkan ke lapisan lain Dukungan WMTS Klien WMS QGIS kini didukung WMTS Web Mapping Tile Service termasuk pemil ihan sub dataset seperti irisan waktu Saat menambahkan lapisan layer WMS dari server compliant Anda akan diminta untuk memilih tampilan irisan waktu Simbologi Properti data yang didefinisikan Dengan properti data baru yang didefinisikan memungkinkan untuk mengontrol jenis simbol ukuran warna rotasi dan banyak properti lain melalui fitur atribut Manajemen lapisan perbaikan simbol Simbol lapisan layer baru menggunakan gambaran jelas dengan tata letak pohon terstruktur yang memungkinkan untuk akses mudah dan cepat ke semua simbol lapisan layer Dukungan transparansi dalam definisi warna Pada kebanyakan tempat dimana Anda memilih warna kini QGIS memun
103. the Generic Event Browser that matches the file extension to an application that can be used to open the file It is also necessary to have the path or URL to the file in the attribute table for the vector layer One additional rule that can be used for URLs that don t contain a file extension for the document you want to open is to specify the file extension before the URL The format is file extension URL The URL is preceded by the file extension and a colon and is particularly useful for accessing documents from Wikis and other web sites that use a database to manage the web pages see Table evis examples 19 6 4 Using the Event Browser When the Event Browser window opens a photograph will appear in the display window if the document refer enced in the vector file attribute table is an image and if the file location information in the Options window is properly set If a photograph is expected and it does not appear it will be necessary to adjust the parameters in the Options window If a supporting document or an image that does not have a file extension recognized by eVis is referenced in the attribute table the field containing the file path will be highlighted in green in the attribute information window if that file extension is defined in the file reference table located in the Configure External Applications window To open the document double click on the green highlighted line in the attribute information window If a supporting d
104. the Ta EventID icon or click on Database eVis Event ID Tool This will cause the cursor to change to an arrow with an 1 on top of it signifying that the ID tool is active 220 Bab 19 Plugin QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 To view the photographs linked to vector features in the active vector layer displayed in the QGIS map window move the Event ID cursor over the feature and then click the mouse After clicking on the feature the Event Brows er window is opened and the photographs on or near the clicked locality are available for display in the browser If more than one photograph is available you can cycle through the different features using the Previous and Next buttons The other controls are described in the ref evis_browser section of this guide 19 6 6 Database connection The Database Connection module provides tools to connect to and query a database or other ODBC resource such as a spreadsheet eVis can directly connect to four types of databases PostgreSQL MySQL SQLite and can also read from ODBC connections e g MS Access When reading from an ODBC database such as an Excel spreadsheet it is neces sary to configure your ODBC driver for the operating system you are using Launch the Database Connection module To launch the Database Connection module either click on the appropriate icon SMIE Database Connection orclick on Database eVis Database Connection This will launch the Database
105. the algorithms in that provider unusable by the modeler which might cause problems when loading models Keep that in mind when you have trouble loading or executing models 17 3 The graphical modeler 169 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 17 3 4 Editing a model You can edit the model you are currently creating redefining the workflow and the relationships between the algorithms and inputs that define the model itself If you right click on an algorithm in the canvas representing the model you will see a context menu like the one shown next Catchment Area P Gambar 17 22 Modeler Right Click 7 Selecting the Remove option will cause the selected algorithm to be removed An algorithm can be removed only 1f there are no other algorithms depending on it That is if no output from the algorithm is used in a different one as input If you try to remove an algorithm that has others depending on it a warning message like the one you can see below will be shown G Could not remove element x Other elements depend on the selected one Remove them before trying to remove it Gambar 17 23 Cannot Delete Algorithm 7 Selecting the Edit option or simply double clicking on the algorithm icon will show the parameters dialog of the algorithm so you can change the inputs and parameter values Not all input elements available in the model will appear in this case as available inputs Layers or values generated at a more advanced step in
106. tindih 244 Bab 19 Plugin QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 e Persilangan e Berpotongan e Memisah e Bersinggungan e Di dalam 19 16 1 Menggunakan plugin Sebagai contoh kita ingin mencari daerah dalam dataset Alaska yang mengandung bandara Langkah langkah berikut diperlukan 1 Mulai QGIS dan muat lapisan vektor regions shp dan airports shp 2 Muat Plugin Spasial Query dari Pengelola Plugin Lihat Bagian Memuat QGIS Plugin Inti dan klik ikon 12 Spasial Ouery yang muncul di menu toolbar OGIS Dialog plugin muncul 3 Pilih lapisan regions sebagai sumber lapisan dan airports sebagai lapisan fitur referensi 4 Pilih Isi sebagai operator dan klik Terapkan Sekarang Anda mendapatkan daftar ID fitur dari guery dan Anda memiliki beberapa pilihan seperti yang ditun jukkan pada figure spatial query 1 Klik pada Ia Buat lapisan dengan daftar item e Pilih ID dari daftar dan klik Mm Boat lapisan yang dipilik e Pilih Hapus dari seleksi sekarang dalam kolom Dan gunakan hasilnya e e Selain itu ANda juga bisa C Perbesar ke item atau tampilkan C Pesan Log OBARA BP VRBAZROEG2 V Ba BY enti Ai Be seenppas ge Spatial Query Select source features from Result feature ID s regions Result query M 22 selected geometries 1 Where the feature 2 Contains 3 4 Reference features of 5 airports S 7 8 10 And use the result to 12 Create new selection 22 of 26 identified M5 Selected Features Zoom t
107. to print composition Move content within an item Ungroup items of print composition Lower selected items Move selected items to bottom Align selected items right Align selected items center vertical Align selected items bottom QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 using the right mouse button over the toolbar 18 1 First steps 18 1 1 Open a new Print Composer Template Before you start to work with the print composer you need to load some raster and vector layers in the QGIS map canvas and adapt their properties to suit your own convenience After everything is rendered and symbolized to your liking click the New Print Composer icon in the toolbar or choose File New Print Composer You will be prompt to choose a title for the new composer 18 1 2 Using Print Composer Opening the print composer provides you with a blank canvas to which you can add the current OGIS map canvas text labels images legends scalebars basic shapes arrows attribute tables and HTML frames Fig ure composer 1 shows the initial view of the print composer with an activated C Snap to grid mode but before any elements are added alaska1 Composer View Layout a AD g Fa D D AADA e RAD uM DPR J2 26 8 a a EN 0 50 100 150 200 250 z Composition Atlas generation Command history x Composition w Paper and quality Presets A4 210x297 mm 5 width 297 00 Height 210 00 ral Units mm Number of pages 1 15
108. tombol Bantuan tersedia disebagian besar dialog harap dicatat bahwa plugin pihak ketiga dapat mengarah ke halaman web khusus 8 4 Rendering Secara standar QGIS membuat semua lapisan terlihat setiap kali kanvas peta di refresh Peristiwa yang memicu refresh kanvas peta meliputi e Menambahkan lapisan layer e Menggeser atau memperbesar e Mengukur jendela QGIS e Merubah visitabilitas dari lapisan layer QGIS memungkinkan Anda mengontrol proses rendering dalam beberapa cara 8 4 1 Scale Dependent Rendering Skala render memungkinkan Anda untuk menentukan skaa minimum dan skala maksimum di mana lapisan akan terlihat Untuk mengatur skala render bergantung buka dialog Properti dengan mengklik dobel pada lapisan di legenda Pada tab Umum klik pada kotak centang Ef Gunakan skala dependent rendering untuk mengaktifkan fitur yang mengatur nilai maskimum dan minimum skala Anda dapat menentukan nilai skala dengan terlebih dahulu perbesar ke tingkat yang ingin Anda gunakan dan mencatat nilai skala pada status bar QGIS 8 4 2 Mengontrol Rendering Peta Rendering peta dapat dikontrol dengan mengikuti petunjuk Menunda Rendering Untuk menunda rendering klik kotak centang A Render di sudut bawah kanan dari status bar Ketika kotak centang C Render tidak diaktifkan QGIS tidak menggambar ulang kanvas dalam menanggapi setiap kejadian yang telah diuraikan dalam Bagian Rendering Contoh ketika Anda mungkin ingin menunda render meliputi
109. tool Figure figure_grass_digitizing_2 shows the GRASS edit dialog that is displayed when you click on the edit tool The tools and settings are discussed in the following sections Tip Digitizing polygons in GRASS If you want to create a polygon in GRASS you first digitize the boundary of the polygon setting the mode to No category Then you add a centroid label point into the closed boundary setting the mode to Next not used The reason is that a topological vector model links attribute information of a polygon always to the centroid and not to the boundary Toolbar In figure grass digitizing you see the GRASS digitizing toolbar icons provided by the GRASS plugin Table table grass digitizing 1 explains the available functionalities 1444 Bab 16 GRASS GIS Integration New Point New Line New Boundary New Centroid Move vertex Add vertex Delete vertex Move element Split line Delete element Edit attributes fala BEBO Digitize new point Digitize new line Digitize new boundary finish by selecting new tool Digitize new centroid label existing area Move one vertex of existing line or boundary and identify new position Add a new vertex to existing line Delete vertex from existing line confirm selected vertex by another click Move selected boundary line point or centroid and click on new position Split an existing line to 2 parts Delete existing boundary line point or centroid c
110. v buffer Options Output Manual Name of input vector map rivers rivers demo 1 line Buffer distance along major axis in map units 200 Name for output vector map river200m Run View outpu Close Gambar 16 9 GRASS Toolbox Module Options The provided module parameters are often not complete to keep the dialog clear If you want to use further module MAS Bab 16 GRASS GIS Integration QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 parameters and flags you need to start the GRASS Shell and run the module in the command line A new feature since QGIS 1 8 is the support for a show advanced options button below the simplified module dialog in the Options tab At the moment it is only added to the module v in ascii as an example use but will probably be part of more all modules in the GRASS toolbox in future versions of QGIS This allows to use the complete GRASS module options without the need to switch to the GRASS Shell Output GRASS Tools alaska demo Modules Tree Modules List Browser gt Module v buffer Options Output Manual v buffer input rivers demo type line layer 1 distance 200 output river200m Buffering lines Building topology for vector map Registering primitives 1000 4 VV LL MU SANN Inn 20001 VMN NNN N JUDUL LAA ALA Vv Stop Close gose Gambar 16 10 GRASS Toolbox Module Output The Output tab provides information about the output status of the module When you click the Run button the
111. warna diperiksa di bawah Options gt General gt Ap plication perubahan apapun dalam pemilih warna akan segera ditampilkan dalam warna tombol dan untuk setiap item saat ini sedang diedit mana yang berlaku Anotasi SVG Dengan QGIS versi 2 0 kini Anda dapat menambahkan anotasi keterangan SVG ke peta Anda baik disematkan ke tempat tertentu atau dalam posisi relatif di atas kanvas peta Penyedia Data Dukungan Stasial Oracle QGIS versi 2 0 kini termasuk Dukungan Stasial Oracle 11 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 5 3 12 Penyedia Layanan Cakupan Web Web Coverage Service QGIS kini disediakan dukungan asli untuk lapisan Layanan Cakupan Web Web Coverage Service proses untuk menambahkan WCS mirip dengan menambahkan lapisan layer WMS atau WFS Raster Data Provider overhaul Sistem penyedia data raster telah dirombak total Salah satu fitur baru ter baik yang berasal dari pekerjaan ini adalah kemampuan Layer gt Save As untuk menyimpan lapisan lay er raster sebagai lapisan layer baru Dalam proses ini Anda dapat memotong resample reproject lapisan kedalam Sistem Referensi Koordinat Coordinate Reference System baru Anda juga bisa menyimpan lapisan raster sebagai gambar rendered jadi jika Anda misalnya memiliki raster band tunggal yang telah menerapkan palet warna Anda dapat menyimpan lapisan layer ke lapisan layer RGB ber georeferensi Raster 2 cumulative cut by default Banyak produk raster citra memiliki
112. which shows the response provided by the DM Solutions Group WMS server Image Encoding The Image encoding section now lists the formats that are supported by both the client and server Choose one depending on your image accuracy requirements Tip Image Encoding You will typically find thata WMS server offers you the choice of JPEG or PNG image encoding JPEG is a lossy compression format whereas PNG faithfully reproduces the raw raster data Use JPEG if you expect the WMS data to be photographic in nature and or you don t mind some loss in picture quality This trade off typically reduces by 5 times the data transfer requirement compared to PNG Use PNG if you want precise representations of the original data and you don t mind the increased data transfer requirements Options 14 1 QGIS as OGC Data Client 123 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Add Layer s from a Server Layers Server Search DM Solutions GMap Connect New Edit Delete Load Save Add default servers ID v Name Title Abstract vO DEMO GMap WMS This demonstration server was setup by DM Solutions Gr 1 bathymetry Elevation B gt 2 land_Fn Foreign Lands gt 4 park Parks gt 6 drain fn Water gt 8 drainage Drainage gt 10 prov_bound Province gt 12 fedlimit Federal Limit e 1A rail Dailraadc Image encoding PNG PNG24 JPEG GIF TIFF Options O coordinate reference systems available Layer name Tile size Feature limit for GetFeaturelnfo
113. will open the Generic Event Browser window The Event Browser window has three tabs displayed at the top of the window The Display tab is used to view the photograph and its associated attribute data The Options tab provides a number of settings that can be adjusted to control the behavior of the eVis plugin Lastly the Configure External Applications tab is used to maintain a table of file extensions and their associated application to allow eVis to display documents other than images Understanding the Display window To see the Display window click on the Display tab in the Event Browser window The Display window is used to view geocoded photographs and their associated attribute data 1 Display window A window where the photograph will appear 19 6 eVis Plugin 217 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Event Browser Displaying records 03 of 76 Display Options Configure External Applications Previous Next Field Value F CODE Airport Airfield IKO PABT NAME BETTLES USE Other image data Dropbox Trabalho QGIS qgis sample data photos PABT jpg Close Gambar 19 6 The eVis display window 2 Zoom in button Zoom in to see more detail If the entire image cannot be displayed in the display window scroll bars will appear on the left and bottom sides of the window to allow you to pan around the image 3 Zoom out button Zoom out to see more area 4 Zoom to full extent button Displays the full extent of the photograph
114. you can click on the field calculator icon to open the dialog see figure attributes 3 In the dialog you first have to select whether you want to only update selected features create a new attribute field where the results of the calculation will be added or update an existing field Field calculator _ Only update selected features M Create a new field Update existing field Output field name length Output field type Decimal number real lt Output field width 10 Precision 3 Function List Selected Function Help length function v Geometry xat yat Syntax Sarea Slength length Sperimeter Cw Operators EE EE EE Expression Returns the length of the current feature Arguments Slength 1000 Output preview 114 703846113845 Help Cancel Len Kuan Gambar 12 39 Field Calculator 3 If you choose to add a new field you need to enter a field name a field type integer real or string the total field width and the field precision see figure attributes 3 For example if you choose a field width of 10 and a field precision of 3 it means you have 6 signs before the dot then the dot and another 3 signs for the precision The Function List contains functions as well as fields and values View the help function in the Selected Function Help In Expression you see the calculation expressions you create with the Function List The most commonly used operators see Operators In the Functi
115. you need to edit one layer and snap its vertices to another layer then enable snapping only on the snap to layer then decrease the global snapping tolerance to a smaller value Furthermore snapping will never occur to a layer which is not checked in the snapping options dialog regardless of the global snapping tolerance So be sure to mark the checkbox for those layers that you need to snap to 94 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Snapping options a Layer Mode Tolerance Units Avoid Int popp to vertex and segment 0 000000 map units railroads to vertex and segment 5 map units lt regions to vertex and segment JIE pixels rivers to vertex and segment 0 000000 map units storagep to vertex and segment 0 000000 map units swamp to vertex and segment 0 000000 map units trails to vertex and segment 2 5 pixels 2 amp Enable topological editing M Enable snapping on intersection Apply Cancel ee OKs Gambar 12 31 Edit snapping options on a layer basis 4b Search radius Search radius is the distance QGIS uses to search for the closest vertex you are trying to move when you click on the map If you aren t within the search radius QGIS won t find and select any vertex for editing and it will pop up an annoying warning to that effect Snap tolerance and search radius are set in map units or pixels so you may find you need to experiment to get them set right If you specify too
116. you will find a check box that you can use to tell the algorithm whether to load the file once it is generated by the algorithm or not By default all files are opened Optional outputs are not supported so all outputs are created but you can uncheck the corresponding check box if you are not interested in a given output which virtually makes it behave like an optional output although the 164 Bab 17 QGIS kerangka pengolahan QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 layer is created anyway but if you leave the text box empty it will be saved to a temporary file and deleted once you exit QGIS 17 2 3 Configuring the processing framework As it has been mentioned the configuration menu gives access to a new dialog where you can configure how algorithms work Configuration parameters are structured in separate blocks that you can select on the left hand side of the dialog Along with the aforementioned Output folder entry the General block contains parameters for setting the default rendering style for output layers that is layers generated by using algorithms from any of the framework GUI components Just create the style you want using QGIS save it to a file and then enter the path to that file in the settings so the algorithms can use it Whenever a layer is loaded by SEXTANTE and added to the QGIS canvas it will be rendered with that style Rendering styles can be configured individually for each algorithm and each one of its outputs Just ri
117. 1 Apakah yang dimaksud Alat GDAL Plugin Alat GDAL menawarkan GUI untuk koleksi alat dalam Geospatial Data Abstraction Library http gdal osgeo org Ini adalah alat manajemen raster untuk query re proyek warp dan menggabungkan berba gai format raster Juga termasuk adalah alat untuk membuat lapisan kontur vektor atau relief shaded dari DEM raster dan untuk membuat vrt Virtual Raster Tile dalam format XML dari koleksi satu atau lebih berkas raster Alat ini tersedia bila plugin terpasang dan diaktifkan Perpustakaan GDAL Perpustakaan GDAL terdiri dari satu set program baris perintah masing masing dengan daftar besar pilihan Pengguna nyaman dengan menjalankan perintah dari terminal dapat memilih baris perintah dengan akses pilihan set lengkap Plugin alat GDAL menawarkan antarmuka yang mudah ke alat alat memperlihatkan hanya pilihan yang paling populer 19 8 2 Daftar dari alat alat GDAL Raster Dal Processing Raster calculator Projections ie Warp Reproject Conversion Assign projection Extraction Extract projection A n a y amp amp Miscellaneous GdalTools settings Gambar 19 12 Daftar menu Alat alat GDAL Proyeksi t Warp Utilitas ini merupakan mosaicing gambar proyeksi ulang dan warping utilitas Program ini Reproject dapat proek ulang untuk setiap proyeksi yang didukung dan juga dapat menerapkan GCPs disimpan dengan gambar jika gambar raw dengan informasi kontrol Untuk informas
118. 2 12 Rule based Symbolizing options Point displacement 78 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 The point displacement renderer offers to visualize all features of a point layer even if they have the same location To do this the symbols of the points are placed on a displacement circle around a center symbol Layer Properties airports Rr General Na f v Layer rendering vy oie Layer transparency 0 Gd Labels Layer blending mode Normal Feature blending mode Normal Labels deprecated 5 Point displacement Fields aa Center symbol o G3 Display on Renderer Single Symbol 2 Q Actions Renderer settings K Joins Ta Diagrams Displacement circles Circle pen width 0 40 Metadata Circle color S Circle radius modification 0 00 Point distance tolerance 0 0000100 Labels Label attribute None Label font Label color a Use scale dependent labelling max scale denominator Restore Default Style Save As Default Load Style Save Style v Help Apply Cancel LOK Gambar 12 13 Point displacement dialog Tip Export vector symbology You have the possibility to export vector symbology from QGIS into the Google kml dxf and Maplnfo tab files Just open the right mouse menu of the layer and click on Save selection as to define the name of the output file and its format Use the Symbology export menu to save the symbology either as Fea
119. 27 jendela utama 23 join 91 join layer 91 keluaran simpan sebagai gambar 21 Konteks Bantuan 37 kualitas rendering 38 Layout Maps 189 legenda 29 license document 253 load a shapefile 63 loading raster 113 Map Legend 199 Map Navigation 95 Map Template 190 Maplnfo 65 Memperbarui rendering sebelum menggambar 38 Menghentikan rendering 38 menghitung skala 33 mengukur 38 area 39 panjang garis 39 sudut 39 menu 24 merge attributes of features 102 Merge Attributes of Selected Features 102 Merge Selected Features 102 Metadata 119 MSSQL Spatial 71 Multi Band Raster 115 multipolygon 101 Natural Breaks Jenks 76 New GPX Layer 103 104 New Shapefile Layer 103 New SpatiaLite Layer 103 266 New Spatialite Layer 103 Node Tool 97 Nodes 98 Non Spatial Attribute Tables 106 OGC 121 OGR 63 OGR Simple Feature Library 63 ogr2ogr 68 Open Geospatial Consortium 121 OpenStreetMap 66 Oracle Spatial 71 OSM 66 Pan 95 penyusun cetak cepat 21 Peralatan Riset 226 pgsql2shp 68 Picture database 197 plugin 211 pengelola 211 tipe 211 Point Displacement Renderer 78 PostGIS 66 PostGIS spatial index 69 PostgreSQL 66 Pretty_Breaks 76 print_composer tools 189 Printing Export_Map 209 Proj 4 59 Proj4 58 Proj4 text 58 Projections 57 Proxy 123 proxy server 123 proyek nesting 44 Publish to Web plugin 129 Pyramids 119 OGIS mapserver 127 OGIS Serve
120. 3 untuk informasi lebih lanjut Catatan Jika Anda menekan Ct r1 T sementara alat Anotasi aktif anotasi bergerak anotasi teks form anotasi visibilitas item yang terbalik 8 8 Bookmark Spasial Bookmark spasial memungkinkan Anda untuk bookmark lokasi geografis dan kembali ke spasial ini suatu saat nanti 8 8 1 Membuat Bookmark Membuat Bookmark 1 Perbesar atau geser ke interes area 2 Pilih menu opsi Tampilan Bookmark Baru atau tekan Ctr1 B 8 8 Bookmark Spasial 0013 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Ne D me ae QGIS rocks name of municipality M Solothurn F postal code home marco tmp gem ul Map position fixed Map marker Frame width W OK Abbrechen Loschen Gambar 8 11 Disesuaikan form anotasi bentuk desainer qt 3 Masukkan nama deskripsi dari bookmark batas 255 karakter 4 Tekan Enter untuk menambahkan bookmark atau Delete untuk menghapus bookmark Catatan Anda bisa memiliki bookmark banyak dengan satu nama 8 8 2 Bekerja dengan Bookmark Menggunakan atau mengelola bookmark pilih menu opsi Tampilan Tampilkan Bookmark 8 8 3 Perbesar ke Bookmark Dari dialog Geospasial Bookmark pilih bookmark yang diinginkan dengan mengkliknya kemudian klik Perbe sar Anda juga bisa memperbesar ke bookmark dengan dobel klik padanya 8 8 4 Menghapus Bookmark Menghapus bookmark dari dialog Geospasial Bookmark klik padanya dan kemudian klik
121. 4bit systems IMPORTANT you need TauDEM 5 0 6 executables version 5 2 is currently not supported 17 7 9 Linux There are no packages for most Linux distribution so you should compile TauDEM by yourself As TauDEM uses MPICH2 first install it using your favorite package manager Also TauDEM works fine with OpenMPI so you can use it instead of MPICH2 Download TauDEM 5 0 6 source code and extract files in some folder Open linearpart h file and add after line include mpi h add new line with include lt StaGint n gt 17 7 Configuring external applications 185 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 so you Il get include mpi h include lt stdlib h gt Save changes and close file Now open tiffIO h find line include stdint h and replace quotes with lt gt so you ll get ranclude lt seoine h gt Save changes and close file Create build directory and cd into it mkdir build cd build Configure your build with command CXX mpicxx cmake DCMAKE INSTALL PREFIX usr local and then compile make Finaly to install TauDEM into usr local bin run sudo make install 17 8 The SEXTANTE Commander SEXTANTE includes a practical tool that allows you to run algorithms without having to use the toolbox but just typing the name of the algorithm you want to run This tools is known as the SEXTANTE commander and it is just a simple text box with autocompletion where you type the command you want to run Ih
122. 515000 574 515000 Estimated cumulative cut of full extent Load min max values Cumulative Ale A count cut 20 amp 98 0 Gi m Min max Mean 100 4 standard deviation x Md Extent Accuracy e Full e Estimate faster _ Current _ Actual slower i Load _J Clip e Gambar 13 5 Raster Renderer Singleband pseudocolor 1 Discrete 2 Linear 3 Exact In the left block the button cd Add values manually adds a value to the individual color table Button Remove selected row deletes a value from the individual color table and the W Ser colormap items button sorts the col or table according to the pixel values in the value column Double clicking on the value column lets you insert a specific value Double clicking on the color column opens the dialog Change color where you can select a color to apply on that value Further you can also add labels for each color but this value won t be displayed when you use the identify feature tool You can also click on the button Me Load color map from band Which tries to load the table 13 2 Raster Properties Dialog 117 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 from the band if it has any And you can use the buttons F Load color map from file or Egg Export color map to file to Joad an existing color table or to save the defined color table for other sessions In the right block Generate new color map allows you to create newly categorized colormaps For the Classifi
123. 6 263 265 BAB 1 Pendahuluan Dokumen ini merupakan buku petunjuk asli dari perangkat lunak yang dijelaskan QGIS Perangkat lunak dan perangkat keras yang dijelaskan dalam dokumen ini dalam banyak kasus merupakan merek dagang terdaftar dan karena itu tunduk pada persyaratan hukum QGIS menggunakan Lisensi Publik Umum GNU GNU General Public License Temukan informasi lebih lanjut pada QGIS alamat web http www qgis org Detil data hasil dll pada dokumen ini telah ditulis ulang dan diverifikasi dengan sebaik mungkin pengetahuan dan tanggungjawab dari penulis dan editor Bagaimanapun juga dimungkinkan adanya kesalahan pada isi dokumen ini Oleh karena itu semua data tidak bertanggung jawab untuk setiap pekerjaan atau jaminan Para penulis editor dan penerbit tidak mengambil tanggung jawab atau kewajiban atas kegagalan dan konsekuensinya Selalu terbuka bagi Anda untuk menunjukkan kemungkinan kesalahan Dokumen ini telah diatur dengan reStructuredText Ini tersedia sebagai sumber kode reST di github dan dalam jaringan online dengan format HTML dan PDF di http www qgis org en docs Versi terjemahan dari doku men ini dapat diunduh dalam beberapa format melalui proyek dokumentasi QGIS Informasi lebih lanjut tentang kontribusi pada dokumen ini dan tentang menerjemahkannya silakan kunjungi http www ggis org wiki Tautan pada dokumen ini Dokumen ini berisi tautan internal dan eksternal Silakan klik pada tautan internal akan me
124. 722 5314 30481 6876 45722 5314 45722 5314 60963 3752 45722 5314 60963 3752 60963 3752 76204 2190 60963 3752 76204 2190 Classify Add class Delete Delete all Advanced Restore Default Style Save As Default Load Style Save Style Help Apply Cancel aa Gambar 12 11 Graduated Symbolizing options 12 2 The Vector Properties Dialog 77 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Analogue to the categorized rendered the Style tab allows you to select e The attribute using the Column listbox e The symbol using the Symbol Properties button e The colors using the Color Ramp list Additionally you can specify the number of classes and also the mode how to classify features inside the classes using the Mode list The available modes are e Equal Interval e Quantile e Natural Breaks Jenks Standard Deviation e Pretty Breaks The listbox in the center part of the Style menu lists the classes together with their ranges labels and symbols that will be rendered The example in figure_symbology_4 shows the graduated rendering dialog for the rivers layer of the QGIS sample dataset Rule based rendering The rule based renderer is used to render all the features from a layer using rule based symbols whose color reflects the classification of a selected feature s attribute to a class The rules are based on SQL statements The dialog allows rule grouping by filter or scale an
125. 7976e 06 lew In Stop La 1 04219e 06 4 6792e 06 N N Criterion Length Length 1197 42m Time 1 19742h ba Calculate Export Clear N Fi Help 2 ZA Pa CN Toggles the editing sW Coordinate 1041721 4679296 Scale 1 2398 M M Render EPSG 3857 A Gambar 19 25 Plugin Grafik Jalan amp Fitur Utama e menghitung path panjang dan waktu travel e Mengoptimalkan dari panjang atau dari waktu travel e ekspor path ke lapisan vektor e arah jalan highlight ini lambat dan digunakan terutama untuk tujuan debug dan untuk pengujian pengaturan 19 15 Plugin Grafik Jalan 243 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Seperti lapisan jalan Anda bisa menggunakan setiap lapisan vektor polyline dalam format yang didukung QGIS Dua garis dengan titik umum dianggap terhubung Harap dicatat ini diperlukan untuk menggunakan CRS lapisan sebagai CRS proyek ketika mengedit lapisan jalan Hal ini disebabkan fakta bahwa perhitungan koordinat antara CRS yang berbeda memperkenalkan beberapa kesalahan yang dapat mengakibatkan diskontinuitas bahkan ketika snapping digunakan Dalam tabel lapisan atribut kolom berikut dapat digunakan e kecepatan pada bagian jalan kolom numerik e arah jenis yang dapat dicor ke string Arah maju dan mundur yang sesuai dengan jalan satu arah dua arah dua arah jalan Jika beberapa bidang tidak memiliki nil
126. Color of bar EEE Size of bar 30 feet miles _ Enable scale bar Automatically snap to round number on resize Help Cancel OK Gambar 8 9 Dialog Bar Skala 8 Menambahkan bar skala 1 Pilih dari menu Tampilan Dekorasi Skala Bar lihat figure decorations 4 2 Pilih penempatan dari daftar drop down Penempatan Kiri Bawah 3 Pilih gaya dari daftar Gaya bar Skala Tick Down 4 Pilih warna bar warna bar black atau gunakan hitam warna default 5 Atur ukuran bar dan labelnya Ukuran bar 30 degrees 6 Pastikan kotak centang sudah aktif fF Aktifkan skala bar 7 Opsional memilih secara otomatis snap ke angka bulat ketika kanvas diubah ukurannya C Automatically snap to round number on resize 8 Klik OK Tip Pengaturan Dekorasi Saat Anda menyimpan sebuah proyek qgs setiap perubahan yang Anda buat pada Kisi Grid Panah Utara Skala Bar dan Hak Cipta akan disimpan dalam proyek dan dikembalikan pada saat Anda memuat proyek 8 7 Peralatan Anotasi Peralatan Anotasi Teks dalam toolbar atribut memberikan kemungkinan untuk menempatkan teks diformat dalam balon pada kanvas Peta OGIS Gunakan alat Anotasi Teks dan klik kedalam kanvas peta Dobel klik pada item membuka dialog dengan berbagai pilihan Ada editor teks untuk memasukkan teks yang diformat dan pengaturan item lain Misalnya ada pilihan memiliki item ditempatkan pada posisi peta ditampilkan dengan simbol penanda atau memiliki item pada posisi layar ti
127. F for instance If this field is checked the value of the Output filename expression field is meaningless In order to adapt labels to the feature the atlas plugin iterates over use a label with this special notation ex pression using field name For example with a city layer with fields CITY NAME and ZIPCODE you could insert this 1 The area of 1 upper CITY_NAME II V1 ZIPCODE is lt format_number area 1000000 2 Il km2 Io And that would result in the generated atlas as 208 Bab 18 Print Composer QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 The area of PARIS 75001 is 1 94 km2 18 5 1 Generation The atlas generation is done when the user asks for a print or an export The behaviour of these functions will be slightly changed if an atlas map has been selected For instance when the user asks for an export to PDF if an atlas map is defined the user will be asked for a directory where to save all the generated PDF files except if the A Single file export when possible has been selected 18 6 Creating Output Figure_composer_30 shows the print composer with an example print layout including each type of map element described in the sections above alaska1 Composer View Layout IBAN ERRA Nee RS e e E d M REGO Ew 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 Compositi Atlas generati Item Propert ZB Atlas generation Ba Meme Region Generate an atlas
128. Formatting menu allows you to format multiple lines like for point and line layers As with point and line layers you can create a text buffer in the Buffer menu Use the Background menu to create a complex user defined background for the polygon layer You can use the menu as well as for the point and line layers The entries in the Shadow menu are the same as for point and line layers In the Placement menu you find special settings for polygon layers see Figure labels 3 Offset from centroid Horizontal Slow Around centroid Free and Using perimeter are possible In the Offset from centroid settings you can define if the centroid is visible polygon or whole polygon That means that either the centroid is used for the polygon you can see on the map or the centroid is used for the whole polygon no matter if you can see the whole feature on the map You can place your label with the quadrants here and define offset and rotation The Around centroid setting makes it possible to place the label around the centroid with a certain distance Again you can define 2 visible polygon or whole polygon for the centroid With the Using perimeter settings you can define a position and a distance for the label For the position SF Above line fF On line fF Below line and C Line orientation dependend position are possible The entries in the Rendering menu are the same as for line layers You can also use Suppres
129. GIS Other untested formats can be loaded by selecting the GDAL All files filter Working with GRASS raster data is described in Section GRASS GIS Integration 13 1 1 What is raster data Raster data in GIS are matrices of discrete cells that represent features on above or below the earth s surface Each cell in the raster grid is the same size and cells are usually rectangular in QGIS they will always be rectangular Typical raster datasets include remote sensing data such as aerial photography or satellite imagery and modelled data such as an elevation matrix Unlike vector data raster data typically do not have an associated database record for each cell They are geocoded by its pixel resolution and the x y coordinate of a corner pixel of the raster layer This allows QGIS to position the data correctly in the map canvas QGIS makes use of georeference information inside the raster layer e g GeoTiff or in an appropriate world file to properly display the data 13 1 2 Loading raster data in QGIS Raster layers are loaded either by clicking on the i Add Raster Layer icon or by selecting the Layer i Add Raster Layer menu option More than one layer can be loaded at the same time by holding down the Control or Shift key and clicking on multiple items in the dialog Open a GDAL Supported Raster Data Source Once a raster layer is loaded in the map legend you can click on the layer name with the right mouse button to select
130. GIS data processing and exchange Describing a basic data model for geographic features an increasing number of specifications are developed to serve specific needs for interoperable location and geospatial technology including GIS Further information can be found under http www opengeospatial org Important OGC specifications supported by QGIS are e WMS Web Map Service WMS WMTS Client e WMTS Web Map Tile Service WMS WMTS Client e WES Web Feature Service WFS and WFS T Client e WES T Web Feature Service Transactional WFS and WES T Client e WCS Web Coverage Service WCS Client e SFS Simple Features for SQL PostGIS Layers e GML Geography Markup Language OGC services are increasingly being used to exchange geospatial data between different GIS implementations and data stores QGIS can deal with the above specifications as a client being SFS through support of the PostgreSQL PostGIS data provider see Section PostGIS Layers 14 1 1 WMS WMTS Client Overview of WMS Support QGIS currently can act as a WMS client that understands WMS 1 1 1 1 1 and 1 3 servers It has particularly been tested against publicly accessible servers such as DEMIS WMS servers act upon requests by the client e g QGIS for a raster map with a given extent set of layers symbolization style and transparency The WMS server then consults its local data sources rasterizes the map and sends it back to the client in a ras
131. GRASS Tools alaska demo Modules Tree Modules List Browser Y GRASS MODULES Cy shell GRASS shell gt Create new GRASS location and transfer data into it v File management Y Import into GRASS gt Import raster into GRASS Y Import vector into GRASS y v in ogr qgis Import loaded vector v in ogr Import OGR vector v in ogr loc Import OGR vector and creat v in ogr all Import OGR vectors in a given A0 e Ae Ae Lee v in oqr all loc Import all OGR PostGIS ve Gambar 16 8 GRASS Toolbox and Module Tree 4 A complete list of GRASS modules available in the graphical Toolbox in OGIS version 2 0 is available in the GRASS wiki http grass osgeo org wiki GRASS OGIS relevant module list It is also possible to customize the GRASS Toolbox content This procedure is described in Section Customizing the GRASS Toolbox As shown in figure grass toolbox 1 you can look for the appropriate GRASS module using the thematically grouped Modules Tree or the searchable Modules List tab Clicking on a graphical module icon a new tab will be added to the toolbox dialog providing three new sub tabs Options Output and Manual Options The Options tab provides a simplified module dialog where you can usually select a raster or vector layer visualized in the QGIS canvas and enter further module specific parameters to run the module GRASS Tools alaska demo Modules Tree Modules List Browser gt D Module
132. ID Rendering Gambar 18 26 HTML frame Item properties Tab 4b Point the URL field to the URL or the HTML file you want to insert in the composer e You can adjust the rendering of that page with the Resize mode Use existing frames constraints the page inside its first frame or in the frame created with the next settings e Extent to next page will create as many frames and their pages as necessary to render the height of the webpage Each frame can be moved around on the layout If you resize a frame the webpage will be divided up upon the other frames The last frame will be trimmed to fit the webpage e Repeat on every page will first repeat the upper left of the webpage on every page in same sized frames e Repeat until finished will also create as many frames as the Extend to next page option except All frames will have the same size 18 4 Item alignment Raise or lower functionalities for elements are inside the Raise selected items pulldown menu Choose an element on the print composer canvas and select the matching functionality to raise or lower the selected element compared to the other elements see table composer 1 There are several alignment functionalities available within the B Align selected items pulldown menu see ta ble_composer_1 To use an alignment functionality you first select some elements and then click on the matching alignment icon All selected will then be aligned within to their common
133. IS Dukungan Label HTML Dukungan label HTML telah ditambahkan pada penyusun peta untuk mem berikan kontrol yang lebih besar pada peta akhir Anda Label HTML mendukung penuh lembar gaya css html dan bahkan javascript Legenda multi kolom Sekarang penyusun legenda telah didukung multi kolom Memisahkan dari satu lapisan layer dengan banyak kelas menjadi beberapa kolom adalah opsional Lapisan simbol tunggal ditambahkan secara default sebagai item baris tunggal Tiga gaya yang berbeda dapat diberikan untuk lapisan judul grup Grup sub grup atau tersembunyi hidden Gaya judul visual yang memungkinkan pengelompokan item dengan leluasa Sebagai contoh simbol lapisan tunggal dapat ditampilkan sebagai item baris tunggal atau dengan judul lapisan seperti versi 1 8 simbol dari beberapa lapisan layer dapat dikelompokkan ke dalam satu kelompok menyembunyikan judul dll Fitur penghitungan bisa ditambahkan ke label Pembaruan manajemen penyusun peta Perbaikan berikut telah dibuat untuk manajemen penyusun peta Sekarang nama penyusun dapat didefinisikan pada penciptaan opsional memilih mulai dari nama penyusun lainnya Sekarang penyusun bisa disalin duplikasi Baru dari Template dan dari Spesifik dalam Manajer Penyusun menciptakan penyusun dari template yang terletak di manapun pada filesystem Sekarang proyek induk bisa disimpan secara langsung dari area kerja penyusun peta Semua tindakan manajemen penyusun kini dapat diakses lan
134. IS Pada Tingkat dan Pembatasan CRS Menu Macros untuk membuat modul Python disimpan ke berkas proyek ggs akan dimuat dan memiliki spesifik fungsi yang berjalan pada proyek berikut openProject saveProject dan closeProject Project Properties Macros P General amp python macros wy CRS from ggis utils import iface ER Identify layers from ggis gui import OgsMessageBar def openProject wy Default styles msgbar iface messageBar msgbar PushMessage WARNING project contains sensitive data z Do not publish on QgsMessageBar WARNING 10 9 ows server def saveProject pass def closeProject pass Help Apply Cancel OK Gambar 9 2 Pengaturan Macro di QGIS 9 3 Opsi Beberapa pilihan dasar untuk OGIS dapat dipilih menggunakan dialog Opsi Pilih menu opsi Pengaturan S Opsi Menu di mana Anda dapat mengoptimalkan opsi Anda 9 3 1 Menu Umum Aplikasi 48 Bab 9 Konfigurasi QGIS QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 e Pilih Gaya QGIS diperlukan restart dan pilih diantara Oxygen Windows Motif CDE Plas tique dan Cleanlux 42 7 e Definisikan Ikon tema Sekarang hanya default e Definisikan Ukuran Ikon 1 e Definisikan Font Pilih antara OT default dan font user defined e Ubah Timeout for timed messages or dialogs j g Sembunyikan layar splash saat startup E Tampilkan Petunjuk saat startup A Judul tebal kotak grup
135. IS User Guide Rilis 2 0 9 2 Properti Proyek Di properti jendela dari proyek 8 Proyek Proyek Properti atau Proyek 5 Proyek Properti Anda mengatur opsi spesifik proyek Mereka termasuk e Di dalam menu Umum judul proyek seleksi dan warna latar satuan lapisan presisi dan pilihan untuk menyimpan path relatif terhadap lapisan yang dapat ditentukan Jika transformasi CRS aktif Anda dapat memilih ellipsoid untuk perhitungan jarak Anda dapat menentukan satuan kanvas hanya digunakan ketika transformasi CRS dinonaktifkan dan ketepatan desimal untuk digunakan Anda juga dapat menentukan daftar skala proyek yang menimpa skala yang telah ditentukan global Menu CRS memungkinkan Anda untuk memilih Coordinat Reference System untuk proyek ini dan memu ngkinkan proyeksi ulang on the fly lapisan raster dan lapisan vektor ketika menampilkan lapisan dari CRS yang berbeda Dengan menu ketiga Identifikasi lapisan Anda atur atau nonaktif lapisan akan merespon alat mengidenti fikasi Lihat paragraf peralatan Peta dari bagian Opsi untuk mengaktifkan identifikasi atau lapisan multi Menu Gaya Standar memungkinkan Anda mengontrol bagaimana lapisan baru akan digambar ketika mere ka tidak memiliki gaya gml yang ditentukan Anda juga dapat mengatur standar tingkat transparansi untuk lapisan baru dan apakah simbol harus memiliki warna acak kepada mereka Tab OWS Server memungkinkan untuk menentukan informasi tentang Server WMS dan kapabilitas WFS OG
136. Init function abe Labels Labels Id Name Type Type name Label deprecated 0 cat int Integer 1C v main Fields 1 NAMES QString String 8C ca g3 Display 2 AREA MI double Real 32 NAMES oo AREA MI Actions 3 xlabel int Integer 8 va p ylabel int Integer 7 xlabel lt ms 5 tati int Int ylabel rotation in nteger lg Diagrams 9 rotation Metadata Add tab or group for lakes Create categor as gory a atab a group in container Wesel o Restore Default Style Save As Default Load Style Save Style v Help Apply Cancel LOK Gambar 12 20 Dialog to create categories with the Attribute editor layout 12 2 4 General Menu K Use this menu to make general settings for the vector layer There are several options available Layer Info e Change the display name of the layer in displayed as e Define the Layer source of the vector layer e Define the Data source encoding to define provider specific option and to be able to read the file Coordinate Reference System e Specify the Coordinate Reference System Here you can view or change the projection of the specific vector layer e Create a Spatial Index only for OGR supported formats 12 2 The Vector Properties Dialog 85 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Attributes lakes main Fields cat 14 gi NAMES Becharof Lake x AREA MI 456 025 X Label control xlabel 509083 x A x ylabel 2920397 rotation cancel GRE
137. MMENTS Looking across valley lt sglstatement gt lt autoconnect gt false lt autoconnect gt lt query gt lt query gt lt shortdescription gt Import photograph points that mention limestone lt shortdescription gt lt description gt This command will import only points that have photographs that mention limestone to QGIS lt description gt lt databaset ype gt SQLITE lt databasetype gt lt databasehost gt lt databaseport gt 19 6 eVis Plugin 225 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 lt databasename gt C Workshop eVis_Data PhotoPoints db lt databasename gt lt databaseusername gt lt databasepassword gt lt sgqlstatement gt SELECT Attributes x Points x Points y FROM Attributes LEFT JOIN Points ON Points rec_id Attributes point_ID where COMMENTS like SlimestoneS lt sgqlstatement gt lt autoconnect gt false lt autoconnect gt lt query gt does 19 7 Plugin fTools Tujuan dari plugin fTools python adalah untuk menyediakan sumber daya one stop untuk banyak tugas GIS umum berbasis vektor tanpa perlu perangkat lunak tambahan perpustakaan atau workarounds kompleks Ini menyedi akan paket pengelolaan data spasial dan fungsi analisis yang baik cepat dan fungsional fTools sekarang otomatis terpasang dan aktif dalam OGIS versi terbaru dan seperti semua plugin bisa dinonak tifkan dan diaktifkan menggunakan Pengelola Plugin Lihat Bagian Memuat OGIS Plugin Inti Ketika diaktifkan plugin fTools men
138. Mato e prado th BB Floresta aberta SAE nema 33 vc geo_acoes 2 limites limi imites a unidadesdegestao v _ 3 concelho_cascais D D File A i tao amp Show only editable layers Cancel eks Fa 5 EAOS si sik _ Da SA Manna MW Coordinate 111899 100822 Scale 1 5489 9 M Render EPSG 27493 A Gambar 19 17 Membuat proyek luar jaringan dari lapisan PostGIS atau WES 19 12 Oracle GeoRaster Plugin In Oracle databases raster data can be stored in SDO_GEORASTER objects available with the Oracle Spatial extension In QGIS the aD OracleGeoRasterPlugin js supported by GDAL and depends on Oracle s database product being installed and working on your machine While Oracle is proprietary software they provide their software free for development and testing purposes Here is one simple example of how to load raster images to GeoRaster gdal translate of georaster input file tif geor scott tiger orcl This will load the raster into the default GDAL IMPORT table as a column named RASTER 19 121 Managing connections Firstly the Oracle GeoRaster Plugin must be enabled using the Plugin Manager see Section Memuat OGIS Plugin Inti The first time you load a GeoRaster in QGIS you must create a connection to the Oracle database that contains the data To do this begin by clicking on the aD Select GeoRaster toolbar button it will open the Select Oracle Spatial GeoRaster dialog window Click on New t
139. Mn cates Layer source x Trabalho QGIS qgis_sample_data raster landcover img FA Pyramids Columns 3663 Rows 1964 No Data Value n a lA r Histogram v Coordinate reference system Metadata EPSG 2964 NAD27 Alaska Albers Specify v Scale dependent visibility Thumbnail Legend Palette Restore Default Style Save As Default Load Style Save Style Help Apply Cancel OK Gambar 13 1 Raster Layers Properties Dialog 8 Scale Dependent visibility Additionally Scale Dependent visibility can be set in this tab You need to check the checkbox and set an appro priate scale where your data will be displayed in the map canvas At the bottom you can see a thumbnail of the layer its legend symbol and the palette 13 2 2 Style Menu Band rendering QGIS offers four different Render types The renderer chosen is dependent on the data type 1 Multiband color if the file comes as a multi band with several bands e g used with a satellite image with several bands 2 Paletted if a single band file comes with an indexed palette e g used with a digital topographic map 3 Singleband gray one band of the image will be rendered as gray QGIS will choose this renderer if the file neither has multi bands nor has an indexed palette nor has a continous palette e g used with a shaded relief map 4 Singleband pseudocolor this renderer is possible for files with a continuous palette e g the file has got a color ma
140. Penyesuaian 9 1 Panel dan Toolbar Dalam menu Panel Anda bisa mengatifkan dan menonaktfikan widget QGIS Menu Toolbar memberikan kemungkinan mengaktfikan dan menonatifkan ikon grup di toolbar QGIS lihat figure_panels_toolbars View Layer Settings Plugins Vector Raster Database Help Pan Map Pan Map to Selection 2 af w 4 Zoom In Ctrl 4 Zoom Out Ctrl J Select Jy Panels Toggle Full Screen Mode Ctrl F v Attributes Database v File K Y Help v Label Manage Layers Map Navigation v Plugins v Raster v Vector v Web Gambar 9 1 Menu Panel dan Toolbar A Tip Mengaktifkan Tinjauan QGIS Di QGIS Anda dapat menggunakan panel gambaran yang menyediakan tampilan lapisan tingkat penuh yang ditambahkan ke dalamnya Hal ini dapat dipilih di bawah menu Tampilan Panel Dalam pandangan persegi panjang yang menunjukkan tingkat peta saat ini Hal ini memungkinkan Anda dengan cepat menentukan area peta yang sedang Anda lihat Perhatikan bahwa label tidak diberikan ke gambaran peta bahkan jika lapisan dalam gambaran peta telah diatur untuk pelabelan Jika Anda klik dan tarik persegi panjang merah dalam gambaran yang menunjukkan gambaran Anda saat ini tampilan utama peta akan memperbarui Tip Tampilkan Pesan Log Ini memungkinkan untuk melacak pesan QGIS Anda bisa mengaktifkan Frog Pesan dalam menu Settings Panel dan ikuti pesan di dalam tab Umum dan Plugin selama memuat dan operasi 47 QG
141. QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 QGIS Project 16 May 2014 6 Daftar Isi Pendahuluan 1 Konvensi 3 21 Komen GUI sesers sares esad ete ea de che te bo 6 eo 48s we ee ed 3 2 2 Konvensi Teks atau Papan Ketik beken ee REE RE REE REG 3 23 petunjuk Spesiik Pavoni so coca wates note bean CHER ERE ee BE Es 4 Kata Pengantar 5 Keistimewaan 7 AS Bde cit ee woe RBA BREESE ES eee Oe CR Be Se EEE ERG CERES 7 42 Jelajahi data dan menyusun peta ee f 4 3 Membuat menyunting mengelola dan ekspor data 8 44 Analisis data aaa eb bebe dbo ee diese bd EROS 2S HE EH DG 8 4 5 Terbitkan peta di Internet ik eae ebb ERE SY HO ROR ew Owe ERE EE we ww eS 8 4 6 Memperpanjang fungsionalitas QGIS melalui plugin 8 a Su a ae os aoe oe a ee Bee oe ee oe Ee ee ee 9 Apa yang baru pada QGIS 2 0 11 SA Antarmuka Pengouna sasea dew e a Behe ee Gee eee OSCE EE ERE EEE HH 11 5 2 PMV Dan ena KER ie oR hee oe ERS SEES 11 Mo II ia AA AA IU aa 12 54 Penyusun Pela D naaa bd bee bebe bbe eo EEE we ESE E EER HE EGS 13 ag Webel sa soto soket II ee ee REDE eee HR REESE BERD Eee san ES 14 5 6 Programmability ee Io Kn aan Sa Un ba Uas 2 Kn 14 Def SALA 2 ee Ba ae Be ee ee an bim ee ee ee ee eee ai te 15 20 TW 6 64 0 c whee chee ene e tates ee GA meh oe ee ee eee ae ba eee ee 15 T MW 4a aeeo ee ed eee ata eee Se obese eee ee hens eee ees Gees G 15 5 10 Legenda Pelapis layer
142. QGIS and press Op Anne dan 2 Click on Uf Toggle editing mode and open the Field Calculator dialog 3 Select the C Create a new field checkbox to safe the calculations into a new field 4 Add length as Output field name real as Output field type and define Output field width 10 and a Precision of 3 5 Now doubleclick on function Slength in the Geometry group to add it into the Field calculator expression box 6 Complete the expression by typing 1000 in the Field calculator expression box and click Ok 7 You can now find a new column length in the attribute table The available functions are listed below The field calculator Function list with the Selected Function Help Operators and Expression menu are also available through the rule based rendering in the Style menu of the Layer properties and the expression based labeling inthe ng core application Operators This group contains operators e g a b a plus b a D a minus b ax b a multiplied by b a b a divided by b aos b a modulo b for example 7 3 2 1 gt 2 fits into 7 three times rest is 1 a b a power b for example 2 2 4 or 2 3 8 a b a and b are equal a gt b a is larger than b a lt b a is smaller than b a lt gt b a and b are not equal a b a and b are not equal a lt b a is less than or equal to b a gt b a is larger than or equal to b a b a matches the regular expression b a positive sign a negative value
143. R Borough 5 Alaska Denali US AK DE Borough 6 Alaska Dillingham US AK DI Census Area 7 Alaska Fairbanks North Star US AK FA Borough 8 Alaska Haines US AK HA Borough 9 Alaska Juneau US AK JU City And Bo 10 Alaska Kenai Peninsula US AK KN Borough OO www Lita TA PN AN ai KA are ALT Pa mmm L ii i a F3 Show All Features v Gambar 12 37 Attribute Table for regions layer Selecting features in an attribute table Each selected row in the attribute table displays the attributes of a selected feature in the layer If the set of features selected in the main window is changed the selection is also updated in the attribute table Likewise if the set of rows selected in the attribute table is changed the set of features selected in the main window will be updated Rows can be selected by clicking on the row number on the left side of the row Multiple rows can be marked by holding the Ctrl key A continuous selection can be made by holding the Shift key and clicking on several row headers on the left side of the rows All rows between the current cursor position and the clicked row are selected Moving the cursor position in the attribute table by clicking a cell in the table does not change the row selection Changing the selection in the main canvas does not move the cursor position in the attribute table The table can be sorted by any column by clicking on the column header A small arrow indicates the sort order downward point
144. S server and if any layer from a WMS server is queryable you can then use the Q Identity tool to select a pixel on the map canvas A query is made to the WMS server for each selection made The results of the query are returned in plain text The formatting of this text 1s dependent on the particular WMS server used Format selection If multiple output formats are supported by the server a combo box with supported formats is automatically added to the identify results dialog and the selected format will is stored in project for the layer GML format support The Q Identity tool supports WMS server response GetFeaturelnfo in GML it is called Feature in QGIS GUI in this context format If Feature format is supported by the server and selected results of the Identify tool are vector features like from regular vector layer When a single feature is selected in the tree it is highlighted in the map and it can be copied to clipboard and pasted to another vector layer See example setup of UMN Mapserver below to support GetFeatureInfo GML format in layer METADATA add which fields should be included and define geometry example gml include items ali ows geometries mygeom ows mygeom type polygon Then there are two possibilities formats available see a and b a basic output is generated by Mapserver and does not contain XSD in WEB METADATA define formats example wms getfeatureinto formatlist application vnd
145. SQL Data can be imported into PostgreSQL PostGIS using several tools such as the SPIT plugin or the command line tools shp2pgsql or ogr2ogr DB Manager DB M QGIS comes with a core plugin named Ge anager It can be used to load shapefiles and other data formats and includes support for schemas See Section Plugin Pengelola DB for more information shp2pgsql PostGIS includes an utility called shp2pgsql that can be used to import shapefiles into a PostGIS enabled database For example to import a shapefile named lakes shp into a PostgreSQL database named gis_data use the following command shp2pgsgl s 2964 lakes shp lakes new psgl gis_data This creates a new layer named 1lakes_new in the gis_data database The new layer will have a spatial ref erence identifier SRID of 2964 See Section Working with Projections for more information on spatial reference systems and projections Tip Exporting datasets from PostGIS Like the import tool shp2pgsql there is also a tool to export PostGIS datasets as shapefiles pgsgl2shp This is shipped within your PostGIS distribution 68 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 ogr2ogr Beside shp2pgsql and DB Manager there is another tool for feeding geodata in PostGIS ogr2ogr This is part of your GDAL installation To import a shapefile into PostGIS do the following ogr2ogr f PostgreSQL PG dbname postgis host myhost de user postgres password topsecret
146. SV format it will be converted prior to importing it in R Additionally raster files can be read using the readGDAL command instead of brick by using the usereadgdal If you are an advanced user and do not want QGIS to create the object representing the layer you can use the passfilename tag to indicate that you prefer a string with the filename instead In this case it is up to you to open the file before performing any operation on the data it contains With the above information we can now understand the first line of our first example script the first line not starting with a Python comment pts spsample polyg numpoints type random The variable polygon already contains a SpatialPolygonsDataFrame object so it can be used to call the spsample method just like the numpoints one which indicates the number of points to add to the created sample grid Since we have declared an output of type vector named out we have to create a variable named out and store a SpatialxDataFrame object in it in this case a SpatialPointsDataFrame You can use any name for your intermediate variables Just make sure that the variable storing your final result has the same name that you used to declare it and contains a suitable value In this case the result obtained from the spsample method has to be converted explicitly into a SpatialPointsDataFrame object since it is itself an object of class ppp which is not a suitable class to be
147. Select Oracle Spatial GeoRaster dialog can be closed now and next time it opens it will keep the same connection and will show the same previous list of subdataset making it very easy to open up another image from the same context Catatan GeoRasters that contains pyramids will display much faster but the pyramids need to be generated outside of QGIS using Oracle PL SQL or gdaladdo The following is example using gdaladdo gdaladdo georaster scott tiger orcl georaster _table georaster georid 6 r nearest 2 4 6 8 16 32 This is an example using PL SQL S sqlplus scott tiger SQL gt DECLARE gr sdo_georaster BEGIN SELECT image INTO gr FROM cities WHERE id 1 FOR UPDATE sdo_geor generatePyramid gr rLevel 5 resampling NN UPDATE cities SET image gr WHERE id 1 COMMIT END 19 13 Plugin Raster Analisis Terrain P Plugin Raster Analisis Terrain dapat digunakan untuk menghitung kemiringan aspek bayangan bukit indeks kekasaran dan relief untuk model elevasi digital DEM Sangat sederhana menangani dan menyediakan grafis antarmuka pengguna intuitif untuk membuat lapisan raster baru Lihat Figure raster terrain 1 Deskripsi dari analisis e Lereng Menghitung sudut kemiringan untuk setiap sel dalam derajat berdasarkan urutan pertama estimasi derivatif e Aspek Eksposisi dimulai dengan 0 untuk arah utara dalam derajat berlawanan jarum jam e Bukitbayangan Buat peta berbayang menggunakan cahaya dan bayangan un
148. Settings and Security Depending on your computing environment storing passwords in your OGIS settings may be a security risk Passwords are saved in clear text in the system configuration and in the project files Your customized settings for QGIS are stored based on the operating system 4 the settings are stored in your home directory in config QGIS QGIS2 conf e the settings are stored in the registry Loading a ORACLE Spatial Layer Q Once you have one or more connections defined you can load layers from the ORACLE database Of course this requires having data in ORACLE To load a layer from ORACLE Spatial perform the following steps If the Add ORACLE Spatial layers dialog is not already open click on the Q AUI ORACLE Spatial Layer toglbar button e Choose the connection from the drop down list and click Connect Select or unselect C Also list tables with no geometry Optionally use some E Search Options to define which features to load from the layer or use the Build query button to start the Query builder dialog Find the layer s you wish to add in the list of available layers Select it by clicking on it You can select multiple layers by holding down the Shift key while clicking See Section Query Builder for information on using the ORACLE Query Builder to further define the layer Click on the Add button to add the layer to the map Tip ORACLE Spatial Layers Normally an ORACLE Spatial layer is d
149. Toolbox and R are supported along with some other command line applications that provide spatial data analysis functionalities Algorithms relying on an external application are managed by their own algorithm provider This chapter will show you how to configure the processing framework to include these additional applications and will explain some particular features of the algorithm based on them Once you have correctly configured the system you will be able to execute external algorithms from any component like the toolbox or the graphical modeler just like you do with any other geoalgorithm By default all algorithms that rely on an external appplication not shipped with QGIS are not enabled You can enable them in the configuration dialog Make sure that the corresponding application is already installed in your system Enabling an algorithm provider without installing the application it needs will cause the algorithms to appear in the toolbox but an error will be thrown when you try to execute them This is because the algorithm descriptions needed to create the parameters dialog and provide the information needed about the algorithm are not included with each application but with QGIS instead That is they are part of QGIS so you have them in your installation even if you have not installed any other software Running the algorithm however needs the application binaries to be installed in your system 17 7 1 A note for Windows users
150. Tree tab This GRASS module allows to import OGR supported vector files intoa GRASS LOCATION The module dialog for v in ogr appears 10 Browse to the folder gm1 in the QGIS Alaska dataset and select the file Lakes gm1 as OGR file 11 As vector output name define lakes grass and click Run You don t have to care about the other options in this example In the Output tab you see the currently running GRASS command v in ogr o dsn path to lakes gml output lakes _grass 12 When it says Succesfully finished click View output The lakes grass vector layer is now imported into GRASS and will be visualized in the QGIS canvas 16 5 The GRASS vector data model It is important to understand the GRASS vector data model prior to digitizing In general GRASS uses a topological vector model This means that areas are not represented as closed polygons but by one or more boundaries A boundary between two adjacent areas is digitized only once and it is shared by both areas Boundaries must be connected and closed without gaps An area is identified and labeled by the centroid of the area Besides boundaries and centroids a vector map can also contain points and lines All these geometry elements can be mixed in one vector and will be represented in different so called layers inside one GRASS vector map So in GRASS a layer is not a vector or raster map but a level inside a vector layer This is important to distinguish carefully Al
151. USER Software QGIS qgis 9 4 Penyesuaian Customization Alat penyesuaian memungkinkan Anda mengaktifkan dan nonaktif hampir setiap elemen dalam antar muka QGIS Hal ini bisa sangat berguna jika Anda memiliki banyak plugin yang dipasang bahwa Anda tidak pernah menggunakan dan mengisi layar Anda Customization q 5 ExpandAll Collapse All Select All Hi Enable customization Object name Label Descriptior mToggleExtentsViewButton Y amp Toolbars gt amp mAdvancedDigitizeToolBar Advanced D gt amp mAttributesToolBar Attributes n KG a Ke on a TAN F Reset Apply Cancel Ln OK Gambar 9 5 Dialog penyesuaian 8 Penyesuaian OGIS dibagi menjadi lima kelompok Dalam C Menu Anda dapat menyembunyikan entri dalam Menu bar Dalam a Panel Anda dapat menemukan Panel jendela Jendela Panel adalah aplikasi yang dapat dimulai dan digunakan sebagai mengambang jendela tingkat atas atau tertanam ke jendela utama QGIS sebagai widget lihat juga Panel dan Toolbar Dalam fitur A Status Bar seperti informasi koordinat dapat dinonak tifkan Dalam A Toolbars Anda dapat mengaktifkan non aktif ikon toolbar OGIS dan SF Widgets Anda dapat mengaktifkan non aktif dialog serta tombol mereka Dengan Hy Beralih ke penangkapan widget dalam aplikasi utama Anda dapat mengklik elemen dalam QGIS Anda ingin menyembunyikan dan menemukan entri yang sesuai lihat figure_customization Anda juga dapat menyimpan berbagai se
152. YZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below such as Acknowledgements Dedications Endorsements or History 21 2 GNU Free Documentation License 257 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 To Preserve the Title of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section Entitled XYZ according to this definition The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License but only as regards disclaiming warranties any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this License 2 VERBATIM COPYING You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium either commercially or noncommercially provided that this License the copyright notices and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute However you may accept compensation in exchange for copies If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3 You may also lend copi
153. a berikan akan semakin baik hasilnya Ada alat tambahan pada dialog plugin untuk memperbesar dan menggeser wilayah kerja dalam rangka untuk mencari satu set titik GCP relevan Enter map coordinates Enter X and Y coordinates DMS dd mm ss ss DD dd dd or projected coordinates mmmm mm which correspond with the selected point on the image Alternatively click the button with icon of a pencil and then click a corresponding point on map canvas of QGIS to Fill in coordinates of that X East 602388 19813829811755568 Y North 4915570 1712 Snap to background layers 2 From map canvas Cancel MSN Gambar 19 14 Tambahkan titik titik ke gambar raster 4 Poin poin yang ditambahkan ke peta akan disimpan dalam sebuah berkas teks yang terpisah filename points biasanya bersama sama dengan gambar raster Hal ini memungkinkan kita un tuk membuka kembali plugin Georeferencer di kemudian hari dan menambah poin baru atau menghapus yang sudah ada untuk mengoptimalkan hasilnya Berkas poin berisi nilai nilai dalam bentuk mapX mapY pixelX pixelY Anda bisa menggunakan tombol tombol g Muat poin poin GCP Gan gg Simpan poin GCP sebagai untuk mengelola berkas Pengaturan mendefinisikan transformasi Setelah Anda telah menambahkan GCPs Anda ke gambar raster Anda harus menentukan pengaturan transformasi untuk proses georeferensi 19 9 Plugin Georeferencer 233 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 g Transformation settings 2 kw A WX T
154. a sekarang Sebelah kanan dari fungsi render Anda akan menemukan kode EPSG dari CRS proyek sekarang dan ikon proyek tor Mengklik ini akan membuka properti proyeksi untuk proyek saat ini Tip Menghitung skala koreksi dari kanvas peta Anda Saat Anda memulai QGIS derajat merupakan unit standar dan QGIS memberitahu bahwa setiap koordinat pada lapisan Anda dalam derajat Untuk mengubah nilai skala Anda juga dapat mengubahnya ke satuan meter secara manual di tab Umum dalam Pengaturan Proyek Properti atau Anda bisa memilih Coordinate Reference System CRS proyek dengan klik ikon 2 CRS status qi bagian kanan bawah dari status bar Dalam kasus terakhir unit ditetapkan untuk menentukan proyeksi proyek misalnya tunit m 7 5 Status Bar 33 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 34 Bab 7 QGIS GUI BAB 8 Peralatan Umum 8 1 Fitur Identifikasi Fitur identifikasi memungkinkan berinteraksi dengan kanvas peta untuk mendapatkan atribut data pada sebuah jendela pop up Fitus identifikasi menggunakan Tampilan Identifikasi Fitur atau Ctrl Shift I atau klik ikon p ada Identifikasi Fitur to olb ar Jika Anda klik beberapa fitur poop up ini akan mendaftar semua data atribut dari semua fitur Item pertama adalah jumlah item dalam daftar hasil diikuti dengan nama lapisan Maka anak pertama akan menjadi nama sebuah kolom dengan nilainya Akhirnya semua informasi dari fitur tersebut akan ditampilkan Jendela ini dapat disesuaikan untuk menampil
155. ab choose from Legend type Ty Unique value and set the Classification field to VEGDESC Refer to the explanation of the symbology tab ref sec symbology in the vector section Next reopen the GRASS toolbox and open Vector Vector update by other maps Click on the v rast stats module Enter gtopo30 and forest_areas Only one additional parameter is needed Enter column prefix elev and click run This is a computa tionally heavy operation which will run for a long time probably up to two hours Finally open the forest_areas attribute table and verify that several new columns have been added including elev_min elev_max elev_mean etc for each forest polygon The GRASS toolbox 153 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 16 9 3 Working with the GRASS LOCATION browser Another useful feature inside the GRASS Toolbox is the GRASS LOCATION browser In figure grass module 7 you can see the current working LOCATION with its MAPSETs In the left browser windows you can browse through all MAPSETs inside the current LOCATION The right browser window shows some meta information for selected raster or vector layers e g resolution bounding box data source connected attribute table for vector data and a command history GRASS Tools alaska demo Modules Tree Modules List Browser Oy O O i ala Vector _ airports F Y i raster Fe gtopo30 Points Te v In vector Lines o gt airports Boundaries o gt alaska Centroids lo
156. able operators To add an operator to the SQL where clause field click the appropriate button Relational operators gt string comparison operator LIKE logical operators AND OR are available The Test button shows a message box with the number of features satisfying the current query which is usable in the process of query construction The Clear button clears the text in the SQL where clause text field The OK button closes the window and selects the features satisfying the query The Cancel button closes the window without changing the current selection 12 4 Query Builder 107 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 12 4 2 Save selected features as new layer The selected features can be saved as any OGR supported vector format and also transformed into another Coor dinate Reference System CRS Just open the right mouse menu of the layer and click on Save selection as to define the name of the output file its format and CRS see Section Legenda Peta It 1s also possible to specify OGR creation options within the dialog 12 5 Field Calculator The Es Field Calculator button in the attribute table allows to perform calculations on basis of existing attribute values or defined functions e g to calculate length or area of geometry features The results can be written to a new attribute column or it can be used to update values in an already existing column You have to bring the vector layer in editing mode before
157. added to the parameters window so the user can set their values when executing the model The model itself is an algorithm so the parameters window is generated automatically as it happens with all the algorithms available in the processign framework 2 Definition of the workflow Using the input data of the model the workflow is defined adding algorithms and selecting how they use those inputs or the outputs generated by other algorithms already in the model 17 3 1 Definition of inputs The first step to create a model is to define the inputs it needs The following elements are found in the Inputs tab on the left side of the modeler window e Raster layer e Vector layer e String Table field e Table e Extent e Number e Boolean e File 166 Bab 17 QGIS kerangka pengolahan QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Double clicking on any of them a dialog is shown to define its characteristics Depending on the parameter itself the dialog will contain just one basic element the description which is what the user will see when executing the model or more of them For instance when adding a numerical value as it can be seen in the next figure apart from the description of the parameter you have to set a default value and a range of valid values H Parameter definition Gambar 17 17 Model Parameters 7 For each added input a new element is added to the modeler canvas oF ap oF Point A DEM Landsat Gambar 17 18 Model Parameters
158. ahkan ke tab Peramban 2 dan temukan shapefile di dalam sistem berkas Anda 4 Pilih sebuah berkas dengan tombol kiri tetikus Kini Anda bisa menggunakan ikon ran ae Gunakan ikon untuk dapat bekerja dengan berkas QGIS tanpa banyak usaha QGIS otomatis terlihat untuk Coordinate Reference System CRS dan perbesar ke batas lapisan jika Anda bekerja di sebuah proyek kosong QGIS Jika sudah ada berkas dalam proyek Anda berkas hanya akan ditambahkan dan dalam kasus itu memiliki tingkat yang sama dan CRS akan divisualisasikan Jika berkas ini telah mendapat CRS lain dan lapisan Anda terlebih dahulu klik kanan pada lapisan dan pilih Atur CRS Proyek dari Lapisan Kemudian pilih Perbesar ke Batas Lapisan Fungsi dd Saring Berkas bekerja pada level direktori Jelajahi folder dimana Anda ingin menyaring berkas berkas dan memberikan kata pencarian atau wildcard Penjelajah hanya menampilkan nama berkas yang sesuai dari data lain tidak akan ditampilkan kemudian Ini juga mungkin untuk menjalankan peramban QGIS sebagai aplikasi mandiri Mulai Peramban QGIS ketik di dalam gbrowser di perintah prompt e Memulai peramban QGIS menggunakan menu Start atau shortcut dekstop atau dobel klik pada berkas proyek OGIS e Peramban X QGIS juga tersedia di fodler Aplikasi Anda Dalam figure_browser_standalone_metadata Anda bisa melihat ditingkatkan fungsi peramban QGIS Tab Param menyediakan detail dari koneksi dataset seperti PostGIS atau MSSQL Spatial
159. ai apapun atau tidak ada nilai standar yang digunakan Anda dapat mengubah default dan beberapa pengaturan plugin di dialog pengaturan plugin 19 15 1 Menggunakan plugin Setelah Plugin aktif Anda akan melihat sebuah panel tambahan di sisi kiri dari jendela utama OGIS Sekarang membuat beberapa definisi dialog Pengaturan plugin grafik jalan di menu Vektor Grafik Jalan lihat fig ure road graph 2 i as Road graph plugin settings w Wy es Time unit Distance unit kilometer w Topology tolerance 0 00000 Transportation layer Default settings Layer Direction feld Value for forward direction Value for reverse direction Value two way direction Speed field km h v ks Help w OK Cancel Gambar 19 26 Pengaturan plugin grafik jalan Setlah mengatur Satuan waktu Satuan Jarak dan Toleransi topologi Anda bisa memilih lapisan vektor di tab Lapisan transportasi Disini Anda juga bisa memilih Kolom Arah dan Kolom Kecepatan Dalam tab Pengaturan standar Anda bisa mengatur Arah untuk menghitung Akhirnya pada panel Shortest Path pilih mulai dan titik Berhenti di lapisan jaringan jalan dan klik Hitung 19 16 Plugin Spasial Query Plugin W Spasial Query memungkinkan untuk membuat query spasial pilih fitur di lapisan sasaran dengan mengacu pada lapisan lain Fungsi ini didasarkan pada perpustakaan GEOS dan tergantung pada sumber fitur lapisan yang dipilih Operator yang mungkin adalah e Isi e Sama e Tumpang
160. ains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the ex ecutable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by mo
161. ak semua inti plugin dimuat 7 1 Bar Menu 27 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 7 1 8 Vektor Pilihan Menu Shortcut Rekaman Koordinat lihat Plugin Mengambil Koordinat Vektor Dxf2Shp lihat Plugin Pengonversi Dxf2Shp Vektor GPS lihat GPS Plugin Vektor Open Street Map lihat Loading OpenStreetMap Vectors Grafik Road lihat Plugin Grafik Jalan Ouery Spasial lihat Plugin Spasial Ouery Vektor Saat memulai OGIS untuk pertama kali tidak semua inti plugin dimuat 711 9 Raster Pilihan Menu Shortcut Kalkulator Raster lihat Raster Calculator Georeferencer lihat Plugin Georeferencer Raster Heatmap lihat Heatmap Plugin Raster Interpolasi lihat Plugin Interpolasi Raster Statistik Zonal lihat Plugin Statistik Zonal Raster Saat memulai OGIS untuk pertama kali tidak semua inti plugin dimuat 7 1 10 Basis data Pilihan Menu Shortcut eVis lihat eVis Plugin Basis data Spit lihat label spit Basis data Saat memulai OGIS untuk pertama kali tidak semua inti plugin dimuat 71 11 Pengolahan Pilihan Menu Shortcut Toolbox lihat The toolbox Toolbox sa Grafis Modeler lihat The graphical modeler za Sejarah dan Log lihat The history manager Fo Opsi dan Konfigurasi lihat Configuring the processing framework pa Penampil hasil lihat Configuring external applications Perintah Ctrl Alt M lihat The SEXTANTE Commander Saat memulai QGIS untuk pertama kali tidak semua inti plugin d
162. akan aplikasi GRASS terintegrasi yang meliputi fungsi GRASS lengkap lebih dari 400 modul lihat bagian GRASS GIS Integration Atau Anda bekerja dengan Plugin Processing yang menyediakan kerangka analisis geospasial yang kuat untuk memanggil algoritma pihak asli dan ketiga dari OGIS seperti GDAL SAGA GRASS fTools dan banyak lagi lihat bagian Pengantar 4 5 Terbitkan peta di Internet OGIS dapat digunakan sebagai WMS WMTS WMS C atau WFS dan WFS T client dan sebagai WMS atau WFS server lihat bagian Pekerjaan dengan Data OGC Selain itu Anda dapat mengekspor data mempublikasikan mereka di internet menggunakan webserver dengan UMN MapServer atau GeoServer yang terpasang 4 6 Memperpanjang fungsionalitas AGIS melalui plugin OGIS dapat disesuaikan dengan kebutuhan khusus Anda dengan arsitektur plugin yang dapat diperpanjang OGIS menyediakan perpustakaan libraries yang dapat digunakan untuk membuat plugin Anda dapat membuat aplikasi baru dengan C atau Python 8 Bab 4 Keistimewaan QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 4 6 1 Inti Plugin O 0 J WB a A WO N me Ny NO N ND NO KF TF Tr Kr Rr Kr re e he Y EF Wo N e O AI Au A U Ne O Rekaman Koordinat Tetikus merekam koordinat di CRS yang berbeda DB Manager Pertukaran mengedit dan melihat lapisan dan tabel mengeksekusi query SQL Diagram Overlay Menempatkan diagram pada lapisan vektor Dxf2Shp Converter Mengubah DXF ke Shape eVIS Event Visualization Tool
163. alog you will also find one for each algorithm provider They contain an Activate item that you can use to make algorithms appear or not in the toolbox Also some algo rithm providers have their own configuration items that we will explain later when covering particular algorithm providers 17 2 The toolbox 165 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 17 3 The graphical modeler The graphical modeler allows to create complex models using a simple and easy to use interface When working with a GIS most analysis operations are not isolated but part of a chain of operations instead Using the graphical modeler that chain of processes can be wrapped into a single process so it is easier and more convenient to execute than a single process later on a different set on inputs No matter how many steps and different algorithms it involves a model is executed as a single algorithm thus saving time and effort specially for larger models The modeler can be opened from the processing menu The modeler has a working canvas where the structure of the model and the workflow it represents are shown On the left part of the window a panel with two tabs can be used to add new elements to the model 2 x ID Number Raster Layer String Table za Table field Vector layer ad Fa Inputs Algorithms up j Gambar 17 16 Modeler 7 Creating a model involves two steps 1 Definition of necessary inputs These inputs will be
164. ambahkan menu Vektor ke OGIS menyediakan fungsi mulai dari Peralatan Analisis dan Riset ke Peralatan Geometri dan Geoprocessing serta beberapa Peralatan Tata Kelola Data yang berguna 19 7 1 Alat Analisis Akar Alat Kegunaan O O OSOS S S Jarak Matriks Ukur jarak antara dua lapisan titik dan hasil keluarannya a Matriks jarak Sguare b Matriks jarak Linear atau c Ringkasan dari jarak Dapat membatasi jarak ke k fitur terdekat Sum panjang Hitung jumlah total garis panjang untuk setiap poligon dari lapisan vektor poligon garis Poin di Hitung jumlah poin yang terjadi pada setiap poligon dari masukan lapisan vektor poligon poligon Daftar nilai Daftar semua nilai unik di dalam masukan kolom lapisan vektor unik Dasar Hitung statistik dasar rata rata std dev N sum CV pada koom masukan statistik Analisis Menghitung Statistik tetangga terdekat menilai tingkat pengelompokan dalam lapisan Tetangga titik vektor Terdekat Koordinat Hitung pusat rata rata normal atau tertimbang dari seluruh lapisan vektor atau Mean beberapa fitur berdasarkan kolom ID unik Persimpan Cari persimpangan antara garis dan hasil keluaran sebagai titik shapefile Berguna gan untuk mencari persimpangan jalan atau sungai mengabaikan persimpangan garis garis dengan panjang gt 0 Tabel Ftools 1 fTools Analysis tools 226 Bab 19 Plugin QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 19 7 2 Peralatan Riset Seleksi Secara acak memil
165. ame in the legend or by right clicking and choosing Properties from the popup menu e In the tab General click the Create Spatial Index button Problem loading a shape prj file If you load a shapefile with prj file and QGIS is not able to read the coordinate reference system from that file you have to define the proper projection manually within the General tab of the Layer Properties dialog of the layer by clicking the Specify button This is due to the fact that prj files often do not provide the complete projection parameters as used in QGIS and listed in the CRS dialog For that reason if you create a new shapefile with QGIS two different projection files are created A prj file with limited projection parameters compatible with ESRI software and a qp j file providing the complete parameters of the used CRS Whenever QGIS finds a gpj file it will be used instead of the prj 12 1 2 Loading a Maplnfo Layer To load a MapInfo layer click on the dd Vector Layer toolbar button or type Ctr1 Shift v change the file type filter Filter E to Mapinfo File OGR and select the MapInfo layer you want to load 12 1 Supported Data Formats 65 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 12 1 3 Loading an Arcinfo Binary Coverage Va To load an ArcInfo binary coverage click on the Add Vector Layer toolbar button or press Ctrl1 Shift v to open the Add Vector Layer dialog Select Directory Change to Filter to Ar
166. ampaknya menjadi masalah di QGIS dari waktu ke waktu Anda harus menghapus HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software QGIS qgis UI state di registry Ketika Anda hidupkan ulang QGIS kuncinya ditulis lagi secara standar dan semua toolbar terlihat kembali 7 3 Legenda Peta Area legenda peta merupakan daftar semua lapisan layer dalam proyek Suatu lapisan layer dapat dipilih dan digeser ke atas atau kebawah pada legenda menjadi Z ordering Z ordering berarti bahwa lapisan yang terdaftar di bagian atas legenda digambar lapisan bawahnya tercantum dalam legenda 7 2 Toolbar 29 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Catatan Perilaku ini dapat diganti dengan panel urutan lapisan Lapisan di jendela legenda dapat dikelompokkan dalam grup Ada dua cara untuk melakukannya 1 Klik kanan di jendela legenda dan pilih Tambah Grup Beri nama untuk grup tersebut dan tekan Enter Sekarang klik pada lapisan layer yang ada dan geser ke dalam grup 2 Pilih beberapa lapisan layer klik kanan pada jendela legenda dan pilih Grup Terpilih Lapisan lapisan yang dipilih secara otomatis akan menjadi satu grup baru Untuk mengeluarkan lapisan dari grup Anda bisa menggesernya keluar atau klik kanan dan pilih Ubah jadi tingkat teratas Grup dapat masuk kedalam grup lain Kotak centang grup akan memunculkan atau menyembunyikan lapisan dalam grup dengan satu klik Isi dari konteks menu tombol kanan tetikus tergantung pada item legenda yang dipilih lapisan layer raster atau
167. an Processing Support Proyek SEXTANTE telah dimasukkan ke QGIS sebagai fungsi inti SEXTANTE telah diubah namanya menjadi Pengolahan dan memperkenalkan menu baru di OGIS dimana Anda dapat mengakses kotak alat toolbox alat analisis spasial Kotak alat toolbox pengo lahan memiliki fungsi sangat kaya dengan pemrograman API python memungkinkan Anda menambahkan alat alat baru dan kait hooks menyediakan akses ke kemampuan banyak alat analisis populer open source seperti GRASS OTB SAGA dll e Pengolahan Modeller Processing Modeller Salah satu fitur besar dari kerangka pengolahan baru adalah kemampuan untuk menggabungkan alat alat grafis Menggunakan Pengolahan Modeller Anda dapat mem bangun analisis kompleks dari serangkaian kecil modul Anda dapat menyimpan model ini dan kemudian menggunakannya dalam model yang lebih kompleks Mengagumkan daya terintegrasi langsung ke OGIS dan sangat mudah digunakan 5 8 Plugin e Revamped plugin manager Pada QGIS 1 x mengelola plugin dengan dua antarmuka agak membin gungkan satu untuk mengelola plugin terpasang dan satu untuk mengambil plugin python dari repositori Plugin Pada OGIS versi 2 0 kami memperkenalkan baru bersatu pengelola Plugin yang menyediakan one stop shop untuk mengunduh mengaktifkan menonaktifkan dan umumnya mengelola plugin Anda Oh dan antar muka pengguna cantik dengan tab sisi dan mudah untuk mengenali ikon Pilihan Aplikasi dan Proyek Tentukan default proyek startup d
168. an diinterpolasi untuk mengisi node kisi dengan nilai nilai Anda dapat memilih dari berbagai metode interpolasi Utilitas ini juga dijelaskan di situs GDAL http www gdal org gdal grid html Alat untuk menganalisis dan memvisualisasikan DEM Hal ini dapat membuat relief shaded lereng aspek warna relief Indeks Terrain Ketidakrataan Indeks Posisi Topografi dan kekasaran peta dari setiap GDAL didukung elevasi raster Untuk informasi lebih lanjut Anda dapat membaca pada http www gdal org gdaldem html Bermacam macam a Build Virtual Raster Katalog d min Gabung Informasi w Gambaran Build lal Indeks Tile 19 8 Plugin Alat GDAL Program ini membangun VRT Virtual Dataset yang merupakan mosaik dari daftar masukan dataset gdal Lihat juga http www gdal org gdalbuildvrt html Utilitas ini secara otomatis akan mosaik serangkaian gambar Semua gambar harus dalam sistem koordinat yang sama dan memiliki sejumlah pencocokan pita tetapi mereka mungkin tumpang tindih dan pada resolusi yang berbeda Di daerah daerah tumpang tindih gambar terakhir akan disalin lebih dari yang sebelumnya Utilitas ini juga dijelaskan pada http www gdal org gdal merge html Utilitas ini berisi berbagai informasi tentang GDAL didukung dataset raster Lihat juga http www gdal org gdalinfo html Utilitas gdaladdo dapat digunakan untuk membangun atau membangun kembali gambar ikhtisar untuk format berkas yang paling didukung denga
169. an proyek template Dengan OGIS 2 0 Anda dapat menentukan apa OGIS harus lakukan ketika mulai Proyek Baru legacy behaviour dimulai dengan proyek kosong Terbaru ketika Anda mulai OGIS akan memuat proyek terakhir yang Anda ker jakan Spesifik selalu memuat proyek tertentu ketika OGIS dimulai Anda dapat menggunakan direktori proyek template untuk menentukan di mana proyek template Anda harus disimpan Setiap proyek yang Anda simpan di direktori akan tersedia untuk digunakan sebagai template saat Proyek Baru dari menu template System environment variables Lingkungan sistem variabel saat ini dapat dilihat dan banyak konfigurasi dalam dialog pilihan aplikasi Berguna untuk platform seperti Mac di mana aplikasi GUI tidak selalu mewarisi lingkungan pengguna shell Juga berguna untuk mengatur melihat lingkungan variabel untuk set alat eksternal dikendalikan oleh pengolahan kotak alat seperti SAGA GRASS dan untuk mengaktifkan keluaran debugging untuk bagian tertentu dari sumber kode Skala pembesaran user defined Sebuah daftar skala pembesaran kini dapat dikonfigurasi untuk aplikasi dan pilihan override per proyek Daftar ini akan muncul Skala kotak combo dalam jendela utama status bar akses cepat ke skala yang dikenal untuk efisiensi bekerja dengan sumber data saat ini Skala dapat diekspor ke berkas XML yang dapat diimpor ke proyek proyek lain atau aplikasi OGIS lain 5 9 Umum e Quantum GIS sekarang dikenal sebagai Iggl Quantum
170. and activate layer specific features or to open a dialog to set raster properties for the layer Right mouse button menu for raster layers 113 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 e Zoom to layer extent e Zoom to Best Scale 100 e Show in Overview e Remove e Duplicate Set Layer CRS Set Project CRS from Layer Save as Properties Rename Copy Style Add New Group Expand all Collapse all Update Drawing Order 13 2 Raster Properties Dialog To view and set the properties for a raster layer double click on the layer name in the map legend or right click on the layer name and choose Properties from the context menu This will open the Raster Layer Properties dialog see figure raster 1 There are several menus in the dialog General e Style e Transparency e Pyramids e Histogram e Metadata 13 2 1 General Menu Layer Info The General menu displays basic information about the selected raster including the layer source path the display name in the legend which can be modified and the number of columns rows and No Data Values of the raster Coordinate reference system Below you find the coordinate reference system CRS information printed as a PROJ 4 string If this setting is not correct it can be modified by clicking the Specify button QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Layer Properties landcover Rw General General v Layer info ay Style Layer name landcover displayed as landcover
171. ange the style of a layer open the Layer Properties dialog by double clicking on the layer name or by right clicking on the name in the legend and choosing Properties from the popup menu See Section Style Menu for more information on setting symbology of vector layers Tip Load layer and project from mounted external drives on OS X On OS X portable drives that are mounted besides the primary hard drive do not show up under File Open Project as expected We are working on a more OSX native open save dialog to fix this As a workaround you can 64 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 QGIS 2 0 1 Dufour MB BARA NAGA Ve 5 SBS e BPP ARe KAUM wy Layers x v 9 alaska O MS Coordinate 1262229 4638386 Scale 12833418 v 9 Render EPSG 2964 Gambar 12 3 QGIS with Shapefile of Alaska loaded 4b type Volumes in the File name box and press return Then you can navigate to external drives and network mounts Improving Performance for Shapefiles To improve the performance of drawing a shapefile you can create a spatial index A spatial index will improve the speed of both zooming and panning Spatial indexes used by QGIS have a qix extension Use these steps to create the index e Load a shapefile clicking on the 44 Vector Layer toolbar button or type Ctr1 Shifttv e Open the Layer Properties dialog by double clicking on the shapefile n
172. ani sub lapisan ketika sebuah berkas dengan sub lapisan dibuka Anda memiliki pilihan berikut Selalu selalu bertanya jika ada sub lapisan yang ada Jika diperlukan menanyakan apakah lapisan tidak memiliki band namun memiliki sub lapisan Tidak Pernah tidak pernah meminta tidak akan memuat apa apa Muat semua tidak pernah meminta tetapi memuat semua sub lapisan E Abaikan deklarasi encoding shapefile Jika shapefile punya pengkodean informasi ini akan diabaikan oleh QGIS Tambahkan lapisan PostGIS dengan klik ganda dan pilih dalam mode diperpanjang Bab 9 Konfigurasi QGIS QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 C Tambahkan lapisan Oracle with dobel klik dan pilih dalam mode diperpanjang 9 3 4 Menu Rendering Kualitas rendering C Membuat garis tampil kurang bagus dengan mengorbankan beberapa kinerja menggambar A Memperbaiki masalah poligon salah diisi Raster raster dengan RGB band seleksi Anda bisa menetapkan nomor dari band Merah Hijau dan Biru Peningkatan kontras Band abu abu tunggal Sebuah band abu abu tunggal dapat memiliki Tidak ada peregangan Lakukan peregangan untuk MinMax Peregangan dan Klip ke MinMax dan juga Clip ke MinMax band multi warna byte band Tidak ada peregangan Lakukan peregangan untuk MinMax Pere gangan dan Klip ke MinMax dan juga Clip ke MinMax band multi warna gt byte band 1 Tidak ada peregangan
173. ans formasi polinomial affine mempertahankan collinearity dan memungkinkan scaling terjemahan dan rotasi saja Algoritma Thin Plate Spline TPS adalah adalah metode georeferencing yang lebih modern yang mampu memperkenalkan deformasi lokal dalam data Algoritma ini berguna ketika kualitas asli sangat rendah sebagai rujukan geografis Transformasi Proyektif rotasi linear dan terjemahan koordinat Tentukan metode Sampel ulang Jenis resampling Anda memilih kemungkinan akan tergantung pada data masukan Anda dan tujuan akhir dari latihan Jika Anda tidak ingin mengubah statistik dari gambar Anda mungkin ingin memilih Nearest neighbour sedangkan resampling Cubic kemungkinan akan memberikan hasil yang lebih rapi Hal ini dimungkinkan untuk memilih lima metode resampling yang berbeda 1 Nearest neighbour 2 Linear 3 Cubic 234 Bab 19 Plugin QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 4 Cubic Spline 5 Lanczos Tentukan pengaturan transformasi Ada beberapa opsi yang perlu didefinisikan untuk keluaran raster georeferensi e Kotak centang E Buat berkas dunia hanya tersedia jika Anda memutuskan untuk menggunakan jenis transformasi linear karena ini berarti bahwa gambar raster sebenarnya tidak akan berubah Dalam hal ini kolom Keluaran raster tidak diaktifkan karena hanya berkas dunia baru yang akan dibuat e Untuk semua jenis transformasi lain Anda harus mendefinisikan Keluaran raster Sebagai default berkas baru file
174. any model previously saved Model are saved with the mode1 extension If the model has been previously saved from the modeler window you will not be prompted for a filename since there is already a file associated with that model and it will be used Before saving a model you have to enter a name and a group for it using the text boxes in the upper part of the window Models saved on the models folder the default folder when you are prompted for a filename to save the model will appear in the toolbox in the corresponding branch When the toolbox is invoked it searches the models folder for files with model extension and loads the models they contain Since a model is itself an algorithm it can be added to the toolbox just like any other algorithm The models folder can be set from the processing configuration dialog under the Modeler group Models loaded from the models folder appear not only in the toolbox but also in the algorithms tree in the Algorithms tab of the modeler window That means that you can incorporate a model as a part of a bigger model just as you add any other algorithm In some cases a model might not be loaded because not all the algorithms included in its workflow are available If you have used a given algorithm as part of your model it should be available that is it should appear on the toolbox in order to load that model Deactivating an algorithm provider in the processing configuration window renders all
175. apisan yang memiliki toleransi yang ditetapkan Lihat Bagian Setting the Snapping Tolerance and Search Radius Jadi jika Anda ingin mengukur persis sepanjang fitur garis atau sekitar fitur poligon pertama kali atur toleransi snap kemudian pilih lapisan Sekarang ketika menggunakan alat ukur setiap klik tetikus dalam pengaturan toleransi akan merekam snap ke lapisan itu Total 30 195 km HEN ew close Gambar 8 4 Mengukur Area A Gnome pam Mengukur Sudut Anda juga bisa mengukur sudut Kursor menjadi cross shaped Klik untuk menggambar segmen pertama dari sudut yang ingin diukur kemudian memindahkan kursor untuk menggambar sudut yang diinginkan Alat ukur akan ditampilkan dalam dialog pop up 53 9174 degrees Gambar 8 5 Mengukur Sudut A Gnome 8 5 2 Pilih dan lepas fitur Toolbar QGIS menyediakan beberapa alat untuk memilih fitur dalam kanvas peta Untuk memilih satu atau beber apa fitur klik pada EI dan pilih perangkat Anda 8 5 Mengukur 39 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Rg Pilih Fitur Tunggal b E Pilih Fitur dari Rectangle trai AK Pilih Fitur dari Poligon sih o MS Pilih Fitur dari Freehand o XX Pilih Fitur dari Radius Untuk melepas semua fitur yang dipilih klik di 8 6 Dekorasi Lepas fitur dari semua lapisan Dekorasi dari QGIS termask Grid Label Hak Cipta Panah Utara dan Bar Skala Mereka digunakan untuk dekorasi peta dengan menambahkan elemen peta 8 6 1 Kisi Grid EH Grid
176. appear on the edge not at the cursor position therefore it has to be moved if necessary e Deleting vertices After selecting vertices for deletion click the Delete key Note that you cannot use the p Node Tool to delete a complete feature QGIS will ensure it retains the minimum number of vertices for the feature type you are working on To delete a complete feature use the Lg Delete Selected fogl e Moving vertices Select all the vertices you want to move Click on a selected vertex or edge and drag in the direction you wish to move All the selected vertices will move together If snapping is enabled the whole selection can jump to the nearest vertex or line Each change made with the node tool is stored as a separate entry in the undo dialog Remember that all operations support topological editing when this is turned on On the fly projection is also supported and the node tool provides tooltips to identify a vertex by hovering the pointer over it Cutting Copying and Pasting Features Selected features can be cut copied and pasted between layers in the same QGIS project as long as destination layers are set to A Toggle editing beforehand Features can also be pasted to external applications as text That is the features are represented in CSV format with the geometry data appearing in the OGC Well Known Text WKT format However in this version of QGIS text features from outside QGIS cannot be pasted to a layer within QGIS
177. ard 5 For Gisdbase browse and select or enter the path to the newly created folder grassdata 6 You should now be able to select the LOCATION alaska and the MAPSET 1 demo 7 Click OK Notice that some previously disabled tools in the GRASS toolbar are now enabled 8 Click on a Add GRASS raster layer choose the map name gtopo30 and click OK The elevation layer will be visualized 9 Click on vil Add GRASS vector layer choose the map name alaska and click OK The Alaska boundary vector layer will be overlayed on top of the gtopo30 map You can now adapt the layer properties as described in chapter The Vector Properties Dialog e g change opacity fill and outline color 10 Also load the other two vector layers rivers and airports and adapt their properties As you see it is very simple to load GRASS raster and vector layers in QGIS See following sections for editing GRASS data and creating a new LOCATION More sample GRASS LOCATIONs are available at the GRASS website at http grass osgeo org download sample data Tip GRASS Data Loading If you have problems loading data or QGIS terminates abnormally check to make sure you have loaded the GRASS plugin properly as described in section sec starting grass 16 3 GRASS LOCATION and MAPSET GRASS data are stored in a directory referred to as GISDBASE This directory often called grassdata must be created before you start working with the GRASS plugin in QGIS Within this
178. artially on the type of the layer but all types share the following structure In the top left part of the menu there is a preview of the current symbol to be rendered On the right part of the menu there is a list of symbols already defined for the current style prepared to be used via selecting them from the list The current symbol can be modified using the menu on the right side If you click on the first level in the Symbol layers dialog on the left side it s possible to define basic parameters like Size Transparency Color and Rotation Here the layers are joined together More detailed settings can be made when clicking on the second level in the Symbol layers dialog You can define Symbol layers that are combined afterwards A symbol can consist of several Symbol layers The following settings are possible 74 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Layer Properties rivers f Styl General D v Layer rendering vy oie Layer transparency 0 Layer blending mode Normal Feature blending mode Normal Labels deprecated iii Single Symbol Fields G Display Unit Millimeter A snanansnsenan Transparency 096 Width 1 50000 ait Actions Color ee Q Saved styles Symbol layers D Diagrams v w Line ammm J O E a Metadata keri gt wae Marker line Bridlewz Canal Canal ri LeS Crossing Cycle p Dam Ditch Drain Floodwa Footpatl Jetty DD oa amp C
179. aster itu sendiri kadang kadang memberikan salib dengan koordinat written pada gambar Dalam hal ini Anda dapat memasukkan koordinat secara manual e Menggunakan lapisan sudah bergeoreferensi hal ini dapat berupa data vektor atau raster yang berisi benda benda yang sama fitur yang Anda miliki pada gambar yang ingin Anda Georeferensi dan proyeksi Dalam hal ini Anda dapat memasukkan koordinat dengan mengklik pada dataset referensi dimuat dalam kanvas peta QGIS Prosedur yang biasa untuk Georeferensi gambar memilih beberapa poin pada raster menentukan koordinat mere ka dan memilih jenis transformasi yang relevan Berdasarkan parameter masukan dan data plugin akan menghi tung parameter berkas dunia Semakin banyak titik koordinat Anda berikan akan semakin baik hasilnya Langkah pertama untuk memulai QGIS memuat Plugin Georeferencer lihat Bagian Memuat OGIS Plugin Inti dan klik pada ikon Th Georeferencer vang muncul di toolbar menu QGIS Dialog Plugin Georeferencer muncul seperti dalam gambar figure georeferencer 1 Untuk contoh ini kita menggunakan toposheet South Dakota dari SDGS Hal ini nantinya dapat divisualisas ikan bersama dengan data dari lokasi GRASS spearfish60 Anda dapat menngunduh toposheet di sini http grass osgeo org sampledata spearfish_toposheet tar gz Memasukkan titik titik kontrol lapangan GCPs a 1 Untuk memulai georeferensi sebuah raster rintisan kita harus memuat dengan menggunakan tombol 5 Ras
180. attribute table of the target vector layer here As a result all information of the join layer and the target layer are displayed in the attribute table of the target layer as joined information QGIS currently supports to join non spatial table formats supported by OGR e g CSV DBF and Excel delimited text and the PostgreSQL provider see figure joins 1 Rr General ay Style Join layer Join field Target field a ues Labels deprecated Join layer regions Join field NAME 1 9 Display Target field NAME a Oo Actions Cache join layer in virtual memory K Joins Create attribute index on join field f Diagrams Cancel OK Metadata gt Restore Default Style Save As Default Load Style Save Style v Help Apply Cancel OK Gambar 12 27 Join an attribute table to an existing vector layer 9 Additionally the add vector join dialog allows to g Cache join layer in virtual memory g Create attribute index on the join field 12 2 The Vector Properties Dialog 91 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 12 2 8 Diagrams Menu lie The Diagrams menu allows you to add a graphic overlay to a vector layer see figure diagrams The current core implementation of diagrams provides support for piecharts text diagrams and histograms The menu is divided into four tabs now Appearance Size Postion and Options In the case of the text diagram and piechart text values of different data columns are d
181. ault file format for that output type will be used and its corresponding extension appended to the given filepath Unlike when an algorithm is executed from the toolbox outputs are not added to the map canvas if you execute that same algorithm from the Python Console If you want to add an output to it you have to do it yourself after running the algorithm To do so you can use QGIS API commands or even easier use one of the handy methods provided for such task The runalg method returns a dictionary with the output names the ones shown in the algorithm description as keys and the filepaths of those outputs as values You can load those layers by passing its filepath to the load method 17 5 2 Additional functions for handling data Apart from the functions used to call algorithms importing the processing package will also import some additional functions that make it easier to work with data particularly vector data They are just convenience functions that wrap some functionality from the QGIS API usually with a less complex syntax These functions should be used when developing new algorithms as they make it easier to operate with input data Below is a list of some of this commands More information can be found in the classes under the processing tools package and aso in the example scripts provided with QGIS e getobject obj Returns a QGIS object a layer or table from the passed object which can be a filename or the nam
182. ay P Symbol Change Color ramp i Color Brewer Accent 8 gih actions j Symbol 4 Value Label ef Joins Kobuk River Kobuk River Koyukuk River Koyukuk River JW Diagrams Kuskokwim River Kuskokwim River MPEP ae neuer Fluss neuer Fluss Noatak River Noatak River Porcupine River Porcupine River Susitna River Susitna River Classify Add Delete Delete all Advanced v Restore Default Style Save As Default Load Style Save Style v Help Apply Cancel LOK Gambar 12 8 Categorized Symbolizing options You can create a custom color ramp choosing New color ramp from the Color ramp dropdown menu A dialog will prompt for the ramp type Gradient Random ColorBrewer and cpt city The first three have options for number of steps and or multiple stops in the color ramp See figure_symbology_3 for an example of custom color ramp and figure_symbology_3a for the cpt city dialog Gradient color ramp Color 1 change Color 2 change Type Continuous 3 amp Multiple stops Color Offset 26 v Add stop D 0000fF 25 E 55fF00 50 REMOVE stop E ffffO0 75 Preview Gambar 12 9 Example of custom gradient color ramp with multiple stops 8 The cpt city option opens a new dialog with hundreds of themes included out of the box Graduated Renderer The Graduated Renderer is used to render all the features from a layer using a single user defined symbol whose color reflects th
183. ayer Settings Plugins Vecto Database Help DARAD CHALE RARS e PERAI PA BAN Layers gt MH 5 lakes Y E E landcover S Coordinate 1861491 4358176 Scale 4000000 9 MH Render EPSG 2964 A Gambar 7 1 GUI QGIS dengan contoh data Alaska Catatan Jendela dekorasi Anda judul bar dll dapat terlihat berbeda tergantung pada sistem operasi dan window manager Anda GUI QGIS dibagi dalam lima area 1 Bar Menu 2 Bar Tool 3 Legenda Peta 23 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 4 Tampilan Peta 5 Status Bar Kelima komponen antarmuka QGIS dijelaskan secara lebih rinci dalam bagian berikut Lebih dari dua bagian dijelaskan di shortcut papan ketik dan bantuan 7 1 Bar Menu Menu bar memberikan akses ke berbagai fitur QGIS menggunakan standar hirarki menu Menu menu utama dan ringkasan dari beberapa menu pilihan yang tercantum di bawah ini bersama sama dengan ikon dari alat yang sesuai seperti yang ditampilkan pada toolbar seperti shortcut papan ketik Shortcut papan ketik juga dapat dikon figurasi secara manual shortcut yang disajikan dalam bagian ini adalah standar menggunakan alat Konfigurasi Shortcut dalam menu Pengaturan Meskipun sebagian besar pilihan menu memiliki alat yang sesuai dan sebaliknya menu tidak terorganisir seperti toolbar Toolbar yang berisi alat ini bisa terdaftar setelah setiap pilihan menu diisi pada kotak centang Beberapa pilihan menu hanya muncul jika plugin yang sesuai dimuat Untuk infor
184. basis so it may well be that a given layers statistics have not yet been collected 13 2 Raster Properties Dialog 119 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 13 3 Raster Calculator The Raster Calculator in the Raster menu see figure raster 2 allows to perform calculations on basis of existing raster pixel values The results are written to a new raster layer with a GDAL supported format Raster calculator Raster bands Result layer elevation 1 Output layer home alex elevation_feet tif m landcover 1 Current layer extent X min 7117600 00000 XMax 4897040 00000 Y min 1367760 00000 Y max 7809680 00000 Columns 3663 Rows 1964 gt Output format GeoTIFF amp Add result to project Operators sqrt sin A acos cos asin tan atan lt gt lt gt AND OR Raster calculator expression elevation 1 gt 0 elevation 1 3 28 Expression valid Cancel OK Gambar 13 6 Raster Calculator Fa The Raster bands list contains all loaded raster layers that can be used To add a raster to the raster calculator expression field double click its name in the Fields list You can then use the operators to construct calculation expressions or you can just type it into the box In the Result layer section you have to define an output layer You can then define the extent of the calculation area based on an input raster layer or based on X Y coordinates and on Columns and Rows to set the resolution of the output layer If the input lay
185. big of a tolerance QGIS may snap to the wrong vertex especially if you are dealing with a large number of vertices in close proximity Set search radius too small and it won t find anything to move The search radius for vertex edits in layer units can be defined in the Digitizing tab under Settings NN Options The same place where you define the general project wide snapping tolerance 12 3 2 Zooming and Panning Before editing a layer you should zoom in to your area of interest This avoids waiting while all the vertex markers are rendered across the entire layer Apart from using the O pan and z00m n ge zoom out icons on the toolbar with the mouse navigating can also be done with the mouse wheel spacebar and the arrow keys Zooming and panning with the mouse wheel While digitizing you can press the mouse wheel to pan inside of the main window and you can roll the mouse wheel to zoom in and out on the map For zooming place the mouse cursor inside the map area and roll it forward away from you to zoom in and backwards towards you to zoom out The mouse cursor position will be the center of the zoomed area of interest You can customize the behavior of the mouse wheel zoom using the Map tools tab under the Settings gt Options menu Panning with the arrow keys Panning the map during digitizing is possible with the arrow keys Place the mouse cursor inside the map area and click on the right arrow key to pan ea
186. box Trabalho QGIS qgis_sample_data shapefiles airports shp Geometry type of the features in this layer Point The number of features in this layer 76 Editing capabilities of this layer Add Features Delete Features Change Attribute Values Add Attributes Delete Attributes Create Spatial Index Fast Gambar 11 1 Penjelajah OGIS merupakan aplikasi standalone 4b Menggunakan penjelajah QGIS untuk menampilkan data Anda Fungsi geser dan taruh membuatnya mudah untuk menempatkan data Anda ke tampilan peta dan legenda peta l NI N a A WW N Mengaktifkan penjelajah QGIS Klik kanan pada toolbar dan klik M peramban atau pilih dari Pengaturan Panel Geser panel kedalam jendela legenda Klik pada tab Peramban with Projections Jelajahi dalam basisdata Anda dan pilih folder shapefile dari ggis sample data Tekan tombol Shift dan klik pada airports shp dan alaska shp Tekan tombol kiri tetikus kemudian geser dan tempatkan berkas ke dalam kanvas peta Klik kanan pada lapisan dan pilih Atur CRS proyek dari lapisan Untuk informasi lebih lanjut lihat Working Klik pada pe Perbesar Full agar lapisan lapisan terlihat 61 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Ada peramban kedua yang tersedia di Settings Panel Fungsi tambahan seperti aman MA an n d Saring Berkas fungsi disisipkan 1 Mengaktifkan penjelajah OGIS kedua Klik kanan pada toolbar dan klik E peramban 2 2 Geser panel kedalam jendela legenda 3 Ar
187. by adding a file chooser dialog e Value map a combo box with predefined items The value is stored in the attribute the description is shown in the combo box You can define values manually or load them from a layer or a CSV file e Enumeration Opens a combo box with values that can be used within the columns type This is currently only supported by the postgres provider e Immutable The immutable attribute column is read only The user is not able to modify the content e Hidden A hidden attribute column is invisible The user is not able to see its content e Checkbox Displays a checkbox and you can define what attribute is added to the column when the check box is activated or not Text edit This opens a text edit field that allows multiple lines to be used e Calendar Opens a calendar widget to enter a date Column type must be text e Value Relation Offers values from a related table in a combobox You can select layer key column and value column e UUID Generator Generates a read only UUID Universally Unique Identifiers field if empty e Photo Field contains a filename for a picture The width and height of the field can be defined e Webview Field contains an URL The width and height of the field is variable e Color A field which allows to enter color codes During data entry the color is visible through a color bar included in the field With the Attribute editor layout you can now define builtin forms for da
188. c Info Binary Coverage Navigate to the directory that contains the coverage files and select it Similarly you can load directory based vector files in the UK National Transfer Format as well as the raw TIGER Format of the US Census Bureau 12 1 4 Loading OpenStreetMap Vectors QGIS integrates Openstreetmap import as a core functionnality e To connect to the OSM server and download data open the menu Vector Openstreetmap Load data You can skip this step if you already got a osm XML file using josm or overpass or any other source e The menu Vector Openstreetmap Import topology from an XML file will convert your osm file into a spatialite database and create a db connection e The menu Vector Openstreetmap Export topology to Spatialite then allows you to open the database connection select the type of data you want points lines or polygons and choose tags to import This cre ates a spatialite geometry layer that you can then add to your project by clicking on the Pa aa ya toolbar button or by selecting the 4 Add SpatiaLite Layer option from the Layer menu see Section SpatiaLite Layers 12 1 5 PostGIS Layers PostGIS layers are stored in a PostgreSOL database The advantages of PostGIS are the spatial indexing filter ing and guery capabilities it provides Using PostGIS vector functions such as select and identify work more accurately than with OGR layers in OGIS Creating a stored Connection
189. cation of hotspots and clustering of points 19 14 1 Activate the Heatmap plugin First this core plugin needs to be activated using the Plugin Manager see Section Memuat QGIS Plugin Inti O After activation the heatmap icon can be found in the Raster Toolbar and under the Raster gt Heatmap menu Select the menu View Toolbars Raster to show the Raster Toolbar if it is not visible 19 14 2 Using the Heatmap plugin Clicking the Heatmap toolbutton opens the Heatmap plugin dialog see figure heatmap 2 The dialog has the following options e Input point layer lists all the vector point layers in the current project and is used to select the layer to be analysed Output raster use the button to select the folder and file name for the output raster the Heatmap plugin generates A file extension is not required e Output format selects the output format Although all formats supported by GDAL can be choosen in most cases GeoTIFF is the best format to choose e Radius used to specify the heatmap search radius or kernel bandwidth in meters or map units The radius specifies the distance around a point at which the influence of the point will be felt Larger values result in greater smoothing but smaller values may show finer details and variation in point density When the C Advanced checkbox is checked additional options will be available e Rows and Columns used to change the dimensions of the outpu
190. ce if you have used this declaration average output number the following line will set the value of the output to 5 average 5 In addition to the tags for parameters and outputs you can also define the group under which the algorithm will be shown using the group tag If you algorithm takes a long time to process it is a good idea to inform the user You have a global named progress available with two available methods set Text text and setPercentage percent to modify the progress text and the progress bar Several examples are provided Please check them to see real examples of how to create algorithms using the processing framework classes You can right click on any script algorithm and select Edit script to edit its code or just to see it 17 5 4 Documenting your scripts As in the case of models you can create additional documentation for your script to explain what they do and how to use them In the script editing dialog you will find a Edit script help button Click on it and it will take you to the help editing dialog Check the chapter about the graphical modeler to know more about this dialog and how to use it Help files are saved in the same folder as the script itself adding the help extension to the filename Notice that you can edit your script s help before saving it for the first time If you later close the script editing dialog without 178 Bab 17 QGIS kerangka pengolahan QGIS User Guide R
191. cement uj is amp amp amp gt trails i aaa J Rendering Size 11 0000 JE cape romanzof Irrs st mary a gt railroads points JR Si v MA Boundaries Group E E gt amp regions e v amp alaska Transparency om Di v BO water Group mekoryuk ae Type case All lowercase amp e majrivers Spacing letter 0 0000 J v MO lakes word 0 0000 al a amp swamp Blend mode Normal ai E Lay Brow Browser Apply Cancel a Scale 4978991 v y M Render 5 MS Coordinate 2647227 5127696 Gambar 12 14 Smart labeling of vector point layers Also the Shadow menu has the same entries as described in section labeling_point_layers In the Placement menu you find special settings for line layers The label can be placed Parallel Curved or Horizontal With the 2 Parallel and Curved option come the following settings You can define the position C Above line A On line and C Below line It s possible to select several options at once QGIS will look for the optimal position of the label then Remember that here you can also use the line orientation for the position of the label Additionally you can define a Maximum angle between curved characters when selecting the Curved option see Figure labels 2 The Rendering menu has nearly the same entries as for point layers In the Feature options you can now Suppress labeling of features smaller than Layer labeling se
192. click on Save selection as to define the name of the output file its format and CRS see Section Legenda Peta It is also possible to specify OGR creation options within the dialog Working with non spatial attribute tables QGIS allows also to load non spatial tables This includes currently tables supported by OGR delimited text as well as the PostgreSQL MSSQL and Oracle provider The tables can be used for field lookups or just generally browsed and edited using the table view When you load the table you will see it in the legend field It can be opened e g with the E Open Attribute Table too and is then editable like any other layer attribute table As an example you can use columns of the non spatial table to define attribute values or a range of values that are allowed to be added to a specific vector layer during digitizing Have a closer look at the edit widget in section Fields Menu to find out more 106 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 12 4 Query Builder The Query Builder allows you to define a subset of a table using a SQL like WHERE clause and display the result in the main window The query result then can be saved as a new vector layer 12 4 1 Query Open the Query Builder by opening the Layer Properties and go to the General menu Under Feature subset click on the Query Builder button to open the Query builder For example if you have a regions layer witha TYPE 2 field you could
193. contain algorithms directly coded as part of the processing plugin not relying on any additional software This view is recommended to those users that have a certain knowledge of the applications that are backing those algorithms since they will be shown with their original names and groups Also some additional algorithms are available only in the advanced view such as LiDAR tools or scripts based on the R statistical computing software among others Independent QGIS plugins that add new algorithms to the toolbox will only be shown in the advanced view In particular the simplified view contains algorithms from the following providers e GRASS e SAGA e OTB e Native QGIS algorithms 17 2 The toolbox 159 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Processing Toolbox __ _ x Recently used algorithms dn GDAL OGR 21 geoalgorithms yw GRASS commands 155 geoalgorithms GeoServer PostGIS tools 8 geoalgorithms QGIS geoalgorithms 67 geoalgorithms SAGA 252 geoalgorithms Scripts 10 geoalgorithms X Tools for LIDAR data 42 geoalgorithms 4i Models 8 geoalgorithms Orfeo Toolbox Image analysis 76 geoalgorithms Gambar 17 6 Processing Toolbox advanced mode 7 In the particular case of running QGIS under Windows these algorithms are fully functional in a fresh installation of QGIS and they can be run without requiring any additional installation Also running them requires no prior knowledge of the external app
194. cted document and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document 7 AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium is called an aggregate if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation s users beyond what the individual works permit When the Document is included in an aggregate this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate the Document s Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate 8 TRANSLATION Translation is considered a kind of modification so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4 Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections You may include
195. ctly in the text box or select it from the CRS selection dialog that appear when you click on the button on the right hand size e A extent to be entered by four number representing its xmin xmax ymin ymax limits Clicking on the button on the right hand side of the value selector a pop up menu will appear giving you two option to select the value from a layer or the current canvas extent or to define it by dragging directly onto the map canvas X Use layer canvas extent Select extent on canvas Gambar 17 10 Extent selector 7 If you select the first option you will see a window like the next one U Select extent extent from Gambar 17 11 Extent List 2 If you select the second one the parameters window will hide itself so you can click and drag onto the canvas Once you have defined the selected rectangle the dialog will reappear containing the values in the extent text box Gambar 17 12 Extent Drag e A list of elements whether raster layers vector ones or tables to select from the list of the ones available in QGIS To make the selection click on the small button on the left side of the corresponding row to see a dialog like the following one e A small table to be edited by the user These are used to define parameters like lookup tables or convolution Kernels among others 162 Bab 17 QGIS kerangka pengolahan QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 G Multiple selection
196. d install the dataset on your computer Contoh data L 2A 12 15 Start OGIS and make sure the GRASS plugin is loaded Visualize the alaska shp shapefile see Section vector load shapefile from the QGIS alaska dataset Contoh data In the GRASS toolbar click on the Bh New mapset icon to bring up the MAPSET wizard Select an existing GRASS database GISDBASE folder grassdata or create one for the new LOCATION using a file manager on your computer Then click Next We can use this wizard to create a new MAPSET within an existing LOCATION see section Adding a new MAPSET or to create a new LOCATION altogether Select Create new location see fig ure_grass_location_2 Enter a name for the LOCATION we used alaska and click Next Define the projection by clicking on the radio button X2 Projection to enable the projection list We are using Albers Equal Area Alaska feet projection Since we happen to know that it is represented by the EPSG ID 2964 we enter it in the search box Note If you want to repeat this process for another KLM CRS Status LOCATION and projection and haven t memorized the EPSG ID click on the icon in the lower right hand corner of the status bar see Section Working with Projections In Filter insert 2964 to select the projection 10 11 Click Next To define the default region we have to enter the LOCATION bounds in north south east and west direc
197. d special symbolizing tools that were designed for the different kinds of vector data Layer rendering e Layer transparency you can make the underlying layer in the map canvas visible with this tool Use the slider to adapt the visibility of your vector layer to your needs You can also make a precise definition of the percentage of visibility in the the menu beside the slider e Layer blending mode you can achieve special rendering effects with these tools that you previously only know from graphics programs The pixels of your overlaying and underlaying layers are mixed through the settings described below Normal This is the standard blend mode which uses the alpha channel of the top pixel to blend with the Pixel beneath it the colors aren t mixed Lighten It selects the maximum of each component from the foreground and background pixels Be aware that the results tend to be jagged and harsh Screen Light pixels from the source are painted over the destination while dark pixels are not This mode is most useful for mixing the texture of one layer with another layer E g you can use a hillshade to texture another layer 12 2 The Vector Properties Dialog 73 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Dodge Dodge will brighten and saturate underlying pixels based on the lightness of the top pixel So brighter top pixels cause the saturation and brightness of the underlying pixels to increase This works best if the top pi
198. d way The concept is to use a coverage layer which contains geometries and fields For each geometry in the coverage layer a new output will be generated where the content of some canvas maps will be moved to highlight the current geometry Fields associated to this geometry can be used within text labels There can only be one atlas map by print composer but this one can contain multiple pages Every pages will be generated with each feature To enable the generation of an atlas and access generation parameters refer to the Atlas generation tab This tab contains the following widgets see Figure_composer_29 e A A Generate an atlas enables or disables the atlas generation 18 5 Atlas generation 207 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Atlas generation gg M Generate an atlas v Configuration Composer map Map 0 Coverage layer airports w Visibility Hidden coverage layer w Feature sorting Sort by w Feature filtering Filter with v Scaling Fixed scale w Output Output Filename expression output Sfeature Single file export when possible Gambar 18 29 Atlas generation tab 4b A combobox Composer map that allows to choose which map item will be used as the atlas map 1 e on which map geometries from the coverage layer will be iterated over and displayed A combobox Coverage layer that allows to choose the vector layer containing the geometries on which to iterate over An optional a Hidden c
199. d you can decide if you want to enable symbol levels or use only first matched rule The example in figure_symbology_5 shows the rule based rendering dialog for the rivers layer of the QGIS sample dataset To create a rule activate an existing row by clicking on it or click on and click on the new rule Then press the Edit rule button In the Rule properties dialog you can define a label for the rule Press the button to open the Expression builder In the Function List click on Fields and Values to view all attributes of the attribute table to be searched To add an attribute to the Field calculator Expression field double click its name in the Fields and Values list Generally you can use the various fields values and functions to construct the calculation expression or you can just type it into the box see Field Calculator Layer Properties majrivers Style Rr General v Layer rendering style Layer transparency 0 bel Labels r Layer blending mode Normal Feature blending mode Normal Labels deprecated Rule based Fields Label Rule Min scale Max scale Count Duplicate count Ga Display me Length 2 2000 LENGTH lt 2000 2466 0 fe Length lt 2000 LENGTH gt 2000 2888 0 SO Actions 9 ef Joins E Diagrams Metadata A amp Refine current rules v Count features Rendering order Restore Default Style Save As Default Load Style Save Style v Help Apply Cancel OK Gambar 1
200. dak berhubungan dengan peta Item ini bisa dipindahkan dengan posisi peta geser penanda peta atau hanya dengan memindahkan balon Ikon adalah bagian dari tema GIS dan digunakan secara default dalam tema tema lain juga Alat E Pindah Anotasi memungkinkan memindah anotas pada kanvas peta 8 7 1 Anotasi HTML Alat Anotasi Html dalam toolbar atribut memberikan kemungkinan untuk menempatkan isi berkas HTML dalam balon pada kanvas Peta OGIS Gunakan alat Anotasi Html dan klik kedalam kanvas peta dan menambahkan path 42 Bab 8 Peralatan Umum QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Annotation text Ubuntu 7 11 Ii RAN ANA QGIS rocks Fixed map position Frame width 1 00 ni Background color Frame color LI Delete Cancel OK Gambar 8 10 Dialog teks anotasi ke berkas html ke dalam dialog 8 7 2 Anotasi SVG Alat ty Anotasi SVG dalam toolbar atribut memberikan kemungkinan untuk menempatkan simbol SVG dalam balon pada kanvas Peta OGIS Gunakan alat Anotasi SVG dan klik kedalam kanvas peta dan menambahkan path ke berkas SVG ke dalam dialog 8 7 3 Form anotasi Selain itu Anda juga dapat membuat form anotasi Anda sendiri Alat Form Anotasi inj berguna untuk menampilkan atribut dari lapisan vektor dalam form desainer gt disesuaikan lihat figure custom annotation Hal ini mirip dengan form desainer alat Identifikasi fitur tetapi ditampilkan dalam item anotasi Lihat juga blog OGIS http blog qgis org node 14
201. de Once the layer is in edit mode markers will appear at the vertices and additional tool buttons on the editing toolbar will become available Tip Save Regularly Remember to i Save Layer Edits regularly This will also check that your data source can accept all the changes 96 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Adding Features oo 4 Ya aa You can use the g Add Feature Add TEAME Or Add Feature icons on the toolbar to put the QGIS cursor into digitizing mode For each feature you first digitize the geometry then enter its attributes To digitize the geometry left click on the map area to create the first point of your new feature For lines and polygons keep on left clicking for each additional point you wish to capture When you have finished adding points right click anywhere on the map area to confirm you have finished entering the geometry of that feature The attribute window will appear allowing you to enter the information for the new feature Figure_edit_2 shows setting attributes for a fictitious new river in Alaska In the Digitizing menu under the Settings Options menu you can also activate C Suppress attributes pop up windows after each created feature C Reuse last entered attribute values Attributes rivers F CODEDESC NULL NAM MyNewRiver F_CODE NewShinyCode here Cancel ok OK Gambar 12 32 Enter Attribute Values Dialog after digitizing a new vector f
202. de of the canvas There are 4 possible screens in this GPS tracking window f GPS position coordinates and for manually entering Vertices and Features hn GPS signal strength of satellite connections e 2S GPS polar screen showing number and polar position of satellites e R GPS options screen see figure gps options With a plugged in GPS receiver has to be supported by your operating system a simple click on Connect con nects the GPS to QGIS A second click now on Disconnect disconnects the GPS receiver from your computer For GNU Linux gpsd support is integrated to support connection to most GPS receivers Therefore you first have to configure gpsd properly to connect OGIS to it Peringatan If you want to record your position to the canvas you have to create a new vector layer first and switch it to editable status to be able to record your track 15 2 1 Position and additional attributes J If the GPS is receiving signals from satellites you will see your position in latitude longitude and altitude together with additional attributes GPS Information o x amp PI am GE Connect Latitude Longitude Altitude Time of fix Speed Direction HDOP VDOP PDOP H accurancy V accurancy Mode Dimensions Ouality Status Satellites Gambar 15 3 GPS tracking position and additional attributes 136 Bab 15 Pekerjaan dengan Data GPS QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 15 2 2 GPS signal
203. difying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this
204. dinat dan memilih CRS berbeda dari yang Anda pilih di atas 5 Untuk mulai mengambil koordinat klik pada Mulai ambil Sekarang Anda dapat mengklik di mana saja di kanvas peta dan plugin akan menampilkan koordinat untuk kedua CRS yang Anda pilih Xx 6 Untuk mengaktifkan tetikus pelacak koordinat klik ikon YO pelacak tetikus 7 Anda juga bisa menyalin koordinat yang dipilih ke papanklip 19 4 Plugin Pengelola DB Plugin Pengelola DB resmi bagian dari inti OGIS dan bermaksud untuk menggantikan Plugin SPIT dan tambahan untuk mengintegrasikan semua format basisdata lain yang didukung oleh OGIS dalam satu antarmuka penggu na Plugin GJ Manajer DB menyediakan beberapa fitur Anda dapat menggeser lapisan dari Penjelajah QGIS ke Pengelola DB dan akan mengimpor lapisan Anda ke dalam basisdata spasial Anda Anda dapat menggeser dan menempatkan tabel antar basisdata spasial dan mereka akan diimpor Anda juga dapat menggunakan Pengelola DB untuk mengeksekusi guery SOL terhadap basisdata spasial Anda dan kemudian melihat keluaran spasial untuk gueries dengan menambahkan hasilnya ke OGIS sebagai lapisan guery Menu Basisdata memungkinkan untuk terhubung ke basisdata yang sudah ada untuk memulai SOL Window dan untuk keluar dari Plugin Pengeloa DB Satu Anda terhubung ke basisdata yang sudah ada menu Skema dan Tabel tambahan muncul Menu Skema termasuk alat untuk membuat dan menghapus kosong skema dan jika topologi tersedia seperti PostGIS 2 un
205. dingBox or the CRS 84 BoundingBox Available in CRS The projections that this layer can be rendered in by the WMS server These are listed in the WMS native format Available in style The image styles that this layer can be rendered in by the WMS server WMS Client Limitations Not all possible WMS Client functionality had been included in this version of QGIS Some of the more notable exceptions follow Editing WMS Layer Settings Once you ve completed the oe Add WMS layer procedure there is no ability to change the settings A workaround is to delete the layer completely and start again WMS Servers Requiring Authentication Currently public accessible and secured WMS services are supported The secured WMS servers can be accessed by public authentication You can add the optional credentials when you add a WMS server See section Select ing WMS WMTS Servers for details Tip Accessing secured OGC layers If you need to access secured layers with other secured methods than basic authentication you could use InteProxy as a transparent proxy which does support several authentication methods More information can be found at the InteProxy manual found on the website http inteproxy wald intevation org Tip Iggl WMS Mapserver From Version 1 7 0 QGIS has its own implementation of a WMS 1 3 0 Mapserver Read more about this at chapter OGIS as OGC Data Server 14 1 2 WCS Client A Web Coverage Service WCS
206. directory the GRASS GIS data are organized by projects stored in subdirectories called LOCATION Each LOCATION is defined by its coordinate system map projection and geographical boundaries Each LOCATION can have several MAPSETs subdirectories of the LOCATION that are used to subdivide the project into different topics subregions or as workspaces for individual team members Neteler amp Mitasova 2008 Literatur dan Referensi Web In order to analyze vector and raster layers with GRASS modules you must import them into a GRASS LOCATION This is not strictly true with the GRASS modules r external and v external you can create read only links to external GDAL OGR supported data sets without importing them But because this is not the usual way for beginners to work with GRASS this functionality will not be described here 16 3 1 Creating a new GRASS LOCATION As an example here is how the sample GRASS LOCATION alaska which is projected in Albers Equal Area projection with unit feet was created for the QGIS sample dataset This sample GRASS LOCATION alaska 1440 Bab 16 GRASS GIS Integration QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 GRASS Database LOCATION MAPSET Geometry and attribute data Heen Hren icellhd Raster layers fhome userngrassdata _ Vector layers Gambar 16 1 GRASS data in the alaska LOCATION will be used for all examples and exercises in the following GRASS GIS related chapters It is useful to download an
207. e e Gauss e Cubic e Mode e None If you choose Internal if possible from the Overview format menu QGIS tries to build pyramids internally You can also choose External and External Erdas Imagine Please note that building pyramids may alter the original data file and once created they cannot be removed If you wish to preserve a non pyramided version of your raster make a backup copy prior to building pyramids 13 2 5 Histogram Menu The Histogram menu allows you to view the distribution of the bands or colors in your raster It is generated automatically when you open the Histogram menu All existing bands will be displayed together You can save the histogram as an image with the button With the Visibility option in the amp Prefs Actions menu you can display histograms of the individual bands You will need to select the option Show selected band The Min max options allow you to Always show min max markers to Zoom to min max and to Update style to min max With the Actions option you can Reset and Recompute histogram after you have chosen the Min max options 13 2 6 Metadata Menu The Metadata menu displays a wealth of information about the raster layer including statistics about each band in the current raster layer From this menu entries are made for the Description Attribution MetadataUrl and Properties In Properties statistics are gathered on a need to know
208. e if you have a point layer containing locations of images or photos along with a file name you could create an action to launch a viewer to display the image You could also use actions to launch web based reports for an attribute field or combination of fields specifying them in the same way we did in our Google search example We can also make more complex examples for instance on how to use Python actions Usually when we create an action to open a file with an external application we can use absolute paths or even tually relative paths in the second case the path is relative to the location of the external program executable file But what about we need to use relative paths relative to the selected layer a file based one like a shapefile or spatialite The following code will do the trick command firefox imagerelpath images_test test_image jpg layer ggis utils iface activeLayer import os path layerpath layer source if layer providerType ogr else ggis core OgsDataSourceURI layer source database if layer providerType spatialite else None path os path dirname str layerpath image os path join path imagerelpath import subprocess subprocess Popen command image we have to just remember that the action is one of type Python and to change the command and imagerelpath variables to fit our needs 90 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Ril
209. e GPS Tools dialog see Figure GPS 2 Here we select the type of GPS device the port that it is connected to or usb if your GPS supports this the feature type that you want to download the GPX file where the data should be stored and the name of the new layer The device type you select in the GPS device menu determines how GPSBabel tries to communicate with your GPS device If none of the available types work with your GPS device you can create a new type see section Defining new device types The port may be a file name or some other name that your operating system uses as a reference to the physical port in your computer that the GPS device is connected to It may also be simply usb for usb enabled GPS units 9 On Linux this is something like dev ttyS0 or dev ttyS1 e On Windows it is COM1 or COM2 When you click OK the data will be downloaded from the device and appear as a layer in QGIS 134 Bab 15 Pekerjaan dengan Data GPS QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 e GPS Tools DR Load GPXfile Importotherfile Download from GPS Uploadto GPS GPX Conver 4 GPS device Garmin serial 7 Edit devices Port local gpsd g Fefresh Feature type Waypoints ig Output file ihomerd assau qgis_s ample data gps downloaded gpx Save As Help Cancel Gambar 15 2 The download tool 15 1 6 Uploading GPS data to a device You can also upload data directly from a vector layer in QGIS to a GPS device using the Upload to
210. e classification of a selected feature s attribute to a class Like Categorized Renderer it allows to define rotation and size scale from specified columns 76 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 cpt city color ramp Selections by theme All by author Name All Ramps 592 All Ramps E E HE D E E H Bathymetry dkbluered summer cbacBrBG cbacBrBG11 Blues Discord gt Diverging gt Greens cbacPiYG cbacPRGn cbacPuOr cbacRdBu Greys 1 gt QGIS Precipitation gt Reds cbacRdGy cbacRdYIBu cbacRdYIGn cbacSpectral Temperature Topography Topography bathymetry Top of the cpt palettes cbcBrBG c3t1 c3t3 garish14 Top of the svg palettes Transparency Selection and preview Information v Palette Path License Save as standard gradient Help Cancel OK Gambar 12 10 cpt city dialog with hundreds of color ramps Layer Properties majrivers RK General _ v Layer rendering v ae Layer transparency 0 SAN Layer blending mode Normal Feature blending mode Normal 2 Labels deprecated amp Graduated G2 Display Column LENGTH A y Symbol Change Classes 5 ro Actions Color ramp MiRdvian s Mode Equal Interval i eG Joins Symbol Value Label a Diagrams 0 0000 15240 8438 0 0000 15240 8438 15240 8438 30481 6876 15240 8438 30481 6876 Metadata 30481 6876 45
211. e of the object in the QGIS Table of Contents e values layer fields Returns the values in the attributes table of a vector layer for the passed fields Fields can be passed as field names or as zero based field indices Returns a dict of lists with the passed field identifiers as keys It considers the existing selection getfeatures layer Returns an iterator over the features of a vector layer considering the existing selection e uniquelabels layer field Returns a list of unique values for a given attribute Attribute can be passed as a field name or a zero based field index It considers the existing selection 176 Bab 17 QGIS kerangka pengolahan QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 17 5 3 Creating scripts and running them from the toolbox You can create your own algorithms by writing the corresponding Python code and adding a few extra lines to supply additional information needed to define the semantics of the algorithm You can find a Create new script menu under the Tools group in the Script algorithms block of the toolbox Double click on it to open the script edition dialog That s where you should type your code Saving the script from there in the scripts folder the default one when you open the save file dialog with py extension will automatically create the corresponding algorithm The name of the algorithm the one you will see in the toolbox is created from the filename removing its extension and replacing low hyph
212. eating a vector layer from a Microsoft Excel Worksheet 222 Bab 19 Plugin QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Database Connection Predefined Queries Database Connection SQL Query SELECT FROM airports Output Console gt polygons gt idx_polygons_geometry gt idx_polygons_geometry_node gt idx_polygons_geometry_rowid amp gt idx_polygons_geometry_parent gt regions gt airports Help O x Gambar 19 10 The eVis SQL query tab When creating a vector layer from a Microsoft Excel Worksheet you might see that unwanted zeros 0 have been inserted in the attribute table rows beneath valid data This can be caused by deleting the values for these cells in Excel using the Backspace key To correct this problem you need to open the Excel file you ll need to close QGIS if there if you are connected to the file to allow you to edit the file and then use Edit Delete to remove the blank rows from the file To avoid this problem you can simply delete several rows in the Excel Worksheet using Edit Delete before saving the file Running predefined queries With predefined queries you can select previously written queries stored in XML format in a file This is partic ularly helpful if you are not familiar with SQL commands Click on the Predefined Queries tab to display the predefined query interface To load a set of predefined queries click on the L Open File icon This opens the Open File window which is used
213. eature With the 2 Move Feature s icon on the toolbar you can move existing features Tip Attribute Value Types For editing the attribute types are validated during the entry Because of this it is not possible to enter a number into the text column in the dialog Enter Attribute Values or vice versa If you need to do so you should edit the attributes in a second step within the Attribute table dialog Current Edits This new feature allows the digitization of multiple layers Choose Save for Selected Layers to save all changes you made in multiple layers You also have the opportunity to Rollback for Selected Layers so that the digitization is then withdrawn for all selected layers If you want to stop editing the selected layers the Z Cancel for Selected Layer s is an easy way The same functions for editing all layers of the project are available Node Tool For shapefile based layers as well as SpatialLite PostgreSQL PostGIS MSSQL Spatial and Oracle Spatial tables the amp Node Tool provides manipulation capabilites of feature vertices similar to CAD programs It is possible to simply select multiple vertices at once and to move add or delete them alltogether The node tool also works with on the fly projection turned on and supports the topological editing feature This tool is unlike other tools in 12 3 Editing 97 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 QGIS persistent so when some operation is done selection s
214. eature It won t delete the last part of the feature this last part will stay untouched This tool works with all multi part geometries point line and polygon Before you select the vertices of a part adjust the vertex edit tolerance Reshape Features You can reshape line and polygon features using the Reshape Features icon on the toolbar It replaces the line or polygon part from the first to the last intersection with the original line With polygons this can sometimes lead to unintended results It is mainly useful to replace smaller parts of a polygon not major overhauls and the reshape line is not allowed to cross several polygon rings as this would generate an invalid polygon For example you can edit the boundary of a polygon with this tool First click in the inner area of the polygon next to the point where you want to add a new vertex Then cross the boundary and add the vertices outside the polygon To finish right click in the inner area of the polygon The tool will automatically add a node where the new line crosses the border It is also possible to remove part of the area from the polygon starting the new line outside the polygon adding vertices inside and ending the line outside the polygon with a right click 12 3 Editing 101 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Catatan The reshape tool may alter the starting position of a polygon ring or a closed line So the point that is represented twice will not be the same any more
215. ect the map element and click on the right mouse button to Lock the element position and again to unlock the element You can lock the map element also activating the C Lock layers for map item checkbox in the Map dialog of the Item Properties tab Main properties The Main properties dialog of the map Item Properies tab provides following functionalities see fig ure composer 4 e The Preview area allows to define the preview modes Rectangle Cache and Render as described above If you change the view on the QGIS map canvas by zooming or panning or changing vector or raster 18 3 Composer Items 193 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Item Properties x Map wv Main properties Cache Update preview Scale 4000000 Rotation 0 00 degrees Draw map canvas items Lock layers for map item Extents _ Show grid Overview b b b b Position and size gt Frame gt amp Background pb Item ID b Rendering Gambar 18 4 Map Item properties Tab 8 properties you can update the print composer view selecting the map element in the print composer and clicking the Update preview button The field Scale 90 sets a manual scale e The field Rotation 9 allows to rotate the map element content clockwise in degrees Note a coordinate frame can only be added with the default value 0 e The fF Draw map canvas items lets you show annotations that may be placed on the map canvas i
216. ed the will be replaced by the value of the selected field in the identify results or attribute table Using Actions Actions can be invoked from either the Identify Results dialog an Attribute Table dialog or from Run Fea ture Action recall that these dialogs can be opened by clicking amp a i Or pat cae OT Q Run Feature Action To invoke an action right click on the record and choose the action from the popup menu Ac tions are listed in the popup menu by the name you assigned when defining the actions Click on the action you wish to invoke If you are invoking an action that uses the notation right click on the field value in the Identify Results dialog or the Attribute Table dialog that you wish to pass to the application or script Here is another example that pulls data out of a vector layer and inserts them into a file using bash and the echo command so it will only work 8 or perhaps X The layer in question has fields for a species name taxon name latitude lat and longitude long I would like to be able to make a spatial selection of a localities and export these field values to a text file for the selected record shown in yellow in the QGIS map area Here is the action to achieve this bash c echo taxon name lat long gt gt tmp species_localities txt After selecting a few localities and running the action on each one opening the output file will show something like this Acacia mearnsii 34 0800000000
217. ed other than Qt If you modify this file you may extend this exception to your version of the file but you are not obligated to do so If you do not wish to do so delete this exception statement from your version 21 2 GNU Free Documentation License Version 1 3 3 November 2008 Copyright 2000 2001 2002 2007 2008 Free Software Foundation Inc lt http fsf org gt Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The purpose of this License is to make a manual textbook or other functional and useful document free in the sense of freedom to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it with or without modifying it either commercially or noncommercially Secondarily this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others 256 Bab 21 Appendix QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 This License is a kind of copyleft which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense It complements the GNU General Public License which is a copyleft license designed for free software We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software because free software needs free documentation a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does
218. edit command from the commander It will open the editor with the commands file and you can edit it directly and then save your changes For instance you can add the following function which removes all layers from ggis gui import x def removeall mapreg QOgsMapLayerRegistry instance mapreg removeAllMapLayers Once you have added the function it will be available in the commander and you can invoke it by typing removeall There is no need to do anything apart from writing the function itself Functions can receive parameters Add args to your function definition to receive argument When calling the function from the commander parameters have to be passed separated by spaces Here is an example of a function that loads a layer and takes a parameter with the filename of the layer to load import sextante def load xargs sextante load args 0 If you want to load a layer in home myuser points shp type load home myuser points shp in the commander text box 17 8 The SEXTANTE Commander 187 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 188 Bab 17 QGIS kerangka pengolahan BAB 18 Print Composer The print composer provides growing layout and printing capabilities It allows you to add elements such as the QGIS map canvas text labels images legends scalebars basic shapes arrows attribute tables and HTML frames You can size group align and position each element and adjust the properties to create your layout The layou
219. edit_5 Choose the type of layer point line or polygon and the CRS Coordinate Reference System Note that QGIS does not yet support creation of 2 5D features 1 e features with X Y Z coordinates New Vector Layer Type Point Line Polygon EPSG 4326 WGS 84 Specify CRS New attribute Type Decimal number Width 20 Precision Attributes list Name Type Width Precision id Integer 10 name String 80 elevation Real 20 Help Cancel LOK Gambar 12 35 Creating a new Shapefile layer Dialog To complete the creation of the new Shapefile layer add the desired attributes by clicking on the Add to attributes list button and specifying a name and type for the attribute A first id column is added as default but can Tn be removed if not wanted Only Type real Belia Type integer Type string E and Type date attributes are supported Additionally and according to the attribute type you can also define the width and precision of the new attribute column Once you are happy with the attributes click OK and provide a name for the shapefile QGIS will automatically add a shp extension to the name you specify Once the layer has been created it will be added to the map and you can edit it in the same way as described in Section Digitizing an existing layer above 12 3 Editing 103 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Creating a new SpatiaLite layer To create a new SpatiaLite layer for editing choose N
220. ee the PostGIS documentation POSTGIS PROJECT Literatur dan Referensi Web for more information The following is an example of creating a GiST index gsherman madison current psql gis data Welcome to psql 8 3 0 the PostgreSQL interactive terminal Type copyright for distribution terms h for help with SQL commands for help with psgl commands g or terminate with semicolon to execute query Ne to guit gis data CREATE INDEX sidx alaska lakes ON alaska_lakes gis_data USING GIST the_geom GIST_GEOMETRY_OPS CREATE INDEX gis data VACUUM ANALYZE alaska_lakes VACUUM gis _data Ng gsherman madison current 12 1 Supported Data Formats 69 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 12 1 7 Vector layers crossing 180 longitude Many GIS packages don t wrap vector maps with a geographic reference system lat lon crossing the 180 de grees longitude line http postgis refractions net documentation manual 1 4 ST_Shift_Longitude html As re sult if we open such map in QGIS we will see two far distinct locations that should show near each other In Figure_vector_4 the tiny point on the far left of the map canvas Chatham Islands should be within the grid right of New Zealand main islands Quantum GIS 1 2 0 Daphnis File Edit View Layer Plugins Tools Help 14 EBGBSRAkP CPP SE CREREWDWAARAARHO PLB L RUO 5 ODREOODRP KOSTA P K BODBGBAOSLE v amp nz 5deg grid LL MW 255 453 Scale 1 1137 M Render KI
221. ee the information about the data defined override including the current definition field We now describe an example how to use the data defined override function for the E Move label function see figure_labels_4 1 Import the lakes shp from the QGIS sample dataset 2 Double klick the layer to open the Layer Properties Klick on Labels and Placement Select Offset from centroid 3 Look for the Data defined entries Klick the Icon to define the field type for the Coordinate Choose xlabel for X and ylabel for Y The Icons are now highlighted in yellow 4 Zoom into a lake 82 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 5 Go to the Label toolbar and klick the cR Icon Now you can shift the label manually to another position see figure_labels_5 The new position of the label is saved in the xlabel and ylabel columns of the attribute table Layer labeling settings Project Edit View Layer Settings Plugins Vector R a 5 3 L Va E g 4 a Label this layer with NAMES amp Ors ay ys v Text Buffer sample a A ra t ka P P E pe 3 pe oq IA R A Lorem ipsum f ab ET oy 3 abal atel ael ab Layers E3 Ta Z Y D groupt oo Lorem Ipsum 9j wil 7 De x popp Makna are Text Placement lako ta Formatting z airports 1 a Buffer Using perimeter v D storagep Background Centroid visible p
222. eference System 57 124 Create Maps 189 Create New Layers 103 crossing the 180 degrees longitude line 70 CRS 57 124 CSV 98 Current Edits 97 Indeks Custom Color Ramp 76 Custom CRS 59 DB Manager 71 Debian Sgueeze 129 default CRS 57 define an action 88 Derived Fields 108 Digitizing 96 Discrete 117 Displacement plugin 78 dokumentasi 5 editing 93 Elements Alignment 206 EPSG 57 Egual Interval 76 Erdas Imagine 113 ESRI 63 European Petroleom Search Group 57 example actions 88 Export as image 209 Export as PDF 209 Export as SVG 209 FastCGI 129 Field Calculator 108 Field Calculator Functions 109 Fitur Identifikasi 35 Gambaran Peta 47 GDAL 113 GeoTIFF 113 GeoTiff 113 GiST Generalized Search Tree index 69 GML 121 GNU General Public License 253 Gradient Color Ramp 76 Graduated Renderer 76 GRASS 139 lihat Creating new vec tors editing creating a new layer attribute linkage 144 attribute storage 144 category settings 145 digitizing tools 144 display results 149 150 265 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 region 147 region display 147 region editing 147 snapping tolerance 146 symbology settings 146 table editing 146 toolbox 151 GRASS toolbox 147 Browser 154 customize 154 GRASS vector data model 143 Grid Map_Grid 195 Histogram 119 HTML Frame 205 IGNF 57 Import_Maps 61 Institut_Geographique_National_de_France 57 InteProxy 1
223. efined by an entry in the USER_SDO_METADATA table 72 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 12 2 The Vector Properties Dialog The Layer Properties dialog for a vector layer provides information about the layer symbology settings and labeling options If your vector layer has been loaded from a PostgreSQL PostGIS datastore you can also alter the underlying SQL for the layer by invoking the Query Builder dialog on the General tab To access the Layer Properties dialog double click on a layer in the legend or right click on the layer and select Properties from the popup menu Layer Properties regions G l R General sami wv Layer info wy style Layer name regions displayed as regions Gel Labels f gt Layer source S1 Alexandre Dropbox Trabalho QGIS qgis_sample_data shapefiles regions shp Labels deprecated Data source encoding System Eza Fields v Coordinate reference system G3 Display a EPSG 2964 NAD27 Alaska Albers Specify actions y Create spatial index Update extents Joins Ia Dikin v Scale dependent visibility Metadata w Feature subset Restore Default Style Save As Default Load Style Save Style v Help Apply Cancel OK Gambar 12 6 Vector Layer Properties Dialog 12 2 1 Style Menu The Style menu provides you with a comprehensive tool for rendering and symbolizing your vector data You can use Layer rendering tools that are common to all vector data an
224. em 59 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Custom Coordinate Reference System Definition Define You can define your own custom Coordinate Reference System CRS here The definition must conform to the proj4 format for specifying a CRS Name Parameters Testurl proj tmerc lat 0 39 66825833333333 lon_O 8 13 ft Add new CRS Remove Name UTM 29 test Parameters proj utm zone 29 tellps WGS84 datum WwGS84 Copy towgs84 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 units m no_defs existing CRS Test Use the text boxes below to test the CRS definition you are creating Enter a coordinate where both the lat long and the transformed result are known for example by reading off a map Then press the calculate button to see if the CRS definition you are creating is accurate Geographic WGS84 Destination CRS North 38 4 4 250 293 2132 East 9 45 460 706 6723 Calculate Help Cancel OK Gambar 10 3 Custom CRS Dialog 8 This manual describes the use of the proj 4 and related command line utilities The cartographic parameters used with proj 4 are described in the user manual and are the same as those used by QGIS The Custom Coordinate Reference System Definition dialog reguires only two parameters to define a user CRS 1 a descriptive name and 2 the cartographic parameters in PROJ 4 format To create a new CRS click the gt New button and enter a descriptive name and the CRS parameters After that you can save your CRS b
225. em clicking on Add default actions An example is performing a search based on an attribute value This concept is used in the following discussion Defining Actions Attribute actions are defined from the vector Layer Properties dialog To define an action open the vector Layer Properties dialog and click on the Actions menu Go to the Action properties Select Generic as type and provide a descriptive name for the action The action itself must contain the name of the application that will be executed when the action is invoked You can add one or more attribute field values as arguments to the application When the action is invoked any set of characters that start with a followed by the name of a field will be replaced by the value of that field The special characters will be replaced by the value of the field that was selected from the identify results or attribute table see using_actions below Double quote marks can be used to group text into a single argument to the program script or command Double quotes will be ignored if preceded by a backslash If you have field names that are substrings of other field names e g co11 and co110 you should indicate so by surrounding the field name and the character with square brackets e g Sco110 This will prevent the CO110 field name being mistaken for the co11 field name with a 0 on the end The brackets will be removed by QGIS when it substitutes in the value of the field I
226. ens with blank spaces Let s have the following code which calculates the Topographic Wetness Index TWI directly from a DEM dem raster twi output ret_slope processing runalg Saga slopeaspectcurvature dem 0 None None None None None ret area processing runalg saga catchmentarea mass fluxmethod dem 0 False False False False None None None None None processing runalg saga topographicwetnessindex twi ret_slope SLOPE ret area AREA None 1 0 twi As you can see it involves 3 algorithms all of them coming from SAGA The last one of them calculates the TWI but it needs a slope layer and a flow accumulation layer We do not have these ones but since we have the DEM we can calculate them calling the corresponding SAGA algorithms The part of the code where this processing takes place is not difficult to understand if you have read the previous sections in this chapter The first lines however need some additional explanation They provide the information that is needed to turn your code into an algorithm that can be run from any of the GUI components like the toolbox or the graphical modeler These lines start with a double Python comment symbol and have the following structure parameter name J parameter type optional values Here is a list of all the parameter types that are supported in processign scripts their syntax and some examples e raster A raster layer e vect
227. ently the list of available tables that you will see when executing an algorithm that needs one of them is restricted to tables coming from files in DBase dbf or Comma Separated Values csv formats e An option to choose from a selection list of possible options e A numerical value to be introduced in a text box You will find a button by its side Clicking on it you will see a dialog that allows you to enter a mathematical expression so you can use it as a handy calculator Some useful variables related to data loaded into QGIS can be added to your expression so you can select a value derived from any of this variables such as the cellsize of a layer or the northern most coordinate of another one G Enter number or expression ajx Enter expression in the text field Double dick on elements in the tree to add their values to the expression El EF dem be Min X 262846 525725 Max X 277871 525725 i Min Y 4454025 0 He Max y 4464275 0 Se Cellsizes25 0 F points H lines EF 3cuencas J Values from raster layers statistics Gambar 17 9 Number Selector 7 e A range with min and max values to be introduced in two text boxes e A text string to be introduced in a text box 17 2 The toolbox 161 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 e A field to choose from the attributes table of a vector layer or a single table selected in another parameter e A Coordinate Reference System You can type the EPSG code dire
228. ept of tile sets Coarse Resolution Highest scale denominator Detailed Resolution Lowest scale denominator Gambar 14 1 Concept of WMTS tile sets The two types of WMTS interfaces that QGIS supports are via Key Value Pairs KVP and RESTful These two interfaces are different and you need to specify them to QGIS differently 1 In order to access a WMTS KVP service a QGIS user opens the WMS WMTS interface and adds the following string to the URL of the WMTS tile service 2SERVICE WMTS amp REQUEST GetCapabilities An example of this type of address is http opencache statkart no gatekeeper gk gk open wmts N service WMTS amp request GetCapabilities For testing the topo2 layer in this WMTS works nicely Adding this string indicates that a WMTS web service is to be used instead of a WMS service 2 The RESTful WMTS service takes a different form it is a straightforward URL the format recommended by the OGC is WMTSBaseURL 1 0 0 WMTSCapabilities xml This format helps you to recognize that it is a RESTful address A RESTful WMTS 1s accessed in QGIS by simply adding its address in the WMS setup in the URL field of the form An example for an Austrian basemap of this type of address is http maps wien gv at basemap 1 0 0 WMTSCapabilities xml Catatan You can find some old service call WMS C Thoses services are quiet similar to WMTS service same purpose but working a little bit differently You can manage them as the same
229. er canvas to shrink and grow the position cursor on the Activating 2 Map centering allows to decide in which way the canvas will be updated This includes always when leaving if your recorded coordinates start either to move out of canvas or never to keep map extent Finally you can activate C Log file and define a path and a file where log messages about the gps tracking a logged If you want to set a feature manually you have to go back to 4 Position and click on Add Point or Add track point 138 Bab 15 Pekerjaan dengan Data GPS BAB 16 GRASS GIS Integration The GRASS plugin provides access to GRASS GIS see GRASS PROJECT Literatur dan Referensi Web databas es and functionalities This includes visualization of GRASS raster and vector layers digitizing vector layers editing vector attributes creating new vector layers and analysing GRASS 2D and 3D data with more than 400 GRASS modules In this Section well introduce the plugin functionalities and give some examples on managing and working with GRASS data Following main features are provided with the toolbar menu when you start the GRASS plugin as described in section sec_starting_grass e G Open mapset r i New mapset e Close mapset e vii Add GRASS vector layer e a Add GRASS raster layer 4 e vi Create new GRASS vector ivi Edit GRASS vector layer A Open GRASS tools F Display current GRASS region J Edit current GRASS
230. er has a different resolution the values will be resampled with nearest neighbor algorithm The Operators section contains all usable operators To add an operator to the raster calculator expression box click the appropriate button Mathematical calculations x and trigonometric functions sin cos tan are available Stay tuned for more operators to come With the SF Add result to project checkbox the result layer will automatically added to the legend area and can be visualized 13 3 1 Examples Convert elevation values from meter to feet Creating an elevation raster feet from a raster in meter you need to use the conversion factor for meters to feet 3 28 The expression is elevation l 3 28 Using a mask If you want to mask out parts of a raster because you are only interested in elevations above 0 meter you can use following expression to create a mask and apply the result to a raster in one step elevation l gt 0 x elevation l For every cell greater than or equal to 0 set its value to 1 otherwise set it to 0 This creates the mask on the fly 120 Bab 13 Pekerjaan dengan Data Raster BAB 14 Pekerjaan dengan Data OGC 14 1 QGIS as OGC Data Client The Open Geospatial Consortium OGC is an international organization with more than 300 commercial gov ernmental nonprofit and research organizations worldwide Its members develop and implement standards for geospatial content and services
231. ers The combined work need only contain one copy of this License and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it in parentheses the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known or else a unique number Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work In the combination you must combine any sections Entitled History in the various original documents forming one section Entitled History likewise combine any sections Entitled Acknowledgements and any sections Entitled Dedications You must delete all sections Entitled Endorsements 6 COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS 21 2 GNU Free Documentation License 259 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects You may extract a single document from such a collection and distribute it individually under this License provided you insert a copy of this License into the extra
232. ers just as if they were originally in a format not supported by the external application Only when no selection exist or the Use only selected features option is not enabled in the processing general configuration a layer can be directly passed to an external application In other cases exporting only selected features is needed which causes execution times to be longer SAGA SAGA algorithms can be run from QGIS if you have SAGA installed in your system and you configure the pro cessing framework properly so it can find SAGA executables In particular the SAGA command line executable is needed to run SAGA algorithms In case of running Windows the standalone installer or the OSGeo4W installer both install SAGA along with QGIS and the path is automatically configured so there is no need to do anything else If you have installed SAGA yourself remember you need version 2 1 the path to the SAGA executable must be configured To do it open the configuration dialog In the SAGA block you will find a setting named SAGA Folder Enter the path to the folder where SAGA is installed Close the configuration dialog and now you are ready to run SAGA algorithms from QGIS In case you are running linux SAGA binaries are not included with SEXTANTE so you have to download and install the software yourself Please check the SAGA website for more information SAGA 2 1 is needed In this case there is no need to configure that and you will not
233. ers Volaya Desktop gt saga_cmd shapes_polygons Polygon Centroids kamen Users Wolaya agis2 python plugins processing tests data polygons shp CENTR Users Wolaya AppData Local Temp processing 6e25336e9644496 5b44 erie ne NN shp SERAH FF PARA FF Fee FFF FF FES FFF FSR SH FHSS SSS Fee FRFR PER SERA FF PERAI FF c saga21 modules shapes_polygons dil Shapes Polygons Polygon Centroids 2003 by O Conrad Gambar 17 3 Pengolahan Sejarah 7 Batch Processing Gaussian Filter Gambar 17 4 Antarmuka proses batch 7 158 Bab 17 QGIS kerangka pengolahan QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Sepanjang bagian berikut kita akan meninjau masing masing elemen ini secara rinci 17 2 The toolbox The Toolbox is the main element of the processing GUI and the one that you are more likely to use in your daily work It shows the list of all available algorithms grouped in different blocks and is the access point to run them whether as a single process or as a batch process involving several executions of a same algorithm on different sets of inputs Processing Toolbox xj El Recently used algorithms 48 Watershed from DEM and threshold Convergence index i Polygon centroids amp r aspect Generates raster maps of aspect from a elevation iB v voronoi Creates a Voronoi diagram from an input vector Beg Cartographic to geographic coordinates conversion El Geoalgorithms E amp Domain specific
234. ers can be eliminated using the Cumulative count cut setting The standard data range is set from 2 until 98 of the data values and can be adapted manually With this setting the gray character of the image can disappear With the scaling option Min max QGIS creates a color table with the whole data included in the original image E g QGIS creates a color table with 256 values given the fact that you have 8bit bands You can also calculate your color table using the Mean standard deviation x 02 Then only the values within the standard deviation or within multiple standard deviations are considered for the color table This is useful when you have one or two cells with abnormally high values in a raster grid that are having a negative impact on the rendering of the raster All calculation can also be made for the Current extend Tip Viewing a Single Band of a Multiband Raster If you want to view a single band for example Red of a multiband image you might think you would set the Green and Blue bands to Not Set But this is not the correct way To display the Red band set the image type to Singleband gray then select Red as the band to use for Gray Paletted This is the standard render option for singleband files that already include a color table where each pixel value is assigned to a certain color In that case the palette is rendered automatically If you want to change colors assigned to certain values
235. es under the same conditions stated above and you may publicly display copies 3 COPYING IN QUANTITY If you publish printed copies or copies in media that commonly have printed covers of the Document numbering more than 100 and the Document s license notice requires Cover Texts you must enclose the copies in covers that carry clearly and legibly all these Cover Texts Front Cover Texts on the front cover and Back Cover Texts on the back cover Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible You may add other material on the covers in addition Copying with changes limited to the covers as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly you should put the first ones listed as many as fit reasonably on the actual cover and continue the rest onto adjacent pages If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100 you must either include a machine readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy or state in or with each Opaque copy a computer network location from which the general network using public has access to download using public standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document
236. eta tekan tombol ESC Ini akan menghentikan refresh kanvas peta dan menghentikan proses penggambaran peta Hal ini mungkin membutuhkan waktu selama menekan ESC dan penggambaran peta terhenti Catatan Saat ini tidak memungkikan untuk menghentikan rendering ini dinonaktifkan di port qt4 karena masalah antarmuka pengguna UI dan konflik crash Memperbarui tampilan peta sebelum rendering Anda dapat mengatur pilihan untuk memperbarui tampilan peta sebagai fitur Secara standar QGIS tidak menampilkan semua fitur untuk lapisan sampai seluruh lapisan telah dirender Untuk memperbarui tampilan seper ti fitur dibaca dari datastore pilih opsi menu Pengaturan Opsi klik pada menu Rendering Mengatur jumlah fitur untuk nilai yang sesuai untuk memperbarui tampilan selama rendering Menetapkan nilai 0 menonaktifkan pembaruan selama menggambar ini adalah default Menetapkan nilai terlalu rendah akan menghasilkan kiner ja yang buruk pada kanvas peta terus diperbarui selama pembacaan fitur Nilai yang disarankan untuk memulai adalah 500 Mempengarui Kualitas Rendering Untuk mempengaruhi kualitas dari peta Anda memiliki 2 opsi Pilih opsi menu Pengaturan Opsi klik pada menu Rendering dan pilih atau tidak kotak centang berikut E Membuat garis tampil kurang baik dengan mengorbankan beberapa kinerja menggambar E Memperbaiki masalah isi poligon 8 5 Mengukur Mengukur peta dalam proyeksi sistem koordinat misal UTM dan data belum terproyek
237. evation F_CODE Selectall Clear Sorting a H cat Ascending Column Ascending NAME Ascending cancel R Gambar 18 25 Attribute table Select attributes Dialog The Table dialog allows to select the vector layer and columns of the attribute table Attribute columns can be sorted and you can define to show its values ascending or descending see figure composer 25 e You can choose to display only the attribute of features visibled on a map Check C Show only visible features and select the corresponding Composer map to filter e You can define the Maximum number of rows to be displayed and margin around text e Additionally you can define the grid characteristics of the table Stroke width and Color of the grid and the header and content font 18 3 Composer Items 205 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 18 3 8 Add a HTML frame to the Print Composer TE It is possible to add a clickable frame linked to an URL click the 3 Add html frame icon place the element with the left mouse button on the print composer canvas and position and customize their appearance in the Item Properties tab Main properties The Main properties dialog of the HTML frame Item Properties tab provides following functionalities see fig ure composer 26 Item Properties E HTML frame Main properties URL Resize mode Use existing frames b Position and size gt Frame b amp Background gt Item
238. ew New SpatiaLite Layer from the Layer menu The New SpatiaLite Layer dialog will be displayed as shown in Figure edit 6 New Spatialite Layer Database data Dropbox Trabalho OGIS Plugins Layer name Alaska Geometry column geometry Type Point Line Polygon MultiPoint Multiline Multipolygon EPSG 4326 WGS 84 Specify CRS amp Create an autoincrementing primary key New attribute Name area Type Decimal number ty Add to attributes list Attributes list Name Type Name text Help Cancel Lan OK Gambar 12 36 Creating a New SpatiaLite layer Dialog First step is to select an existing SpatiaLite database or to create a new SpatiaLite database This can be done with the browse button to the right of the database field Then add a name for the new layer and define the layer type and specify the Coordinate Reference System with Specify CRS If desired you can select to A Create an autoincrementing primary key To define an attribute table for the new SpatiaLite layer add the names of the attribute columns you want to create with the according column type and click on the Add to attribute list button Once you are happy with the attributes click OK QGIS will automatically add the new layer to the legend and you can edit it in the same way as described in Section Digitizing an existing layer above Further management of SpatiaLite Layers can be done with the DB Manager see Plugin Pen
239. ext All uppercase All lowercase or Capitalize first letter Also a new function in QGIS 2 0 is the use of blend modes see blend modes In the Formatting menu you can define a character for a line break in the labels with the wrap label on character function Use the C Formatted numbers option to format the numbers in an attribute table Here decimal places are inserted If you enable this option three decimal places ist set by default To create a buffer just activate C Draw text buffer checkbox in the Buffer menu The buffer color is variable Also a new function in QGIS 2 0 is the use of blend modes see blend_modes If the C Color buffer s fill checkbox is activated it will interact with partially transparent text and give mixed color transparency results Turning off the buffer fill fixes that issue except where the interior aspect of the buffer s stroke intersects with the text s fill and also allows the user to make outlined text In the Background menu you can define with Size X and Size Y the shape of your background Use Size type to insert an additional Buffer into your background The buffer size one is set by default here The background then consists of the buffer plus the background in Size X and Size Y You can set a Rotation where you can choose between Sync with label Offset of label and Fixed Using Offset of label and Fixed you can rotate the background Define an O
240. f a color based on its hue saturation value and alpha transparency attributes returns a string representation of a color based on its cyan magenta yellow and black components returns a string representation of a color based on its cyan magenta yellow black and alpha transparency components Geometry Functions This group contains functions that operate on geometry objects e g length area QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 xat yat Sarea Slength Sperimeter S3 Sy Sgeometry geomFromWKT geomFromGML bbox dI1sjo1nt intersects touches Crosses contains overlaps within buffer centroid convexHull difference distance intersection symDifference combine union geomlowkKT Record Functions retrieves a x coordinate of the current feature retrieves a y coordinate of the current feature the the the the the the for processing with other functions returns area size of the current feature returns area size of the current feature returns perimeter length of the current feature returns x coordinate of the current feature returns y coordinate of the current feature returns geometry of the current feature Can be used WKT geometry from a GML representation of geometry returns a geometry created from a Well Known Text representation returns a returns 1 if the Geometries do not share any space together returns 1 if the geometries spatially intersect and 0 if they don t returns 1 if the ge
241. f the common boundary Enable snapping on intersections Another option is to use C Enable snapping on intersection It allows to snap on an intersection of background layers even if there s no vertex on the intersection 12 3 4 Digitizing an existing layer By default QGIS loads layers read only This is a safeguard to avoid accidentally editing a layer if there is a slip of the mouse However you can choose to edit any layer as long as the data provider supports it and the underlying data source is writable 1 e its files are not read only In general editing vector layers is divided into a digitizing and an advanced digitizing tool bar described in Section Advanced digitizing You can select and unselect both under Settings Toolbars Using the basic digitizing tools you can perform the following functions Icon Purpose Icon Purpose Current edits Toggle editing Adding Features Capture Point E2 Adding Features Capture Line Adding Features Capture Polygon amp Move Feature Node Tool Delete Selected Cut Features Copy Features Paste Features r Save layer edits Table Editing Vector layer basic editing toolbar All editing sessions start by choosing the f Toggle editing Option This can be found in the context menu after right clicking on the legend entry for that layer Alternately you can use the Toggle Editing A Toggle editing button from the digitizing toolbar to start or stop the editing mo
242. f you want the substituted field to be surrounded by square brackets use a second set like this col10 Using the Identify Features tool you can open Identify Results dialog It includes a Derived item that contains information relevant to the layer type The values in this item can be accessed in a similar way to the other fields by using preceeding the derived field name by Derived For example a point layer has an X and Y field and the value of these can be used in the action with Derived X and Derived Y The derived attributes are only available from the dentify Results dialog box not the Attribute Table dialog box Two example actions are shown below e konqueror http www google com search g Snam e konqueror http www google com search gq In the first example the web browser konqueror is invoked and passed a URL to open The URL performs a Google search on the value of the nam field from our vector layer Note that the application or script called by 88 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 the action must be in the path or you must provide the full path To be sure we could rewrite the first exam ple as opt kde3 bin kongueror http www google com search q nam This will ensure that the konqueror application will be executed when the action is invoked The second example uses the notation which does not rely on a particular field for its value When the action is invok
243. fTools Alat untuk analisis dan mengelola data vektor GDAL Tools Integrasi alat GDAL ke dalam QGIS Georeferencer GDAL Menambahkan informasi proyeksi ke raster menggunakan GDAL Alat GPS Memuat dan impor data GPS GRASS GRASS GIS integrasi Heatmap Membangkitkan raster heatmap dari data titik Llugin Interpolation interpolasi berdasarkan simpul dari lapisan vektor Ekspor Mapserver Ekspor berkas proyek QGIS ke berkas peta MapServer Penyuntingan Luar Jaringan Izinkan menyunting luar jaringan dan sinkronisasi dengan basis data Plugin Open Layer lapisan OpenStreetMap Google Maps Bing Maps dan banyak lagi Oracle Spatial GeoRaster Processing formerly SEXTANTE Analisis terrain raster analisis terrain berbasis raster Plugin road graph Analisis jaringan terpendek Spatial Query Plugin SPIT Impor Shapefile ke PostgreSQL PostGIS Plugin SQL Anywhere Menyimpan lapisan vektor dengan basis data SQL Anywhere Topologi Checker Menemukan kesalahan topologi dalam lapisan vektor Plugin Zonal statistics hitung jumlah rata rata raster untuk setiap poligon dari lapisan vektor 4 6 2 Plugin Eksternal Python OGIS menawarkan semakin banyak plugin python eksternal yang diberikan oleh masyarakat Plugin ini berada di plugin repositori resmi dan dapat dengan mudah dipasang menggunakan Python Plugin Installer lihat bagian Memuat Plugin eksternal OGIS 4 7 Python Console Untuk scripting mem
244. ffset X Y with X and Y values and the background will be shifted When applying Radius X Y the background gets rounded corners Again it is possible to mix the background with the underlying layers in the map canvas using the Blend mode see blend modes Use the Shadow menu for a user defined Drop shadow The drawing of the background is very variable Choose between Lowest label component Text Buffer and Background The Offset angle depends on the orienta tion of the label If you choose the C Use global shadow checkbox then the zero point of the angle is always oriented to the north and doesn t depend on the orientation of the label Influence the appearance of the shadow with the Blur radius The higher the number the softer the shadows The appearance of the drop shadow can also be altered by choosing a blend mode see blend_modes Choose the Placement menu for the label placement and the labeling priority Using the Offset from point setting you now have the possibility to use Quadrants to place your label Additionally you can alter the angle of the label placement with the Rotation setting Thus a placement in a certain quadrant with a certain rotation is possible In the Rendering menu you can define label and feature options In the Label options you find the scale based visibility setting now You can prevent QGIS from rendering only selected labels with the C Show all labels for this layer including c
245. field directly in the text box or use the list to select a table field input already added to the model The validity of the selected field will be checked at run time In all cases you will find an additional parameter named Parent algorithms that is not available when calling the algorithm from the toolbox This parameter allows you to define the order in which algorithms are executed by explicitly defining one algorithm as a parent of the current one which will force it to be executed before it When you use the output of a previous algorithm as the input of your algorithm that implicitly sets the former as parent of the current one and places the corresponding arrow in the modeler canvas However in some cases an algorithm might depend on another one even if it does not use any output object from it for instance and algorithm that executes an SQL sentence on a PostGIS database and another one which imports a layer into that 168 Bab 17 QGIS kerangka pengolahan QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 same database In that case just select it in the Parent algorithms parameter and they will be executed in the correct order Once all the parameter have been assigned valid values click on OK and the algorithm will be added to the canvas It will be linked to all the other elements in the canvas whether algorithms or inputs which provide objects that are used as inputs for that algorithm So Inputs Algorithms aa a Design Python code
246. figuration dialog you can open it from the Processing menu and in the General group you will find a parameter named Output folder This output folder is used as the default path in case you type just a filename with no path 1 e myfile shp when executing an algorithm When running an algorithm that uses vector layer in iterative mode the entered file path is used as the base path for all generated files which are named using the base name and appending a number representing the index of the iteration The file extension and format is used for all those generated files Apart from raster layers and tables algorithms also generates graphics and texts as HTML files These results are shown at the end of the algorithm execution in a new dialog This dialog will keep the results produced by any algorithm during the current session and can be shown at any time by selecting the Processing Results viewer from QGIS main menu Some external applications might have files with no particular extension restrictions as output but they do not belong to any of the categories above Those output files will not be processed by QGIS opened or included into the current QGIS project since most of the times correspond to file formats or elements not supported by QGIS This is for instance the case with LAS files used for LiDAR data The files get created but you won t see anything new in your QGIS working session For all the other types of outputs
247. for that matter you are also asked if you want to save your changes or discard them If the changes cannot be saved e g disk full or the attributes have values that are out of range the QGIS in memory state is preserved This allows you to adjust your edits and try again Tip Data Integrity It is always a good idea to back up your data source before you start editing While the authors of QGIS have made every effort to preserve the integrity of your data we offer no warranty in this regard 12 3 Editing 99 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 12 3 5 Advanced digitizing Icon Purpose Icon Purpose Undo Redo Rotate Feature s Simplify Feature Add Ring Add Part Delete Ring Delete Part Reshape Features Offset Curve Split Features 2 Merge Selected Features Rotate Point Symbols Merge Attributes of Selected Features Table Advanced Editing Vector layer advanced editing toolbar Undo and Redo The D undo and Redo tools allow the user to undo or redo vector editing operations There is also a dockable widget which shows all operations in the undo redo history see Figure_edit_3 This widget is not displayed by default it can be displayed by right clicking on the toolbar and activating the Undo Redo check box Undo Redo is however active even if the widget is not displayed Undo Redo be lt empty gt Feature added Feature moved Features deleted Undo Gambar 12 33 Redo and Undo digit
248. framework tries to configure its GRASS connector to use the GRASS distribution that ships along with QGIS This should work without problems in most systems but if you experience problems you might have to do it manually Also if you want to use a different GRASS installation you can change that setting and point to the folder where that it is installed GRASS 6 4 is needed for algorithms to work correctly If you are running Linux you just have to make sure that GRASS is correctly installed and that it can be run without problem from a console GRASS algorithms use a region for calculations This region can be defined manually using values similar to the ones found in the SAGA configuration or automatically taking the minimum extent that covers all the input layers used to execute the algorithm each time If this is the behaviour you prefer just check the Use min covering region option in the GRASS configuration parameters 184 Bab 17 QGIS kerangka pengolahan QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 The last parameter that has to be configured is related to the mapset A mapset is needed to run GRASS and the processing frmaework creates a temporary one for each execution You have to specify if the data you are working with uses geographical lat lon coordinates or projected ones GDAL No additional configuration is needed to run GDAL algorithms since it is already incorporated to QGIS and algorithms can infere its configuration from it Orfe
249. free of added material If you use the latter option you must take reasonably prudent steps when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy directly or through your agents or retailers of that edition to the public It is requested but not required that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document 4 MODIFICATIONS You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it In addition you must do these things in the Modified Version 1 Use in the Title Page and on the covers if any a title distinct from that of the Document and from those of previous versions which should if there were any be listed in the History section of the Document You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission 2 List on the Title Page as authors one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifi
250. from attribute Remember this daaa Q _ Apply Path to Image rules when loading docs in external applications Remember this D Reset Restore Defaults se Gambar 19 7 The eVis Options window 218 Bab 19 Plugin QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 1 File path A dropdown list to specify the attribute field that contains the directory path or URL for the photographs or other documents being displayed If the location is a relative path then the checkbox must be clicked The base path for a relative path can be entered in the Base Path text box below Information about the different options for specifying the file location are noted in the section Specifying the location and name of a photograph below 2 Compass bearing A dropdown list to specify the attribute field that contains the compass bearing asso ciated with the photograph being displayed If compass bearing information is available it is necessary to click the checkbox below the dropdown menu title 3 Compass offset Compass offsets can be used to compensate for declination adjust bearings collected using magnetic bearings to true north bearings Click the Manual radiobutton to enter the offset in the text box or click the From Attribute radiobutton to select the attribute field containing the offsets For both of these options east declinations should be entered using positive values and west declinations should use negative values 4 Directory base path The
251. ftar ini berkaitan dengan upaya pendidikan QGIS Jika Anda ingin bekerja pada bahan pendidikan QGIS daftar ini adalah awal yang baik untuk mengajukan pertanyaan Anda Anda bisa berlangganan di http lists osgeo org mailman listinfo qgis edu 20 1 10 qgis psc Daftar ini digunakan untuk membahas isu isu Komite Pengarah yang berkaitan dengan arah dan manajemen secara keseluruhan QGIS Anda dapat berlangganan di http lists osgeo org mailman listinfo ggis psc Anda dipersilakan untuk berlangganan ke salah satu daftar Harap ingat untuk berkontribusi ke dalam daftar den gan menjawab pertanyaan dan berbagi pengalaman Anda Perhatikan bahwa ggis commit dan ggis trac dirancang hanya untuk pemberitahuan saja dan tidak dimaksudkan untuk mengirim surel 20 2 IRC Kami juga mengunakan IRC kunjungi kami dengan bergabung dalam kanal ggis di irc freenode net Butuh waktu untuk menanggapi pertanyaan Anda karena banyak orang orang di saluran ini melakukan hal hal lain dan mungkin diperlukan waktu beberapa saat bagi mereka untuk melihat pertanyaan Anda Dukungan komersial untuk QGIS juga tersedia Periksa website http qgis org en commercial support html untuk informasi lebih lanjut Jika Anda melewatkan sebuah diskusi di IRC tidak masalah Kami log semua diskusi sehingga Anda dapat dengan mudah mengejar ketinggalan Hanya pergi ke http qgis org irclogs dan baca IRC logs 20 3 BugTracker Sementara milis ggis pengguna berguna untuk jenis pertanyaan umu
252. g QGIS Anda sendiri 20 5 Plugin Situs web http plugins qgis org menyediakan web resmi Portal plugin QGIS Di sini Anda menemukan daftar semua plugin QGIS stabil dan eksperimental tersedia melalui Repositori Plugin QGIS Resmi 20 6 Wiki Akhirnya kami memelihara situs web WIKI di http hub qgis org projects quantum gis wiki di mana Anda dapat menemukan berbagai informasi berguna yang berhubungan dengan pengembangan QGIS rencana rilis tautan untuk mengunduh pesan petunjuk terjemahan dan sebagainya Silakan dikunjungi ada banyak informasi bagus didalamnya 20 4 Blog 251 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 252 Bab 20 Bantuan dan Dukungan BAB 21 Appendix 21 1 GNU General Public License Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Librar
253. gan akses dasar ke Personal Komputer QGIS saat ini berjalan pada kebanyakan platform Unix Windows dan OS X QGIS dikembangkan menggunakan toolkit Qt http qt digia com dan C Ini berarti bahwa QGIS terasa cepat dan menyenangkan antarmuka pengguna grafis yang mudah digunakan GUI QGIS bertujuan untuk menjadi GIS yang mudah digunakan menyediakan fungsi dan fitur fitur umum Tujuan awalnya adalah untuk menyediakan penampil data GIS QGIS telah mencapai titik dalam evolusi di mana ia digunakan sehari hari oleh banyak orang untuk kebutuhan melihat data GIS mereka QGIS mendukung sejumlah format data raster dan vektor dengan dukungan format baru mudah ditambahkan dengan menggunakan arsitektur plugin QGIS is released under the GNU General Public License GPL Developing QGIS under this license means that you can inspect and modify the source code and guarantees that you our happy user will always have access to a GIS program that is free of cost and can be freely modified You should have received a full copy of the license with your copy of QGIS and you also can find it in Appendix GNU General Public License Tip Pembaruan Dokumentasi Versi terbaru dari dokumen ini selalu dapat ditemukan di website dokumentasi QGIS di http www qgis org en docs QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 6 Bab 3 Kata Pengantar BAB 4 Keistimewaan QGIS menawarkan banyak fungsi GIS umum yang disediakan oleh fitur inti dan plugin Sebagai ringkasan singkat d
254. gelola DB Creating a new GPX layer To create a new GPX file you need to load the GPS plugin first Plugins x5 Plugin Manager opens the Plugin Manager Dialog Activate the A GPS Tools checkbox When this plugin is loaded choose New 3 Create new GPX Layer from the Layer In the Save new GPX file as dialog you can choose where to save the new GPX layer 104 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 12 3 7 Working with the Attribute Table The attribute table displays features of a selected layer Each row in the table represents one map feature and each column contains a particular piece of information about the feature Features in the table can be searched selected moved or even edited To open the attribute table for a vector layer make the layer active by clicking on it in the map legend area Then from the main menu Layer choose Open Attribute Table It 1s also possible to rightclick on the layer and choose Open Attribute Table from the dropdown menu and to click on the Open Attribute Table button in the Attributes toolbar This will open a new window which displays the feature attributes in the layer figure attributes 1 The number of features and the number of selected features are shown in the attribute table title Attribute table regions Features total 26 Filtered 26 selected 4 ra 1 6 D E A G NAME 1 4 NAME 2 HASC 2 TYPE 2 0 1 2 4 Alaska Bristol Bay US AK B
255. ght click on the name of the algorithm in the toolbox and select Edit rendering styles You will see a dialog like the one shown next Gambar 17 15 Rendering Styles 7 Select the style file qm1 that you want for each output and press OK Other configuration parameters in the General group are the following ones e Use filename as layer name The name of each resulting layer created by an algorithm is defined by the algorithm itself In some cases a fixed name might be used that meaning that the same name will be used no matter which input layer is used In other cases the name might depend on the name of the input layer or some of the parameters used to run the algorithm If this checkbox is checked the name will be taken from the output filename instead Notice that if the output is saved to a temporary file the filename of this temporary file is usually long and meaningless one intended to avoid collision with other already existing filenames e Use only selected features If this option is selected whenever a vector layer is used as input for an al gorithm only its selected features will be used If the layer has no selected features all of them will be used e Pre execution script file and Post execution script file This parameters refer to scripts written using the processing scripting functionality and are explained in the section covering scripting and the console Apart from the General block in the settings di
256. given path for all user configuration code path run the given python file on load 6 4 Memulai dan Menghentikan QGIS 19 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 he tp this text FILES Files specified on the command line can include rasters vectors and QGIS project files ggs 1 Rasters Supported formats include GeoTiff DEM and others supported by GDAL 2 Vectors Supported formats include ESRI Shapefiles and others supported by OGR and PostgreSQL layers using the PostGIS extension Tip Contoh Menggunakan argumen baris perintah Anda dapat memulai QGIS dengan menentukan satu atau lebih berkas data pada baris perintah Misal nya dengan asumsi Anda berada di direktori qgis_sample_data Anda bisa memulai QGIS dengan berkas lapisan vektor dan raster diatur untuk dimuat pada startup dengan menggunakan perintah berikut ggis raster landcover img gml lakes gml Pilihan baris perintah snapshot Pilihan ini memungkinkan Anda untuk membuat cuplikan layar dalam format PNG dari tampilan saat ini Hal ini sangat berguna ketika Anda memiliki banyak proyek dan ingin menghasilkan cuplikan layar dari data Anda Saat ini menghasilkan berkas PNG dengan piksel 800x600 Hal ini dapat diadaptasi dengan menggunakan argu men baris perintah width dan height Nama berkas bisa ditambahkan setelah snapshot Pilihan baris perintah lang Berdasarkan QGIS lokal Anda pilih lokalisasi yang benar Jika Anda ingin mengubah bahasa A
257. gkinkan Anda untuk menentukan alpha channel menentukan harus seberapa transparan warna Hal ini memungkinkan Anda membuat peta tampak hebat dan untuk menyembunyikan data dengan mudah bahwa Anda tidak ingin pengguna melihatnya Kontrol Warna Lapisan layer Raster QGIS versi 2 0 memungkinkan Anda secara tepat mengontrol persis bagaimana Anda ingin lapisan layer raster muncul Anda kini memiliki kontrol penuh atas ke cerahan brightness kontras contrast dan saturasi saturation lapisan layer raster Bahkan ada pilihan tampilan raster skala abu abu grayscale atau dengan warna tertentu Salin simbologi antar lapisan layer Sekarang sangat mudah menyalin simbologi dari satu lapisan layer ke lapisan lain Jika Anda bekerja dengan beberapa lapisan yang sama Anda bisa klik kanan pada salah satu lapisan pilih Salin Copy Style dari menu utama dan kemudian klik kanan pada layer lain dan memilih Tempel Paste Style Cara menyimpan dalam basis data Anda Jika Anda menggunakan penyimpanan data basis data vektor sekarang Anda cara penyimpanan definisi lapisan layer langsung dalam basis data Hal ini membuat mudah untuk berbagi gaya lapisan layer dalam suatu perusahaan atau lingkungan multi pengguna Dukungan warna landai ramp Warna landai ramp kini tersedia di banyak tempat pengaturan sim bologi QGIS set extensible warna landai ramp Anda juga dapat desain sendiri dan banyak tema cpt kota yang termasuk dalam QGIS sekarang out
258. gons_geometry_parent gt regions gt airports Help G OK Gambar 19 11 The eVis Predefined queries tab 3 Query description A short description of the query This description is from the predefined queries XML file 4 Console Window The console window where messages related to processing are displayed 5 Help Displays the on line help 6 OK Closes the main Database Connection window XML format for eVis predefined queries The XML tags read by eVis 224 Bab 19 Plugin Tag query Defines the beginning and end of a query statement shortde A short description of the query that appears in the eVis dropdown menu scription descrip A more detailed description of the query displayed in the Predefined Query text window tion database The database type as defined in the Database Type dropdown menu in the Database Connection type tab database The port as defined in the Port textbox in the Database Connection tab port database The database name as defined in the Database Name textbox in the Database Connection tab name The database username as defined in the Username textbox in the Database Connection tab name databasep The database password as defined in the Password textbox in the Database Connection tab assword sgistate The SOL command ment autocon A flag true or false to specify if the above tags should be used to automatically connect to nect database without runni
259. gram is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License c If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cau
260. gsung dari area kerja penyusun peta 5 4 Penyusun Peta 13 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 5 5 Pelabelan Sistem pelabelan baru Sistem pelabelan telah benar benar dirombak kini mencakup banyak fitur baru seperti drop shadow highway shields banyak pilihan dan berbagai peningkatan kinerja Kami perlahan lahan melakukan jauh dari sistem label tua meskipun Anda masih menemukan fungsi yang tersedia untuk rilis ini Anda berharap bahwa itu akan hilang dalam rilis tindak lanjut Expression based label properties Kekuatan penuh label dan aturan ekspresi yang normal kini dapat digunakan untuk properti label Hampir setiap properti dapat didefinisikan dengan nilai ekspresi atau kolom nilai memberikan Anda kontrol lebih besar atas hasil label Ekspresi dapat merujuk ke kolom misalnya mengatur ukuran font dengan nilai huruf atau dapat mencakup logika yang lebih kompleks Mesin pelabelan yang usang Penggunaan mesin pelabelan tua tersedia dalam QGIS lt versi 1 8 kini sudah usang namun belum dihapus Hal ini untuk pengguna bermigrasi dari proyek yang lama ke mesin label baru Berikut ini panduan bekerja dengan mesin yang lebih tua di QGIS versi 2 0 Tab pelabelan lama dihapus dari properti lapisan layer vektor dialog untuk proyek proyek baru atau proyek tua yang dibuka jangan menggunakan mesin pelabelan Tab usang tetap aktif untuk proyek proyek tua yang dibuka jika setiap lapisan layer menggunakan mereka dan masih ada ba
261. he 3 Open mapset button and choosing the Alaska location a Add GRASS raster layer e Now load the gtopo30 elevation raster by clicking and selecting the gtopo30 raster from the demo location e Now open the Toolbox with the A Open ORASS Wels button In the list of tool categories double click Raster Surface Management Generate vector contour lines e Now a single click on the tool r contour will open the tool dialog as explained above Working with GRASS modules The gtopo30 raster should appear as the Name of input raster Type into the Increment between Contour levels 0 9 the value 100 This will create contour lines at intervals of 100 meters Type into the Name for output vector map the name ctour_100 e Click Run to start the process Wait for several moments until the message Successfully finished appears in the output window Then click View Output and Close Since this is a large region it will take a while to display After it finishes rendering you can open the layer properties window to change the line color so that the contours appear clearly over the elevation raster as in The Vector Properties Dialog Next zoom in to a small mountainous area in the center of Alaska Zooming in close you will notice that the contours have sharp corners GRASS offers the v generalize tool to slightly alter vector maps while keeping their overall shape The tool uses several different algorithms with different purposes
262. he Layer Properties is hard coded to be always on where available Tip WMS Layer Transparency The availability of WMS image transparency depends on the image encoding used PNG and GIF support trans parency whilst JPEG leaves it unsupported Coordinate Reference System 124 Bab 14 Pekerjaan dengan Data OGC QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 A Coordinate Reference System CRS is the OGC terminology for a QGIS Projection Each WMS Layer can be presented in multiple CRSs depending on the capability of the WMS server To choose a CRS select Change and a dialog similar to Figure Projection 3 in Working with Projections will appear The main difference with the WMS version of the screen is that only those CRSs supported by the WMS Server will be shown Server search Within QGIS you can search for WMS servers Figure OGC 2 shows the tab Server Search with the Add Layer s from a Server dialog Add Layer s from a Server Layers Server Search Title Live Haiti OSM WMS via Mapnik live osm data via tile2 dbseo coi Geofabrik Tools OSM Inspector Addresses OSM Inspector is a debugging ti OSM Latvia data OSM Latvia data OSM WMS OpenStreetMap WMS WMS Demo fur OSM Daten Ger OpenStreetMap WMS Graustufenvariante WMS Demo fur OSM Daten Ger OSM_Basic Open Street Map OSM_Basic Open Street Map UMN MapServer Landcover This is the UMN MapServer appl Help Close Select layer s Gambar 14 3 Dialog for searching WMS servers after some keyword
263. he gtopo30 raster in the Table of Contents then check transparency of the colored gtopo30 layer You should see that the 3D effect stands out more strongly compared to the first shaded relief map QGIS 2 0 1 Dufour Project Edit View Layer Settings Plugins Vector Raster Database Processing Help DB BRRA LENLLBAGULA U OWED TSO SSRPPARS RAR N ALam aA Ua OR Ue MAMMANRB M e aAa Layers SN i EPI T AE gt MH amp gtopo30 Layers Browser 2 Overview 8 MW Coordinate 751390 3908635 Scale 4099646 v 9 MM Render EPSG 2964 Gambar 16 14 Displaying shaded relief created with the GRASS module r shaded relief 9 Raster statistics in a vector map The next example shows how a GRASS module can aggregate raster data and add columns of statistics for each polygon in a vector map 16 9 Again using the Alaska data refer to Importing data into a GRASS LOCATION to import the trees shapefile from the shapefiles directory into GRASS Now an intermediary step is reguired centroids must be added to the imported trees map to make it a complete GRASS area vector including both boundaries and centroids From the toolbox choose Vector Manage features and open the module v centroids Enter as the output vector map forest areas and run the module Now load the forest areas vector and display the types of forests deciduous evergreen mixed in different colors In the layer Properties window Symbology t
264. he resulting files as input to the algorithm Also note that the reprojection process can be performed with the algorithms that are available in the processing framework itself By default the parameters dialog will show a description of the CRS of each layer along with its name making it easy to select layers that share the same CRS to be used as input layers If you do not want to see this additional information you can disable this functionality in the processing config dialog unchecking the Show CRS option 17 2 The toolbox 163 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 If you try to execute an algorithm using as input two or more layers with unmatching CRS s a warning dialog will be shown You still can execute the algorithm but be aware that in most cases that will produce wrong results such as empty layers due to input layers not overlapping 17 2 2 Data objects generated by algorithms Data objects generated by an algorithm can be of any of the following types e A raster layer e A vector layer e A table e An HTML file used for text and graphical outputs They are all saved to disk and the parameters table will contain a text box corresponding to each one of these outputs where you can type the output channel to use for saving it An output channel contains the information needed to save the resulting object somewhere In the most usual case you will save it to a file but the architecture allows for any other way of storing it For ins
265. hey are shown as SEXTANTE algorithm lt name of the algorithm gt e Menu items They are shown as Menu item lt menu entry text gt All menus items available from the QGIS interface are available even if they are included in a submenu e Python functions You can create short Python functions that will be then included in the list of available commands They are shown as Function lt function name gt To run any of the above just start typing and then select the corresponding element from the list of available ones that appears after filtering the whole list of commands with the text you have entered In the case of calling a Python function you can select the entry in the list which is pre fixed by Function for instance Function removeall or just directly type the function name removealLl in the previous example There is no need to add brackets after the func tion name 17 8 2 Creating custom functions Custom functions are added by entering the corresponding Python code in the commands py file that is found inthe qgis sextante commander directory in your user folder It is just a simple Python file where you can add the functions that you need The file is created the first time you open the commander with a few example functions If you haven t launched the commander yet you can create the file yourself To edit the commands file use your favorite text editor You can also use a built in editor by calling the
266. hkan jika menyimpan proyek tanpa lapisan memiliki mesin pelabelan tua yang diaktifkan Tab pelabelan Usang dapat diaktifkan dinonaktifkan untuk proyek ini melalui konsol perintah Python Harap dicatat Ada kemungkinan besar mesin pelabelan usang akan benar benar dihapus sebelum rilis stabil berikutnya QGIS Silakan bermigrasi proyek lebih lama 5 6 Programmability 14 Konsol Python Baru Konsol Python baru memberi Anda kekuatan bahkan lebih Kini dengan dukungan pengaturan otomatis lengkap syntax highlighting adjustable font Penyunting kode memungkinkan masuk lebih mudah kode blok yang lebih besar dengan kemampuan membuka dan menjalankan berkas Python dalam sesi QGIS Fungsi Ekspresi Dengan mesin ekspresi yang digunakan lebih banyak dan QGIS memungkinkan hal hal seperti ekspresi berbasis label dan simbol lebih banyak fungsi telah ditambahkan ke pembangun ekspresi dan semuanya dapat diakses melalui pembangun ekspresi Semua fungsi termasuk bantuan yang kompre hensif dan panduan penggunaan untuk kemudahan penggunaan Custom expression functions Jika mesin ekspresi tidak memiliki fungsi yang Anda butuhkan Jangan khawatir fungsi baru bisa ditambahkan melalui plugin menggunakan API Python Pembersih API Python API Python telah dirubah lebih bersih lebih pythonic pengalaman pemrograman API V2 QGIS 2 0 menggunakan SIP yang menghilangkan logika berantakan toString tolnt yang dibu tuhkan saat bekerja dengan nilai nilai Jenis kin
267. horne 1987 Fit 3 Haralick 1983 Degree Polynom Heerdegen amp Beran 1982 OY OF W DN DN IBU N Degree Polynom In this case the algorithm has one of such such parameters with 7 options Notice that ordering is zero based e Multiple input The value is a string with input descriptors separated by semicolons As in the case of single layers or tables each input descriptor can be the data object name or its filepath e Table Field from XXX Use a string with the name of the field to use This parameter is case sensitive e Fixed Table Type the list of all table values separated by commas and enclosed between quotes Values start on the upper row and go from left to right You can also use a 2D array of values representing the table e CRS Enter the EPSG code number of the desired CRS e Extent You must use a string with xmin xmax ymin and ymax values separated by commas Boolean file string and numerical parameters do not need any additional explanations Input parameters such as strings booleans or numerical values have default values To use them use None in the corresponding parameter entry For output data objects type the filepath to be used to save it just as it is done from the toolbox If you want to save the result to a temporary file use None The extension of the file determines the file format If you enter a file extension not included in the ones supported by the algorithm the def
268. i lebih lanjut Anda dapat membaca di situs GDAL http www gdal org gdalwarp html Alat int memungkinkan menetapkan proyeksi untuk raster yang sudah bergeoreferensi tetapi Menetapkan informasi proyeksi keliru Juga dengan membantu mengubah definisi proyeksi yang ada proyeksi Kedua berkas tunggal dan mode batch didukung Untuk informasi lebih lanjut silakan kunjungi halaman utilitas di situs GDAL http www gdal org gdalwarp html Ekstrak Utilitas ini membantu Anda untuk mengekstrak informasi proyeksi dari berkas masukan proyeksi Jika Anda ingin mengambil proyeksi dari seluruh direktori Anda dapat menggunakan mode Batch Ini menciptakan kedua berkas prj dan wld 19 8 Plugin Alat GDAL 229 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Konversi gt Program ini membakar vektor geometri titik garis dan poligon ke pita raster dari gambar Rasterize raster Vektor dibaca dari OGR yang didukung format vektor Perhatikan bahwa data vektor harus sama sistem koordinat dengan data raster pada proyeksi ulang fly tidak disediakan Untuk informasi lebih lanjut lihat http www gdal org gdal rasterize html oe Poly Utilitas ini menciptakan vektor poligon untuk semua daerah piksel terhubung di raster berbagi gonize nilai umum pixel Setiap poligon dibuat dengan atribut yang menunjukkan nilai pixel poligon itu Utilitas akan menciptakan keluaran sumber data vektor jika tidak sudah ada default ke format shapefile ESRI Lihat juga http www gdal org gdal
269. i diubah menjadi jenis Python asli untuk membuat API yang jauh lebih baik Akses atribut kini dilakukan pada fitur itu sendiri menggunakan kunci pencarian sederhana indeks pencarian dan atribut peta Code compatibility with version 1 x releases Ini adalah rilis utama tidak sepenuhnya API kompati bel dengan rilis sebelum 1 x Dalam kebanyakan kasus port kode Anda harus cukup jelas Anda dapat menggunakan panduan ini untuk memulai Silakan memanfaatkan mailing list pengembang jika Anda membutuhkan bantuan Python project macros Modul Python tersimpan di dalam berkas project qgs dapat dimuat dan men jalankan fungsi khusus pada proyek berikut openProject saveProject and closeProject Macro yang dijalankan dapat dikonfigurasi dalam pilihan aplikasi Bab 5 Apa yang baru pada QGIS 2 0 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 5 7 Alat Analisis e Processing Commander Untuk akses cepat ke fungsi geoprocessing cukup menjalankan perintah pengo lahan Ctrl Alt M dan mulai mengetik nama alat yang Anda cari Perintah akan menunjukkan pilihan yang tersedia dan menjalankan mereka untuk Anda Tidak ada lagi cara mencari melalui menu untuk men emukan alat tool Sekarang ada di ujung jari Anda Heatmap Plugin Improvements Plugin heatmap telah dilakukan banyak perbaikan dan optimisasi se hingg dalam pembuatan hasilnya lebih cepat Selain itu Anda sekarang memiliki pilihan fungsi kernel yang digunakan untuk membuat heatmap e Dukungan Pengolah
270. i dock window dibutuhkan restart OGIS e Tentukan Mode standar snap La Simpul Segmen Simpul dan Segmen Mati e Tentukan Default toleransi snapping dalam satuan peta atau pixel e Tentukan Cari radius untuk suntingan simpul dalam satuan peta atau pixel 52 Bab 9 Konfigurasi QGIS QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Penanda simpul amp Tampilkan penanda hanya untk fitur yang dipilih e Tentukan simpul Gaya Penanda ta aa Palang standar Lingkaran semi transparan atau Tidak ada e Tentukan simpul Ukuran Penanda Alat ofset kurva 3 pilihan berikutnya mengacu pada Kurva Ofset alat di Advanced digitizing Melalui berbagai pengaturan ini mungkin untuk mempengaruhi bentuk garis ofset Pilihan pilhan ini dari GEOS 3 3 e Gabung gaya untuk ofset kurva e Segmen Quadrant untuk ofset kurva e Batas Miter untuk ofset kurva 9 3 8 Menu GDAL GDAL adalah data pertukaran librari untuk berkas raster Dalam tab ini Anda dapat Edit opsi membuat dan Edit Opsi Pyramid dari format raster Menentukan driver GDAL yang akan digunakan untuk format raster seperti dalam beberapa kasus lebih dari satu driver GDAL tersedia 9 3 9 Menu CRS CRS standar untuk proyek baru E Secara otomatis mengaktifkan on the fly proyeksi ulang jika lapisan memiliki beda CRS 3 Aktfikan proyeksi ulang on the fly secara standar e Pilih sebuah CRS dan Selalui mulai proyek baru dengan CRS ini CRS untuk lapisan baru Daerah ini memu
271. i yang nyaman Jika Anda tidak memilih kotak centang untuk memasang contoh dataset selama instalasi QGIS Anda dapat e menggunakan data GIS yang Anda miliki e unduh contoh data di http download osgeo org ggis data ggis sample data zip atau e hapus uninstall OGIS dan memasang ulang dengan opsi unduh data hanya jika solusi di atas tidak berhasil X untuk GNU Linux dan Mac OSX belum ada paket instalasi dataset yang tersedia sebagai rpm deb atau dmg Untuk menggunakan contoh dataset unduh berkas ZIP qgis_sample_data di http download osgeo org qgis data qgis_sample_data zip dan ekstrak arsip ZIP di sistem Anda Dataset Alas ka mencakup semua data GIS yang digunakan sebagai contoh dan cuplikan layar di buku panduan dan termasuk 17 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 basis data kecil GRASS Proyeksi contoh dataset QGIS adalah Alaska Albers Equal Area dengan satuan kaki feet Kode EPSG 2964 PROJCS Albers Equal Area GEOGCS NAD27 DATUM North_American_Datum_1927 SPHEROID Clarke 1866 6378206 4 294 978698213898 AUTHORITY BPSG 7006 I J TOWGS84 3 142 183 0 0 0 0 AUTHORITY EPSG 6267 PRIMEM Greenwich 0O AUTHORITY EPSG 6901 1 UNIT degree 0 0174532925199433 AUTHORITY EPSG 91086 1 AUTHORITY EPSG 4267 11 PROJECTION Albers_Conic_Equal_Area PARAMETER standard_parallel_1 55 PARAMETER standard parallel 2 65J PARAMETER latitude of center 501 PARAMETER longitude of center
272. ible for relicensing ADDENDUM How to use this License for your documents To use this License in a document you have written include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME Permission is granted to copy distribute and or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License Version 1 3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections no Front Cover Texts and no Back Cover Texts A copy of the license is included in the section entitled GNU Free Documentation License If you have Invariant Sections Front Cover Texts and Back Cover Texts replace the with Texts line with this with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES with the Front Cover Texts being LIST and with the Back Cover Texts being LIST If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts or some other combination of the three merge those two alternatives to suit the situation If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license such as the GNU General Public License to permit their use in free software 21 2 GNU Free Documentation License 261 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 262 Bab 21 Appendix BAB 22 Literatur dan Referensi Web GDAL SOFTWARE SUITE Geospatial data ab
273. ic visualization rules introduced manually As the configuration is performed with the SLD standard and its documented extensions there is only one standardised language to learn which greatly simplifies the complexity of creating maps for the Web In one of the following manuals we will provide a sample configuration to set up a QGIS Server But for now we recommend to read one of the following URLs to get more information e http karlinapp ethz ch qgis_wms e http hub qgis org projects quantum gis wiki QGIS_Server_Tutorial e http linfiniti com 2010 08 qgis mapserver a wms server for the masses 14 2 1 Sample installation on Debian Squeeze At this point we will give a short and simple sample installation howto for Debian Squeeze Many other OS provide packages for QGIS Server too If you have to build it all from source please refer to the URLs above Apart from QGIS and QGIS Server you need a webserver in our case apache2 You can install all pack ages with aptitude or apt get install together with other necessary dependency packages After installation you should test if the webserver and QGIS Server works as expected Make sure the apache server is running with etc init d apache2 start Open a web browser and type URL http localhost If apache is up you should see the message It works Now we test the QGIS Server installation The ggis mapserv fcgi is available at usr lib cgi bin ggis mapserv fcgi and provides a sta
274. ide Rilis 2 0 Legend items The Legend items dialog of the legend Item Properties tab provides following functionalities see fig ure composer 15 v Legend items Update item Update all 1 2 v airports Hidden P popp Hidden majrivers Hidden P regions Hidden gt alaska Hidden lakes Hidden gt swamp Hidden gt storagep Hidden Via 2 eS A z Auto Update Gambar 18 15 Legend Legend Items Dialog 8 e The legend items window lists all legend items and allows to change item order group layers remove and restore items of the list edit layer names After changing the symbology in the QGIS main window you can click on Update to adapt the changes in the legend element of the print composer The item order can be changed using the Up and Down buttons or with drag and drop functionality e The feature count for each vector layer can be shown by enable the Sigma button e Legend can be updated automatically fF Auto update is checked Fonts Columns Symbol and Spacing The Fonts Columns Symbol and Spacing dialogs of the legend Item Properties tab provide following functional ities see figure_composer_16 You can change the font of the legend title group subgroup and item layer in the legend item Click on a category button to open a Select font dialog All those items will get the same Color e Legend items can be arranged in several columns Select the correct value in the Count 190
275. ifikasi pilih fitur Sunting lihat cari atribut QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 e Pelabelan Fitur juga data yang didefinisikan e Perubahan simbologi vektor dan raster juga data yang didefinisikan e Penambahan lapisan graticule untuk membuat komposisi peta atlas e Hiasi peta Anda dengan panah arah utara bar skala dan label hak cipta e Menyimpan dan mengembalikan proyek 4 3 Membuat menyunting mengelola dan ekspor data Anda dapat membuat mengedit mengelola dan ekspor lapisan vektor dan raster dalam beberapa format OGIS menawarkan misalnya sebagai berikut e Alat Digitalisasi yang didukung format OGR dan lapisan vektor GRASS e Membuat dan menyunting shapefile dan lapisan vektor GRASS e Geocode gambar dengan Plugin Georeferencer e Alat GPS untuk mengimpor dan mengekspor format GPX dan mengkonversi format GPS lain ke GPX atau unduh unggah langsung ke unit GPS di Linux usb telah ditambahkan ke daftar perangkat GPS e Memvisualisasikan dan mengedit data OpenStreetMap e Membuat tabel basis data spasial dari shapefile dengan Plugin Pengelola DB e Peningkatan penanganan tabel basis data spasial e Mengelola tabel atribut vektor e Simpan cuplikan layar sebagai gambar bergeoreferensi 4 4 Analisis data Anda dapat melakukan analisis data spasial pada basis data spasial dan format OGR lain yang didukung OGIS saat ini menawarkan analisis vektor sampling geoprocessing geometri dan aplikasi manajemen basis data Anda juga dapat menggun
276. ifkan plugin inti tertentu klik kotak centang di sebelah kiri nama plugin dan klik OK Ketika Anda keluar dari aplikasi daftar plugin yang dimuat tetap dipertahankan dan plugin secara otomatis dimuat Memuat Plugin eksternal QGIS Plugin Eksternal QGIS ditulis dengan Python Secara tetap disimpan baik dalam Repositori Resmi QGIS atau dalam berbagai repositori eksternal lainnya yang dikelola oleh masing masing penulis Anda dapat menemukan plugin eksternal dalam menu 13 Get more 211 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 ry J installed Plugins gt Installed 28 D Get more gt Coordinate Capture Installed Plugins Sak settings amp EM ps Manager Search in names descriptions tags authors On the left you see the list of installed plugins on your ts Dxf2Shp Converter system Both python and cpp plugins are listed Some plugins come with your QGIS installation while most of ka evis them are made available via the plugin repositories g You can temporarily enable or disable a plugin To enable Ti 6 GdalTools or disable a plugin click its checkbox or doubleclick its vw TE Georeferencer GDAL a Globe Plugins showing in red are not loaded because there is a afin problem Consult the Invalid tab to see more details or ing GPS Tools to reinstall or uninstall this plugin amp A crass Heatmap yi Interpolation plugin g as Layer to labeled layer g Fa Multipart Split 7 OfflineEditing Ti O OpenLayers Plugin
277. ih nomor n dari fitur atau persentase n dari fitur Random Seleksi acak Secara acak memilih fitur dalam subset berdasarkan kolom ID unik dalam subset Poin Acak Menghasilkan poin pseudo acak atas masukan lapisan yang diberikan Poin reguler Menghasilkan kotak biasa dari poin atas wilayah tertentu dan ekspor mereka sebagai titik shapefile Kotak vektor Menghasilkan kotak garis atau poligon yang didasarkan pada pengguna jaringan jarak tertentu Pilih dari Pilih fitur berdasarkan lokasi relatif mereka terhadap lapisan lain untuk membentuk lokasi pilihan baru atau menambah atau mengurangi dari pilihan saat ini Poligon dari Buat layer poligon persegi panjang tunggal dari luasnya sebuah masukan lapisan lapisan batas raster atau lapisan vektor Tabel Ftools 2 fTools Research tools 19 7 3 Peralatan Geoprocessing Ikon Alat Kegunaan JJ JEIISSSSEHR SN Convex hull s Buat convex hull minimum untuk masukan lapisan atau berdasarkan kolom ID Penyangga Buat penyangga sekitar fitur berdasarkan jarak atau kolom jarak Memotong Tampilan lapisan lapisan seperti keluaran berisi daerah di mana kedua lapisan berpotongan Penggabungan Tampilan lapisan lapisan seperti keluaran berisi daerah berpotongan dan non berpotongan Perbedaan Tampilan lapisan seperti keluaran berisi daerah daerah dari masukan dan simetrik perbedaan lapisan yang tidak berpotongan Klip Tampilan lapisan seperti keluaran berisi daerah yang bersinggungan lapisan klip
278. ilis 2 0 saving the script i e you discard it the help content you wrote will be lost If your script was already saved and is associated to a filename saving is done automatically 17 5 5 Pre and post execution script hooks Scripts can also be used to set pre and post execution hooks that are run before and after an algorithm is run This can be used to automate tasks that should be performed whenever an algorithm is executed The syntax is identical to the syntax explained above but an additional global variable named alg is available representing the algorithm that has just been or is about to be executed In the General group of the processing config dialog you will find two entries named Pre execution script file and Post execution script file where the filename of the scripts to be run in each case can be entered 17 6 The history manager 17 6 1 The processing history Every time you execute an algorithm information about the process is stored in the history manager Along with the parameters used the date and time of the execution are also saved This way it is easy to track the and control all the work that has been developed using the processing framework and easily reproduce it The history manager is a set of registry entries grouped according to their date of execution making it easier to find information about an algorithm executed at any particular moment E aa INFO Thu Oct 10 2013 13 07 47 GRASS exec
279. ill see some algorithms in the modeler that are not found in the toolbox This algorithms are meant to be used exclusively as part of a model and they are of no interest in a different context The Calculator algorithm is an example of that It is just a simple arithmetic calculator that you can use to modify numerical values entered by the user or generated by some other algorithm This tools is really useful within a model but outside of that context it doesn t make too much sense 17 3 8 Saving models as Python code Given a model it is possible to automatically create Python code that performs the same task as the model itself This code is used to create a console script we will explain them later in this manual and you can modify that script to incorporate actions and methods not available in the graphical modeler such as loops or conditional sentences 17 3 The graphical modeler 171 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 This feature is also a very practical way of learning how to use processign algorithms from the console and how to create new algorithms using Python code so you can use it as a learning tool when you start creating your own scripts Save your model in the models folder and go to the toolbox where it should appear now ready to be run Right click on the model name and select Save as Python script in the context menu that will pop up A dialog will prompt you to introduce the file where you want to save the script
280. imuat 28 Bab 7 QGIS GUI QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 7 1 12 Bantuan oe SCORUL 9 Konten Bantuan F1 Bantuan k Apakah ini Shift F1 Bantuan Dokumentasi API Butuh dukungan Q lgg Beranda Ctrl H y Periksa versi lggl y Tentang Sponsor Iggl Harap dicatat bahwa untuk Linux rs item Menu Bar yang tercantum di atas adalah yang standar di window manager KDE Di GNOME menu Pengaturan memiliki isi yang berbeda dan item bisa ditemukan di sini LA Properti Proyek Proyek amp Opsi Edit Konfigurasi Shortcuts Edit Pengelola Gaya Edit Ea Modifikasi CRS Edit Panel Tampilan Toolbar Tampilan Toggle Mode Layar Penuh Tampilan Slider Skala Tile Tampilan Pelacakan GPS Tampilan 7 2 Toolbar Toolbar menyediakan akses ke sebagian besar fungsi yang sama seperti menu ditambah alat tambahan untuk berinteraksi dengan peta Setiap item toolbar memiliki popup bantuan yang tersedia Tahan tetikus anda ke atas item dan deskripsi singkat mengenai tujuan alat itu akan ditampilkan Setiap menubar dipindah kesekitarnya sesuai dengan kebutuhan Anda Selain itu setiap menubar dapat dimatikan menggunakan tombol kanan tetikus pada menu konteks Anda arahkan tetikus ke toolbar baca juga Panel dan Toolbar Tip Mengembalikan toolbar Jika Anda tidak sengaja telah menyembunyikan semua toolbar Anda Anda dapat mengembalikan nya dengan memilih menu opsi Pengaturan Toolbar Jika toolbar menghilang di bawah OS Windows t
281. ing means descending values from the top row down upward pointing means ascending values from the top row down For a simple search by attributes on only one column choose the Column filter from the menu in the bottom left corner Select the field column from which the search should be performed from the dropdown menu and hit the Apply button Then only the matching features are shown in the Attribute table To make a selection you have to use the Ge Select features using an Expression icon on top of the Attribute table The Ge Select features using an Expression allows you to define a subset of a table using a Function List like in the HA aa see Field Calculator The guery result then can be saved as a new vector layer For example if you want to find regions that are boroughs from the regions shp of the OGIS sample data you have to open the gt Fields and Values menu and choose the field that you want to query Double klick the field TYPE 2 and also Load all unique values From list choose and double klick Borough In the Expression field the following query appears 12 3 Editing 105 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 TYPE 2 borough The matching rows will be selected and the total number of matching rows will appear in the title bar of the attribute table and in the status bar of the main window For searches that display only selected features on the map use the Query Builder described in Section Query Builder T
282. into a GRASS LOCATION This Section gives an example how to import raster and vector data into the alaska GRASS LOCATION provided by the QGIS Alaska dataset Therefore we use a landcover raster map landcover img and a vector GML file lakes gml from the QGIS Alaska dataset Contoh data 1 Start QGIS and make sure the GRASS plugin is loaded 2 In the GRASS toolbar click the Ed Open MAPSET icon to bring up the MAPSET wizard 3 Select as GRASS database the folder grassdata in the QGIS alaska dataset as LOCATION alaska as MAPSET demo and click OK 4 Now click the M Open GRASS tools icon The GRASS Toolbox see section The GRASS toolbox dialog appears 5 To import the raster map Landcover img click the module r in gdal in the Modules Tree tab This GRASS module allows to import GDAL supported raster files into a GRASS LOCATION The module dialog for r in gdal appears 6 Browse to the folder raster in the QGIS Alaska dataset and select the file Landcover img 7 As raster output name define landcover grass and click Run In the Output tab you see the currently running GRASS command r in gdal o input path to landcover img output landcover_grass 8 When it says Succesfully finished click View output The landcover_grass raster layer is now imported into GRASS and will be visualized in the QGIS canvas 9 To import the vector GML file lakes gml click the module v in ogr in the Modules
283. ion about the mailinglists Tip Finding WFS Servers You can find additional WFS servers by using Google or your favorite search engine There are a number of lists with public URLs some of them maintained and some not 14 2 QGIS as OGC Data Server QGIS Server is an open source WMS 1 3 and WES 1 0 0 implementation which in addition implements advanced cartographic features for thematic mapping The QGIS Server is a FastCGI CGI Common Gateway Interface application written in C that works together with a webserver e g Apache Lighttpd It is funded by the EU projects Orchestra Sany and the city of Uster in Switzerland It uses QGIS as backend for the GIS logic and for map rendering Furthermore the Qt library is used for graphics and for platform independent C programming In contrast to other WMS software the QGIS Server uses carto graphic rules as a configuration language both for the server configuration and for the user defined cartographic rules Moreover the QGIS Server project provides the Publish to Web plugin a plugin for QGIS desktop which exports the current layers and symbology as a web project for QGIS Server containing cartographic visualization rules expressed in SLD As QGIS desktop and QGIS Server use the same visualization libraries the maps that are published on the web look the same as in desktop GIS The Publish to Web plugin currently supports basic symbolization with more complex cartograph
284. ion to the console which includes the percentage of processing already done along with additional content This output is filtered and used to update the progress bar while the algorithm is running Both the commands sent by QGIS and the additional information printed by SAGA can be logged along with other processing log messages and you might find them useful to track in detailed what is going on when QGIS runs a SAGA algorithm you will find two settings namely Log console output and Log execution commands to activate that logging mechanism Most other providers that use an external application and call it through the command line have similar options so you will find them as well in other places in the processing settings list R Creating R scripts R integration in QGIS is different from that of SAGA in that there is not a predefined set of algorithms you can run except for a few examples Instead you should write your scripts and call R commands much like you would do from R and in a very similar manner to what we saw in the chapter dedicated to processing scripts This chapter shows you the syntax to use to call those R commands from QGIS and how to use QGIS objects layers tables in them The first thing you have to do as we saw in the case of SAGA is to tell QGIS where you R binaries are located You can do so using the R folder entry in the processing configuration dialog Once you have set that parameter you can start creati
285. is 2 0 Visible Whether or not this layer is selected as visible in the legend Not yet used in this version of QGIS Can Identify Whether or not this layer will return any results when the Identify tool is used on it Can be Transparent Whether or not this layer can be rendered with transparency This version of QGIS will always use transparency if this is Yes and the image encoding supports transparency Can Zoom In Whether or not this layer can be zoomed in by the server This version of QGIS assumes all WMS layers have this set to Yes Deficient layers may be rendered strangely Cascade Count WMS servers can act as a proxy to other WMS servers to get the raster data for a layer This entry shows how many times the request for this layer is forwarded to peer WMS servers for a result Fixed Width Fixed Height Whether or not this layer has fixed source pixel dimensions This version of QGIS assumes all WMS layers have this set to nothing Deficient layers may be rendered strangely WGS 84 Bounding Box The bounding box of the layer in WGS 84 coordinates Some WMS servers do not set this correctly e g UTM coordinates are used instead If this is the case then the initial view of this layer may be rendered with a very zoomed out appearance by QGIS The WMS webmaster should be informed of this error which they may know as the WMS XML elements Lat LonBoundingBox EX_GeographicBoun
286. is 2 0 But what about if the relative path need to be relative to the saved project file The code of the Python action would be command firefox imagerelpath images test_image jpg projectpath qgis core QgsProject instance fileName import os path path os path dirname str projectpath if projectpath else None image os path join path imagerelpath import subprocess subprocess Popen command image Another Python actions example if the one that allows us to add new layers to the project For instance the following examples will add to the project respectively a vector and a raster The name of files to be added to the project and the name to be given to the layer are data driven filename and layname are column names of the table of attributes of the vector where the action was created qgis utils iface addVectorLayer yourpath filename shp IS layername ogr To add a raster a tif image in this example it becomes qgis utils iface addRasterLayer yourpath filename tif layername 12 2 7 Joins Menu GH The Joins menu allows you to join a loaded attribute table to a loaded vector layer After clicking Ch the Add vector join dialog appears As key columns you have to define a join layer you want to connect with the target vector layer a join field that corresponds to an attribute column in the target layer and a target field you find in the
287. isajikan dalam enam kategori untuk mendapatkan wawasan pertama 4 1 Lihat data Anda dapat melihat dan overlay data vektor dan raster dalam format dan proyeksi yang berbeda tanpa konversi ke format internal maupun umum Format yang didukung termasuk 4 2 Spasial enabled tabel dan tampilan menggunakan PostGIS SpatiaLite dan MSSQL Spasial Oracle Spasial format vektor yang didukung oleh library OGR termasuk ESRI shapefile MapInfo SDTS GML dan banyak lagi lihat bagian Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor Format raster dan citra yang didukung dengan terpasangnya GDAL Geospatial Data Abstraction Library perpustakaan seperti GeoTiff Erdas Img ArcInfo Ascii Grid JPEG PNG dan banyak lagi lihat bagian Pekerjaan dengan Data Raster QGIS kerangka pengolahan untuk memanggil ratusan algoritma pihak asli dan ketiga dari QGIS lihat bagian Processing Pengantar Data raster dan vektor GRASS dari basis data GRASS lokasi mapset lihat bagian GRASS GIS Integration Online data spasial sebagai Layanan OGC Web seperti WMS WMTS WCS WES WES T lihat bagian Pekerjaan dengan Data OGC Data OpenStreetMap lihat bagian plugins osm Jelajahi data dan menyusun peta Anda dapat membuat peta interaktif dan mengeksplorasi data spasial dengan GUI yang ramah Banyak alat yang tersedia di GUI termasuk misalnya QGIS peramban web On the fly proyeksi ulang Pengelola DB Penyusun Peta Panel Peninjau Bookmark spasial Annotation tools Ident
288. isplayed one below the other with a circle or a box and dividers In the Size tab diagram size is based on a fixed size or on linear scaling according to a classification attribute The placement of the diagrams which is done in the Position tab interacts with the new labeling so position conflicts between diagrams and labels are detected and solved In addition to chart positions can be fixed by the users hand Layer Properties climate Di nr General aras amp Display diagrams wy Style Diagram type abc Text diagram Priority Low High abe Labels Labels Appearance Size Position Options deprecated Fields M Fixed size 18 00000 CJ Display Size units mm Q Actions K Joins 7 Diagrams Metadata Attributes Available attributes Assigned attributes Attribute Attribute Color ID T_F_JAN STATION T_F_JUL T_F_JAN TF MEAN Restore Default Style Save As Default Load Style Save Style v Help Apply Cancel OK Gambar 12 28 Vector properties dialog with diagram menu 4b We will demonstrate an example and overlay the alaska boundary layer a text diagram showing some temperature data from a climate vector layer Both vector layers are part of the QGIS sample dataset see Section Contoh data 92 First click on the Va Load Vector icon browse to the QGIS sample dataset folder and load the two vector shape layers alaska shp and climate shp Double click the climate layer in the map legend to o
289. its coordinate reference system or you have to define a global layer or project wide CRS For PostGIS layers QGIS uses the spatial reference identifier that was specified when the layer was created For data supported by OGR QGIS relies on the presence of a recognized means of specifying the CRS In the case of shapefiles this means a file containing the Well Known Text WKT specification of the CRS This projection file has the same base name as the shapefile and a prj extension For example a shapefile named alaska shp would have a corresponding projection file named alaska prj Whenever you select a new CRS the used layer units will automatically be changed in the General menu of the S Project Properties dialog under the Project Gnome OSX or Settings KDE Windows menu 10 2 Global Projection Specification QGIS starts each new project using the global default projection The global default CRS is EPSG 4326 WGS 84 proj longlat tellps WGS84 datum WGS84 no_defs and comes predefined in QGIS This default can be changed using the Select button in the first section used to defining the Default Coordinate Reference System to use when starting new projects as shown in figure projection 1 This choice will be saved for use in subsequent QGIS sessions When you use layers that do not have a CRS you need to define how QGIS responds to these layers This can be done globally or project wide in the CRS menu under Settings Options
290. izing steps When Undo is hit the state of all features and attributes are reverted to the state before the reverted operation happened Changes other than normal vector editing operations for example changes done by a plugin may or may not be reverted depending on how the changes were performed To use the undo redo history widget simply click to select an operation in the history list all features will be reverted to the state they were in after the selected operation Rotate Feature s Use the Rote Feature s to rotate one or multiple selected features in the map canvas You first need to select the features and then press the Route Feature s Icon Then the centroid of the feature appears and will be the rotation anchor point If you selected multiple features the rotation anchor point will be the common center of the features Press and drag the left mouse button in the desired direction to rotate the selected features It s also possible to create a user defined rotation anchor point by which the selected feature will rotate Select the features to rotate and activate the Broa Feature s Tool Press and hold the Ct rl button and move the mouse 100 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 pointer without pressing the mouse button to the place where you want the rotation anchor to be moved Release the Ct r 1 button when the desired rotation anchor point is reached Now press and drag the left mouse bu
291. ject To turn them into a QGIS object you can use the processing getObjectFromUri function Multiple inputs also have a string value which contains the filepaths to all selected object separated by semicolons Outputs are defined in a similar manner using the following tags Output output output output output Output output raster vector table html file number Serang The value assigned to the output variables is always a string with a filepath It will correspond to a temporary filepath in case the user has not entered any output filename When you declare an output the algorithm will try to add it to QGIS once it is finished That is the reason why although the runalg method does not load the layers it produces the final TWI layer will be loaded since it is saved to the file entered by the user which is the value of the corresponding output Do not use the load method in your script algorithms but just when working with the console line If a layer is created as output of an algorithm it should be declared as such Otherwise you will not be able to properly use the algorithm in the modeler since its syntax as defined by the tags explained above will not match what the algorithm really creates Hidden outputs numbers and strings do not have a value Instead it is you who has to assign a value to them To do so just set the value of a variable with the name you used to declare that output For instan
292. k penggantian nilai data Dukungan banyak halaman Multipage Sebuah jendela penyusun peta tunggal kini dapat berisi lebih dari satu halaman Expressions in composer labels Item penyusun label pada versi 1 8 sangat terbatas dan hanya diper bolehkan tanda tunggal CURRENT DATE yang digunakan Pada versi 2 0 telah ditambahkan dukungan ekspresi penuh dengan keleluasaan mengelola label akhir Dukungan tampilan otomatis dalam bingkai peta Perlu menunjukkan daerah saat ini pada bingkai peta utama di jendela tampilan yang lebih kecil Sekarang bingkai peta memiliki kemampuan untuk menun jukkan luasan dan akan memperbarui ketika pindah Dengan menggunakan fitur pembuat atlas sekarang inti dalam penyusun peta memungkinkan untuk menghasilkan beberapa peta Sekilas gaya bingkai meng gunakan gaya yang sama sebagai objek peta poligon normal sehingga kreativitas Anda tidak pernah dibatasi Menggabung Lapisan Layer blending Menggabung lapisan memungkinkan untuk menggabungkan lapisan layer dalam cara cara baru dan menarik Sementara di versi lama semua dapat Anda lakukan untuk membuat lapisan transparan kini Anda dapat memilih seperti multiply darken only dan masih banyak lagi Penggabungan blending dapat digunakan dalam tampilan peta normal maupun di penyusun peta cetak Untuk panduan singkat tentang cara menggunakan penggabungan blending di penyusun peta cetak untuk membuat gambar latar belakang lihat Vintage map design using QG
293. kan kolom kustom namun secara default akan menampilkan tiga jenis informasi e Aksi aksi Aksi aksi ditambahkan untuk mengidentifikasi fitur windows Ketika mengklik pada aksi label aksi akan berjalan Secara default hanya satu tindakan ditambahkan untuk meihat form fitur untuk mengedit e Derived informasi mereka dihitung atau berasal dari informasi lainnya Anda bisa menemukan koordinat diklik koordinat X dan Y area di unit dan parameter peta dalam unit peta untuk poligon panjang unit peta untuk garis dan id fitur e Data atribut Daftar kolom atribut dari data Identify Results Feature v Value vo regions y v Actions View feature form v Derived clicked 312603 165438 36 Area 69 138 048 km featureid 13 Perimeter 3 298 416 km HASC 2 US AK LA NAME 1 Alaska NAME 2 Lake and Peninsula TYPE 2 Borough GG wa Help Close Gambar 8 1 Dialog identifikasi fitur A Gnome Di bagian bawah dari jendela Anda memiliki lima ikon A EF Expand tree A ei Collapse tree 35 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Default behaviour Salin atribut U Print selected HTML response Fitur selebihnya dapat ditemukan dalam tampilan menu dengan klik kanan tetikus pada suatu tempat dengan respon pohon Menu ini memungkinkan untuk e Lihat form fitur e Perbesar ke fitur 8 2 Salin fitur salin semua fitur geometri dan atribut Salin nilai atribut hanya menyalin nilai dari atribut Anda klik Salin atribut
294. ke aplikasi Banyak fitur di QGIS benar benar diterapkan sebagai salah satu inti atau plugin eksternal e Plugin Inti dikelola oleh Tim Pengembang QGIS dan secara otomatis bagian dari setiap distribusi QGIS Ditulis dalam salah satu dari dua bahasa C atau Python Informasi lebih lanjut tentang plugin inti disediakan dalam Bagian Menggunakan OGIS Plugin Inti e Plugin Eksternal saat ini semua ditulis dengan Python Mereka disimpan dalam repositori eksternal dan dipelihara oleh penulis individu Dapat ditambahkan ke QGIS di 13 Get more Bagian dari Plugin Manager Informasi lebih lanjut tentang plugin eksternal disediakan dalam Bagian Memuat Plugin eksternal OGIS 19 1 1 Mengelola Plugin Mengelola plugin secara umum berarti bongkar atau muat dengan menggunakan Plugin Manager Untuk menon aktifkan dan mengaktifkan plugin eksternal Plugin Manager digunakan kembali Memuat QGIS Plugin Inti Memuat OGIS Plugin Inti dilakukan dari menu utama Plugins xs Manage and Install Plugins Manage and Install Plugins Menu Installed dari daftar Plugin Manager semua plugin yang tersedia dan status mereka dimuat atau di bongkar termasuk semua plugin inti dan semua plugin eksternal yang telah dipasang dan diaktifkan secara otoma tis dengan menggunakan xs menu Get more lihat Bagian Memuat Plugin eksternal OGIS Plugin yang sudah dimuat memiliki tanda centang di sebelah kiri nama mereka Figure_plugins_ 1 menunjukkan Installed dialog Untuk mengakt
295. kinkan untuk mengedit berkas diluar QGIS jika Anda tahu apa yang Anda lakukan Format berkas telah diperbaharui beberapa kali dibanding versi QGIS se belumnya Berkas proyek dari versi QGIS yang lebih tua mungkin tidak bekerja dengan baik lagi Harus dibuat sadar akan hal ini di Umum tab under Pengaturan Opsi Anda dapat memilih A Prompt untuk menyimpan proyek dan perubahan sumber data bila diperlukan C Peringatkan ketika membuka berkas proyek QGIS yang disimpan dengan versi lama 6 7 Keluaran Output Ada beberapa cara untuk menghasilkan keluaran output dari sesi QGIS Anda Kita telah membahasnya pada Bagian Proyek menyimpan berkas proyek Berikut ini adalah contoh cara lain untuk menghasilkan keluaran output berkas e Menu opsi Proyek 4g Simpan sebagai Gambar membuka dialog berkas di mana Anda memilih nama path dan jenis gambar format PNG atau JPG Sebuah berkas dengan ekstensi PNGW atau JPGW disimpan dalam folder sama dengan gambar yang mempunyai georeferensi e Menu opsi Proyek Penyusun Cetak Baru membuka dialog di mana Anda dapat me layout dan menc etak kanvas peta saat ini lihat Bagian Print Composer 6 6 Proyek 21 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 22 Bab 6 Memulai BAB QGIS GUI Ketika QGIS dimulai Anda akan disajikan tampilan GUI seperti gambar dibawah ini nomer 1 sampai 5 dalam lingkaran kuning mengacu pada 5 area utama antarmuka yang dibahas dibawah ini Quantum GIS 8268aa3 Project Edit View L
296. ksi gaya seragam di seluruh panduan Konvensi yang digunakan dalam panduan ini adalah sebagai berikut 2 1 Konvensi GUI Gaya konvensi GUI dimaksudkan untuk meniru tampilan GUI Secara umum tujuannya adalah untuk menggu nakan penampilan non hover sehingga pengguna dapat memindai visual GUI untuk menemukan sesuatu yang tampak seperti perintah di panduan Menu Pilihan Lapisan Tambah Lapisan Raster atau menuselection Pengaturan gt Toolbar gt Digital isasi Alat a Tambah Lapisan Raster Tombol Simpan sebagai Default Kotak Judul Properti Lapisan Tab Umum Kotak Centang fF Render Tombol Radio 2 Postgis SRID EPSG ID Pilih Nomor 1 00 Pilih String l Lihat Berkas Pilih Warna Border color Change Slider Masukkan Teks Display name lakes shp Sebuah bayangan menunjukkan komponen GUI yang dapat diklik 2 2 Konvensi Teks atau Papan Ketik Panduan ini juga mencakup gaya yang berhubungan dengan teks perintah papan ketik dan pemrograman cod ing untuk menunjukkan entitas yang berbeda seperti kelas atau metode Mereka tidak sesuai dengan setiap penampilan yang sebenarnya Pranala http qgis org QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 e Kombinasi Keystroke tekan Ct r1 B artinya tekan dan tahan tombol Ctrl dan tekan tombol B e Nama Berkas lakes shp e Nama Kelas LapisanBaru e Metode classFactory e Server myhost de e Teks Pengguna ggis help Baris kode ditunjukkan dengan
297. ktifkan show georeferencer window docked Menjalankan transformasi Setelah semua GCPs telah dikumpulkan dan semua pengaturan transformasi didefinisikan tekan tombol b Mulai Georeferensi untuk membuat raster baru bergeoreferensi 19 10 Plugin Interpolasi Plugin Interpolasi dapat digunakan untuk membuat interpolasi TIN atau IDW dari suatu layer vektor titik Plugin ini sangat sederhana serta menyediakan tampilan antarmuka yang intuitif untuk membuat layer raster terinterpolasi lihat Figure interpolation 1 Plugin ini memerlukan parameter parameter berikut sebelum dapat dijalankan 19 10 Plugin Interpolasi 235 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Masukan Lapisan lapisan Vektor Tentukan masukan lapisan vektor titik dari daftar lapisan titik yang dimuat Jika beberapa lapisan ditentukan maka data dari semua lapisan yang digunakan untuk interpolasi Catatan Hal ini dimungkinkan untuk menyisipkan baris atau poligon untuk triangulasi dengan menentukan titik garis struktur atau baris break dalam combobox Tipe ki e Atribut interpolasi Pilih kolom atribut untuk digunakan dalam interpolasi atau aktifkan checkbox C Gunakan koordinat Z untuk menggunakan nilai Z yang tersimpan pada layer e Metode Interpolasi Pilih metode interpolasi Pilihannya antara lain Triangulated Irregular Network TINY atau Inverse Distance Weighted IDW e Jumlah kolom baris masukkan jumlah kolom dan baris untuk file raster keluaran e
298. l purposes 4 Filter if you know the EPSG code the identifier or the name for a Coordinate Reference System you can use the search feature to find it Enter the EPSG code the identifier or the name 5 Recently used CRS if you have certain CRS that you frequently use in your everyday GIS work these will be displayed in the table at the bottom of the Projection Dialog Click on one of these buttons to select the associated CRS Tip Project Properties Dialog If you open the Project Properties dialog from the Project Gnome OSX or Settings KDE Windows menu you must click on the CRS menu to view the Coordinate Reference System settings Sg CRS status icon will also automatically bring the CRS menu to the front 10 4 Custom Coordinate Reference System If QGIS Kuan not provide the coordinate reference system you need you can define a custom CRS To define a CRS select D Custom CRS from the Settings menu Custom CRS are stored in your QGIS user database In addition to your custom CRS this database also contains your spatial bookmarks and other custom data Defining a custom CRS in QGIS requires a good understanding of the Proj 4 projection library To begin refer to the Cartographic Projection Procedures for the UNIX Environment A User s Manual by Gerald I Evenden U S Geological Survey Open File Report 90 284 1990 available at ftp ftp remotesensing org proj OF90 284 pdf 10 4 Custom Coordinate Reference Syst
299. lable options check 2 File Click on button Browse That will bring up a standard open file dialog see figure vector 2 which allows you to navigate the file system and load a shapefile or other supported data source The selection box Filter allows you to preselect some OGR supported file formats You can also select the Encoding type for the shapefile if desired Open an OGR Supported Vector Layer 4 Trabalho QGIS qgis sample data shapefiles L Places Name v Size Modified amp Search _ airports shp 2 2 KB 02 17 2009 amp Recently dina 252 5KB 10 08 2008 alex _ builtups shp 5 0KB 10 08 2008 E Desktop Li grassland shp 11MB 10 09 2008 E File System lakes shp 173 4KB 02 17 2009 IE Documents _ landice shp 898 1KB 10 09 2008 Music L majrivers shp 14MB 10 09 2008 IW Pictures pipelines shp 11 3KB 10 09 2008 iB Videos _ popp shp 51 8KB 10 09 2008 D Downloads e railroads shp 15 0KB 10 09 2008 ESRI Shapefiles OGR 2 Cancel Gambar 12 2 Open an OGR Supported Vector Layer Dialog Selecting a shapefile from the list and clicking Open loads it into QGIS Figure_vector_3 shows QGIS after loading the alaska shp file Tip Layer Colors When you add a layer to the map it is assigned a random color When adding more than one layer at a time different colors are assigned to each layer Once loaded you can zoom around the shapefile using the map navigation tools To ch
300. lay the SQL query interface SQL commands can be entered in this text window A helpful tutorial on SQL commands is available at http www w3schools com sql For example to extract all of the data from a worksheet in an Excel file select x from sheet1 where sheet1 is the name of the worksheet Click on the Run Query button to execute the command If the query is successful a Database File Selection window will be displayed If the query is not successful an error message will appear in the Output Console window In the Database File Selection window enter the name of the layer that will be created from the results of the query in the Name of New Layer textbox 1 SQL Query Text Window A screen to type SQL queries 2 Run Query Button to execute the query entered in the SOL Query Window 3 Console Window The console window where messages related to processing are displayed 4 Help Displays the on line help 5 OK Closes the main Database Connection window Use the X Coordinate T and Y Coordinate T comboboxes to select the field from the database that store the X or longitude and Y or latitude coordinates Clicking on the OK button causes the vector layer created from the SQL query to be displayed in the QGIS map window To save this vector file for future use you can use the QGIS Save as command that is accessed by right clicking on the layer name in the QGIS map legend and then selecting Save as Tip Cr
301. layer They are devided into 6 types and can be used like this e Generic Mac Windows and Unix actions start an external process e Python actions execute a python expression e Generic and Python actions are visible everywhere 12 2 The Vector Properties Dialog 87 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Layer Properties lakes Actions a General v Action list wy Style Type Name Action Capture Gel Labels 3 Python Get feature id QtGui QMe Labels deprecated 4 Python Selected field s value Identify QtGui QMe Fields 5 Python Clicked coordinates Run featu QtGui QMe 3 Display 6 Open Open file 96 PATH 96 o 7 Open Search on web based on attrib http www K Joins a 7 Add default actions Jis Diagrams v Action properties Metadata Type Open e Capture output Name Search on web based on attribute s value Action http www google com search q NAMES j Insert expression cat Insert field Add to action list Update selected action Restore Default Style Save As Default Load Style Save Style v Help Apply Cancel OK Gambar 12 25 Overview action dialog with some sample actions e Mac Windows and Unix actions are visible only on the respective platform 1 e you can define three Edit actions to open an editor and the users can only see and execute the one Edit action for their platform to run the editor There are several examples included in the dialog You can load th
302. lecting the amp Add PostGIS Layer option from the Layer menu or typing Ctr1 Shift D opens the dialog e Choose the connection from the drop down list and click Connect Select or unselect C Also list tables with no geometry Optionally use some E Search Options to define which features to load from the layer or use the Build query button to start the Query builder dialog Find the layer s you wish to add in the list of available layers Select it by clicking on it You can select multiple layers by holding down the Shift key while clicking See Section Query Builder for information on using the PostgreSQL Query Builder to further define the layer Click on the Add button to add the layer to the map 12 1 Supported Data Formats 67 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Tip PostGIS Layers Normally a PostGIS layer is defined by an entry in the geometry columns table From version 0 9 0 on QGIS can load layers that do not have an entry in the geometry columns table This includes both tables and views Defining a spatial view provides a powerful means to visualize your data Refer to your PostgreSQL manual for information on creating views Some details about PostgreSQL layers This section contains some details on how QGIS accesses PostgreSQL layers Most of the time QGIS should simply provide you with a list of database tables that can be loaded and load them on request However if you have trouble loading a PostgreSQL table into
303. lend mode simply adds pixel values of one layer with the other In case of values above 1 in the case of RGB white is displayed This mode is suitable for highlighting features 192 Bab 18 Print Composer QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Darken Creates a resultant pixel that retains the smallest components of the foreground and back ground pixels Like lighten the results tend to be jagged and harsh Multiply It multiplies the numbers for each pixel of the top layer with the corresponding pixel for the bottom layer The results are darker pictures Burn Darker colors in the top layer causes the underlying layers to darken Can be used to tweak and colorise underlying layers Overlay Combines multiply and screen blending modes In the resulting picture light parts of the picture become lighter and dark parts become darker Soft light Very similar to overlay but instead of using multiply screen it uses color burn dodge This one is supposed to emulate shining a soft light onto an image Hard light Hard light is very similar to the overlay mode It s supposed to emulate projecting a very intense light onto an image Difference Difference subtracts the top pixel from the bottom pixel or the other way round to always get a positive value Blending with black produces no change as values for all colors are 0 Subtract This blend mode simply subtracts pixel values of one layer with the other In case of
304. lications they use making them more accesible for first time users If you want to use an algorithm not provided by the any of above providers switch to the advanced mode by selecting the corresponding option at the bottom of the toolbox To execute an algorithm just double click on its name in the toolbox 17 2 1 The algorithm dialog Once you double click on the name of the algorithm that you want to execute a dialog similar to the next one is shown in this case the dialog corresponds to the SAGA Convergence index algorithm x Parameters Log Help Elevation Pn P Method 0 Aspect iz Gradient Calculation 0 2x2 Convergence Index ave to temnorary je X Open output file after running algorithm 0 aed ieee Gambar 17 7 Parameters Dialog 7 This dialog is used to set the input values that the algorithm needs to be executed It shows a table where input values and configuration parameters are to be set It of course has a different content depending on the require ments of the algorithm to be executed and is created automatically based on those requirements On the left side the name of the parameter is shown On the right side the value of the parameter can be set 160 Bab 17 QGIS kerangka pengolahan QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Although the number and type of parameters depend on the characteristics of the algorithm the structure is similar for all of them The parameter
305. lisasikan lapisan layer raster dan vektor sederhana 6 1 Pemasangan Instalasi Pemasangan QGIS sangat sederhana Standar paket installer tersedia untuk MS Windows dan Mac OS X Terse dia paket binary GNU Linux rpm dan deb atau repositori perangkat lunak untuk menambah manajer instalasi Dapatkan informasi terakhir paket binari pada website QGIS http download qgis org 6 1 1 Pemasangan dari sumber Jika Anda perlu membangun QGIS dari sumber silakan lihat petunjuk instalasi Mereka didistribusikan dengan kode sumber QGIS dalam sebuah berkas yang bernama INSTALL Anda juga bisa menemukannya di dalam jaringan online di http htmlpreview github io https raw github com ggis OGIS master doc INSTALL html 6 1 2 Pemasangan pada media eksternal QGIS memungkinkan untuk menentukan opsi configpath yang menimpa path default misal di linux qgis2 untuk konfigurasi pengguna dan QSettings menggunakan direktori ini juga Hal ini memungkinkan pengguna yang membawa installer QGIS pada flash drive bersama dengan semua plugin dan pengaturan Band ingkan dengan bagian Menu Sistem 6 2 Contoh data Panduan pengguna berisi contoh contoh berdasarkan contoh dataset QGIS installer Windows memiliki pilihan untuk mengunduh contoh dataset QGIS Jika dicentang data akan diunduh ke folder My Documents Anda dan ditempatkan dalam folder bernama GIS database Anda dapat menggu nakan Windows Explorer untuk memindahkan folder ini ke setiap lokas
306. list since most users will not have more than one or two GeoRaster columns on the same table Click on one of the listed subdatasets and then click on Select to choose one of the the table column combination The dialog will now show all the rows that contains GeoRaster objects Note that the subdataset list will now show the Raster Data Table and Raster Id s pairs At anytime the Selection entry can be edited in order to go directly to a known GeoRaster or to go back to the beginning and select another table name Select Oracle Spatial GeoRaster Server Connections example Connect Ni Delete Subdatasets georaster scotttigerorcl GDAL RDT 214 georaster scotttigerorcl GDAL RDT 215 georaster scotttigerorcl GDAL RDT 216 georaster scotttigerorclGDAL_RDT 217 georaster scotttigerorcl GDAL RDT 218 Selection georaster scott tiger orc GDAL_IMPORT RASTER Update BN lt 5 GeoRaster objects on table GDAL_IMPORT column RASTER Gambar 19 19 Select Oracle GeoRaster dialog 238 Bab 19 Plugin QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 The Selection data entry can also be used to enter a WHERE clause at the end of the iden tification string e g geor scott tiger orcl gdal_import raster geoid See http www gdal org frmt_georaster html for more information 19 12 3 Displaying GeoRaster Finally by selecting a GeoRaster from the list of Raster Data Table and Raster Id s the raster image will be loaded into QGIS The
307. m bagaimana cara melakukan XYZ di QGIS Anda mungkin ingin memberitahu kami tentang bug di QGIS Anda bisa mengirimkan laporan bug meng gunakan pelacak bug OGIS di http hub qgis org projects quantum gis issues Saat membuat tiket bug baru mo hon diinformasikan alamat surel dimana kami bisa meminta informasi tambahan 250 Bab 20 Bantuan dan Dukungan QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Harap diingat bahwa bug Anda mungkin tidak selalu sesuai dengan prioritas Anda seperti harapan Anda tergan tung pada tingkat kesulitannya Beberapa bug mungkin memerlukan upaya pengembang yang signifikan untuk memperbaiki dan tenaga kerja tidak selalu tersedia Permintaan fitur dapat disampaikan juga menggunakan sistem tiket yang sama untuk bug Pastikan untuk memilih jenis Feature Jika Anda telah menemukan bug dan memperbaikinya sendiri Anda bisa mengirimkan patchnya juga Sekali lagi kirim ke sistem tiket redmine di http hub qgis org wiki quantum gis issues Periksa kotak centang Patch supplied dan melampirkan patch Anda sebelum mengirimkan bug Seseorang pengembang akan meninjau dan menerapkannya ke QGIS Harap jangan khawatir jika patch Anda tidak diterapkan langsung pengembang terikat dengan komitmen komitmen lainnya 20 4 Blog Komunitas juga menjalankan weblog di http planet qgis org planet yang memiliki beberapa artikel menarik bagi pengguna dan pengembang juga disediakan oleh masyarakat dalam blog lain Anda diundang berkontribusi pada blo
308. masi lebih lanjut tentang alat dan toolbar lihat Bagian Toolbar 71 1 Proyek ia SUS Baru Cerin lihat Proyek 5 Buka Cerio lihat Proyek Baru dari template lihat Proyek Buka terkahir dikerjakan lihat Proyek Simpan Grlo lihat Proyek Simpan sebagai Ctrl Shift s lihat Proyek Ea Simpan sebagai Gambar lihat Keluaran Output Penyusun cetak baru Ctr LEP lihat Print Composer Manajer Penyusun lihat Print Composer Penyusun Cetak lihat Print Composer kenar Iqgl CEY IFO 24 Bab 7 QGIS GUI 7 1 2 Edit QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Pilihan Menu Shortcut Kembali Ctrl Ulangi Ctrl Shift zZ Ctrl x Ambil Fitur Salin Fitur Ctrl C Tempel Fitur Oa 3 3 Tambah Fitur Orri 2 Pindah Fitur i Hapus yand dipilih Rotasi Fitur Sederhanakan Fitur Tambah Ring Tambah Bagian om Ed Hapus Ring Om Hapus bagian p Bentuk Ulang Fitur 5 Offset Curves PR Pisah Fitur Ga 9 Gabung Attr Fitur Terpilih Gabung Fitur Terpilih im Node Tool O Rotasi Simbol Titik Setelah mengaktifkan mode Toggle mengedit lihat Advanced digitizing lihat Advanced digitizing lihat Digitizing an existing layer lihat Digitizing an existing layer lihat Digitizing an existing layer lihat Digitizing an existing layer lihat Digitizing an existing layer lihat Digitizing an existing layer lihat Advanced digitizing lihat Advanced digitizing lihat Advanced digitizing lihat Advanced digi
309. mbuka dokumen sedangkan klik tautan eksternal membuka alamat internet Dalam bentuk PDF tautan internal dan eksternal diperlihatkan dengan warna biru dan ditangani oleh sistem peramban web browser Dalam bentuk HTML menampilkan peramban web browser dan menangani keduanya secara identik Pengguna Penulis dan Editor Panduan Pemasangan dan Pemrograman Coding Tara Athan Radim Blazek Godofredo Contreras Otto Dassau Martin Dobias Peter Ersts Anne Ghisla Stephan Holl N Horning Magnus Homann Werner Macho Carson J Q Farmer Tyler Mitchell K Koy Lars Luthman Claudia A Engel Brendan Morely David Willis Jiirgen E Fischer Marco Hugentobler Larissa Junek Diethard Jansen Paolo Corti Gavin Macaulay Gary E Sherman Tim Sutton Alex Bruy Raymond Nijssen Richard Duivenvoorde Andreas Neumann Astrid Emde Yves Jacolin Alexandre Neto Andy Schmid Hien Tran Quang Hak Cipta c 2004 2013 QGIS Tim Pengembang Internet http www qgis org Lisensi dokumen ini Diizinkan untuk menyalin mendistribusikan dan atau memodifikasi dokumen ini di bawah syarat syarat Lisensi Dokumentasi Bebas GNU GNU Free Documentation License atau versi yang lebih baru yang diterbitkan oleh Free Software Foundation tanpa Bagian Invarian tanpa Teks Sampul Depan dan tanpa Teks Sampul Belakang Salinan lisensi termasuk dalam Lampiran GNU Free Documentation License QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 2 Bab 1 Pendahuluan BAB 2 Konvensi Bagian ini menjelaskan kole
310. model and its capabilities is to download one of the many GRASS tutorials where the vector model is described more deeply See http grass osgeo org documentation manuals for more information books and tutorials in several languages 16 6 Creating a new GRASS vector layer To create anew GRASS vector layer with the GRASS plugin click the Mil Create new GRASS vector toolbar icon Enter a name in the text box and you can start digitizing point line or polygon geometries following the procedure described in Section Digitizing and editing a GRASS vector layer In GRASS it is possible to organize all sort of geometry types point line and area in one layer because GRASS uses a topological vector model so you don t need to select the geometry type when creating a new GRASS vector This is different from Shapefile creation with QGIS because Shapefiles use the Simple Feature vector model see Section Creating new Vector layers Tip Creating an attribute table for a new GRASS vector layer If you want to assign attributes to your digitized geometry features make sure to create an attribute table with columns before you start digitizing see figure_grass_digitizing_5 16 7 Digitizing and editing a GRASS vector layer The digitizing tools for GRASS vector layers are accessed using the V2 Edit GRASS vector layer icon on the toolbar Make sure you have loaded a GRASS vector and it is the selected layer in the legend before clicking on the edit
311. n in the QGIS canvas open a rectangle close it using the left mouse button again and click OK The GRASS module g region provide a lot more parameters to define an appropriate region extend and reso lution for your raster analysis You can use these parameters with the GRASS Toolbox described in Section The GRASS toolbox 16 9 The GRASS toolbox The Al Open GRASS Tools pox provides GRASS module functionalities to work with data inside a selected GRASS LOCATION and MAPSET To use the GRASS toolbox you need to open a LOCATION and MAPSET where you have write permission usually granted if you created the MAPSET This is necessary because new raster or vector layers created during analysis need to be written to the currently selected LOCATION and MAPSET The GRASS Shell inside the GRASS Toolbox provides access to almost all more than 330 GRASS modules through a command line interface To offer a more user friendly working environment about 200 of the available GRASS modules and functionalities are also provided by graphical dialogs within the GRASS plugin Toolbox 16 9 1 Working with GRASS modules The GRASS Shell inside the GRASS Toolbox provides access to almost all more than 300 GRASS modules in a command line interface To offer a more user friendly working environment about 200 of the available GRASS modules and functionalities are also provided by graphical dialogs 16 8 The GRASS region tool 147 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0
312. n salah satu dari beberapa algoritma downsampling Untuk informasi lebih lanjut lihat http www gdal org gdaladdo html Utilitas ini membangun shapefile dengan catatan untuk setiap berkas masukan raster atribut yang berisi nama berkas dan geometri poligon menguraikan raster Lihat juga http www gdal org gdaltindex html 231 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 19 9 Plugin Georeferencer Plugin Georeferencer adalah alat untuk menghasilkan berkas berkas dunia untuk raster raster Hal ini memu ngkinkan Anda untuk membuat referensi raster dengan sistem koordinat geografis atau diproyeksikan dengan menciptakan GeoTiff baru atau dengan menambahkan sebuah berkas dunia dengan gambar yang ada Pendekatan dasar Georeferensi raster adalah untuk menemukan titik titik pada raster Anda secara akurat dan dapat menen tukan koordinat mereka Fitur fitur Buka raster Memulai georeferensi Menghasilkan Skrip GDAL Muat Poin Poin GCP Simpan Poin GCP Sebagai Pengaturan Transformasi Tambah Poin Hapus Poin Pindahkan Poin GCP Pan Perbesar Perkecil Perbesar Ke Lapisan i lt Perbesaran Terakhir Perbesar Selanjutnya 438 Tautan Georeferencer ke QGIS Tautan QGIS ke Georeferencer Tabel Georeferensi 1 Alat Alat Georeferensi 19 9 1 Prosedur biasa Sebagai koordinat X dan Y DMS dd mm ss ss DD dd dd atau koordinat diproyeksikan mmmm mm yang sesuai dengan titik yang dipilih pada gambar dua alternatif prosedur dapat digunakan e R
313. n the main QGIS window e You can choose to lock the layers shown on a map item Check the fF Lock layers for map item Any layer that would be displayed or hidden in the main QGIS window after checked on won t appear or be hidden in the map item of the composer But style and labels of a locked layer is still refreshed accordingly to the main QGIS interface Extents The Extents dialog of the map item tab provides following functionalities see Figure figure composer 5 Extents X min 3486912 802 Ymin 2938764 227 X max 148257 802 Ymax 5392832 468 Set to map canvas extent Gambar 18 5 Map Extents Dialog 8 194 Bab 18 Print Composer QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 e The Map extent area allow to specify the map extent using Y and X min max values or clicking the Set to map canvas extent button If you change the view on the QGIS map canvas by zooming or panning or changing vector or raster properties you can update the print composer view selecting the map element in the print composer and clicking the Update preview button in the map Item Properties tab see Figure figure composer 2 Grid The Grid dialog of the map Item Properties tab provides following functionalities see Figure_composer_6 amp Show grid Grid type Solid Interval X 0 00000 Y 0 00000 Offset X 0 00000 Y 0 00000 Cross width 3 00000 Frame style No frame Frame width 2 00 m Line style change F Blend mode Normal
314. n tipe berkas Tentukan jenis geometri keluaran Shapefile Saat ini jenis yang didukung adalah polyline polygon dan titik e Ekspor label teks Ketika kotak centang ini diaktifkan lapisan titik Shapefile tambahan akan dibuat dan tabel dbf terkait akan berisi informasi tentang kolom TEXT yang ditemukan dalam berkas DXF dan teks string mereka sendiri 216 Bab 19 Plugin QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 19 5 1 Menggunakan Plugin 1 Mulai QGIS muat plugin Dxf2Shape di Manajer Plugin lihat Bagian Memuat QGIS Plugin Inti dan klik pada ikon 48 Pengonversi Dxt2Shape yang muncul di menu toolbar QGIS Dialog plugin Dxf2Shape akan muncul seperti Figure dxf2shape 1 2 Masukkan berkas DXF nama untuk keluaran Shapefile dan jenis Shapefile 3 Aktifkan kotak centang C Ekspor teks label jika Anda ingin membuat lapisan titi ekstra dengan label 4 Klik OK 19 6 eVis Plugin The Biodiversity Informatics Facility at the American Museum of Natural History s AMNH Center for Biodi versity and Conservation CBC this section is derived from Horning N K Koy P Ersts 2009 eVis v1 1 0 User s Guide American Museum of Natural History Center for Biodiversity and Conservation Available from http biodiversityinformatics amnh org and released under the GNU FDL has developed the Event Visualiza tion Tool eVis another software tool to add to the suite of conservation monitoring and decision support tools for guiding protected area
315. name modified akan dibuat dalam folder yang sama bersama sama dengan gambar raster asli Sebagai langkah berikutnya Anda harus menentukan Target SRS Spatial Reference System untuk georef erensi raster lihat bagian Working with Projections e Jika Anda ingin Anda bisa menghasilkan peta pdf dan juga laporan pdf Laporan ini mencakup informasi tentang parameter transformasi yang digunakan Sebuah gambar dari residual dan daftar dengan semua GCP dan eror RMS Selanjutnya Anda dapat mengaktifkan kotak centang C Atur Target Resolusi dan tentukan pixel resolusi dari keluaran raster Resolusi horisontal dan vertikal default adalah 1 2 Gunakan 0 untuk transparan jika dibutuhkan bisa diaktifkan jika pixel dengan nilai O akan divisual g isasikan transparan Dalam contoh toposheet kami semua bidang putih akan jadi transparan e Akhirnya C muat di Iqgl saat selesai muat keluaran raster secara otomatis ke dalam kanvas Peta QGIS ketika transformasi sudah dilakukan Tampilkan dan menyesuaikan properti raster Mengklik ada dialog Raster properti didalam menu Pengaturan membuka properti raster dari lapisan yang ingin Anda Georeferensi Konfigurasi georeferensi e Anda dapat menentukan apakah Anda ingin menunjukkan koordinat GCP dan atau ID e Sebagai unit sisa piksel dan unit peta dapat dipilih e Untuk laporan PDF margin kiri dan kanan dapat didefinisikan dan Anda juga dapat mengatur ukuran kertas untuk peta PDF e Akhirnya Anda bisa menga
316. nate reference systems CRS QGIS Server will offer to render maps 130 Bab 14 Pekerjaan dengan Data OGC QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Use the cp button below to select those CRS from the Coordinate Reference System Selector or click Used to add the CRS used in the OGIS project to the list If you have print composers defined in your project they will be listed in the GetCapabilities response and they can be used by the GetPrint reguest to create prints using one of the print composer layouts as a template This isa OGIS specific extension to the WMS 1 3 0 specification If you want to exclude any print composer from being published by the WMS check C Exclude composers and click the cA button below Then select a print composer from the Select print composer dialog in order to add it to the excluded composers list If you want to exclude any layer or layer group from being published by the WMS check A Exclude Layers and click the C2 button below This opens the Select restricted layers and groups dialog which allows you to choose the layers and groups that you don t want to be published Use the shift or control key if you want to select multiple entries at once If you wish you can check C Add WKT geometry to feature info response This will include in the GetFeatureInfo response the geometries of the features in a text format If you want QGIS Server to advertise specific request URLs in the WMS GetCapabilities response enter the corres
317. ncatenates several strings to one Strpos returns the index of a regular expression in a string left returns a substring that contains the n leftmost characters of the string right returns a substring that contains the n rightmost characters of the string rpad returns a string with supplied width padded using the fill character lpad returns a string with supplied width padded using the fill character format formats a string using supplied arguments format_number format date Color Functions returns a number formatted with the locale separator for thousands Also truncates the number to the number of supplied places formats a date type or string into a custom string format This group contains functions for manipulating colors color rgb color rgba ramp color color hsl color hsla color hsv color hsva color cmyk color cmyka returns a string representation of a color based on its red green and blue components returns a string representation of a color based on its red green blue and alpha transparency components returns a string representing a color from a color ramp returns a string representation of a color based on its hue Saturation and lightness attributes returns a string representation of a color based on its hue saturation lightness and alpha transparency attributes returns a string representation of a color based on its hue saturation and value attributes returns a string representation o
318. nce is the distance QGIS uses to search for the closest vertex and or segment you are trying to connect when you set a new vertex or move an existing vertex If you aren t within the snapping tolerance QGIS will leave the vertex where you release the mouse button instead of snapping it to an existing vertex and or segment The snapping tolerance setting affects all tools which work with tolerance 1 A general project wide snapping tolerance can be defined choosing Settings R Options On Mac go to QIS 5 N Preferences on Linux Edit gt Rn Options In the Digitizing tab you can select between to vertex to segment or to vertex and segment as default snap mode You can also define a default snapping tolerance and a search radius for vertex edits The tolerance can be set either in map units or in pixels The advantage of choosing pixels is that the snapping tolerance doesn t have to be changed after zoom operations In our small digitizing project working with the Alaska dataset we define the snapping units in feet Your results may vary but something on the order of 300ft should be fine at a scale of 1 10 000 should be a reasonable setting 2 A layer based snapping tolerance can be defined by choosing Settings or File Snapping options to enable and adjust snapping mode and tolerance on a layer basis see figure edit 1 Note that this layer based snapping overrides the global snapping option set in the Digitizing tab So if
319. nd gray 4b With the Load min max values section scaling of the color table is possible Outliers can be eliminated using the 2 Cumulative count cut setting The standard data range is set from 2 until 98 of the data values and can be adapted manually With this setting the gray character of the image can disappear Further settings can be made with Min max and Mean standard deviation x 1 00 l While the first one creates a color table with the whole data included in the original image the second creates a colortable that only considers values within the standard deviation or within multiple standard deviations This is useful when you have one or two cells with abnormally high values in a raster grid that are having a negative impact on the rendering of the raster Singleband pseudocolor This is a render option for single band files including a continous palette You can also create individual color maps for the single bands here Three types of color interpolation are available Style R General w Band rendering Style Render type Singleband pseudocolor v la Transparency ra Band Band 1 Palette v Generate new color map E Pyramids i Color interpolation Linear v wi Blues v Invert DA Histogram g SV 2 lnl Mode Equal interval v Classes 5 Merata Value Color Label Min 45 63 Max 574 515 177 851250 177 851250 Classify 310 072500 310 072500 Min max origin 442 293750 442 293750 574
320. nda dapat menentukan kode bahasa Sebagai contoh lang id QGIS dimulai menggunakan lokal Indonesia Daftar bahasa saat ini yang didukung dengan kode bahasa dan status disediakan di http hub qgis org wiki quantum gis GUI Translation Progress Baris perintah project Memulai QGIS dengan berkas proyek yang sudah ada Hanya tambahkan baris perintah project ikuti nama berkas proyek yang akan dibuka dan QGIS akan membukanya dengan memuat semua lapisan layer Baris perintah extent Untuk memulai dengan peta batas tertentu menggunakan opsi ini Anda perlu menambahkan kotak bounding sejauh Anda dalam urutan dipisahkan oleh koma extent xmin ymin xmax ymax Baris perintah nologo Argumen baris perintah ini menyembunyikan layar splash ketika Anda mulai OGIS Baris perintah noplugins Jika Anda mengalami kesulitan pada saat startup dengan plugin Anda dapat menghindari beban mereka pada saat startup Mereka masih akan tersedia di Pengelola Plugin after wards Baris perintah nocustomization Menggunakan argumen baris perintah ini kustomisasi GUI yang ada tidak akan diterapkan pada saat startup Baris perintah optionspath Anda dapat memiliki beberapa konfigurasi dan memutuskan mana yang akan digunakan ketika memulai OGIS menggunakan opsi ini Lihat Opsi untuk memeriksa sistem operasi mana menyimpan berkas pengaturan Saat ini tidak ada cara untuk menentukan berkas yang mana untuk menulis pengaturan oleh ka
321. ndard wms that shows the state boundaries of Alaska Add the WMS with the URL http localhost cgi bin ggis mapserv fcgi as described in Selecting WMS WMTS Servers 14 2 QGIS as OGC Data Server 129 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Project Edit View Layer Settings Plugins Vector Raster Database Processing Help MBR VETAR GBE We SP SHRPPRAS RA N h amp g P gt Layers op Create a new WMS connection v amp alaska Connection details Name Alaska URL http localhost cgi bin qgis_mapserv fcgi If the service requires basic authentication enter a user name and optional password User name Password Referer Ignore GetMap URI reported in capabilities _ Ignore GetFeatureinfo URI reported in capabilities Ignore axis orientation WMS 1 3 WMTS Invert axis orientation Smooth pixmap transform Help Cancel ok Layers Browser 2 Coordinate 11921858 11616184 Scale 34189814 v 9 Render amp Gambar 14 5 Standard WMS with USA boundaries included in the QGIS Server KDE A 14 2 2 Creating a WMS WFS from a QGIS project To provide a new QGIS Server WMS or WFS we have to create a QGIS project file with some data Here we use the alaska shapefile from the QGIS sample dataset Define the colors and styles of the layers in QGIS and define the project CRS if not already done Project Properties OWS serv R General S v amp Service capabilitities 35 CRS 5 Title Alaska Bounda
322. ne how many Segments will be drawn on the left and on the right side of the scalebar and how long will be each segment Size field Height can also be defined Display Fonts and colors The Display and Fonts and colors dialogs of the scalebar Item Properties tab provide following functionalities see figure composer 20 202 Bab 18 Print Composer QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 v Display Box margin 1 00 mm m Labels margin 3 00 mm Line width 1 00 mm Alignment Left Fonts and colors Font Font color Fill color Stroke color Gambar 18 20 Scalebar Display Fonts and colors Dialogs e You can define how the scalebar will be displayed in its frame Adjust the Box margin between text and frame borders Labels margin between text and scalebar drawing and the Line width of the scalebar drawing e The Alignment in the Display dialog only applies to Numeric styled scalebars and puts text on the left middle or right side of the frame 18 3 6 Adding a Basic shape or Arrow item to the Print Composer It is possible to add basic shapes Ellipse Rectangle Triangle and arrows to the print composer canvas click the xs Add basic shape icon orthe J aad Arow j icon place the element with the left mouse button on the print composer canvas and position and customize their appearance in the Item Properties tab The Shape Item properties tab allows to draw an ellipse rectangle or triangle in the print compose
323. ng eVis Each file type needs a file extension and the path to an application that can open that type of file This provides the capability of opening a broad range of files such as movies sound recordings and text documents instead of only images 2 Add new file type Add a new file type with a unique extension and the path for the application that can open the file 3 Delete current row Delete the file type highlighted in the table and defined by a file extension and a path to an associated application 19 6 2 Specifying the location and name of a photograph The location and name of the photograph can be stored using an absolute or relative path or a URL if the pho tograph is available on a web server Examples of the different approaches are listed in Table evis_examples 19 6 eVis Plugin 219 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 X Y FILE BEARING 780596 1784017 C Workshop eVis_Data groundphotos DSC_0168 JPG Ada 780596 1784017 groundphotos DSC_0169 JPG 80 700819 1784015 http biodiversityinformatics amnh org evis testdata DSC 0170 JPG 10 780596 1784017 pdf http www testsite com attachments php attachment_id 12 76 19 6 3 Specifying the location and name of other supporting documents Supporting documents such as text documents videos and sound clips can also be displayed or played by eVis To do this it is necessary to add an entry in the file reference table that can be accessed from the Configure External Applications window in
324. ng the database connection routine in the Database Connection tab A complete sample XML file with three queries is displayed below lt xml version 1 0 gt lt doc gt lt query gt lt shortdescription gt Import all photograph points lt shortdescription gt lt description gt This command will import all of the data in the SQLite database to QGIS lt description gt lt databasetype gt SQLITE lt databasetype gt lt databasehost gt lt databaseport gt lt databasename gt C textbackslash Workshop textbackslash eVis _Data textbackslash PhotoPoints db lt databasename gt lt databaseusername gt lt databasepassword gt lt sgqlstatement gt SELECT Attributes Points x Points y FROM Attributes LEFT JOIN Points ON Points rec id Attributes point IDX sglstatement lt autoconnect gt false lt autoconnect gt lt query gt lt query gt lt shortdescription gt Import photograph points looking across Valley lt shortdescription gt lt description gt This command will import only points that have photographs looking across a valley to QGIS lt description gt lt databasetype gt SQLITE lt databasetype gt lt databasehost gt lt databaseport gt lt databasename gt C Workshop eVis_Data PhotoPoints db lt databasename gt lt databaseusername gt lt databasepassword gt lt sgqlstatement gt SELECT Attributes Points x Points y FROM Attributes LEFT JOIN Points ON Points rec_id Attributes point_ID where CO
325. ng the layer s CRS 10 3 Define On The Fly OTF Reprojection QGIS supports OTF reprojection for both raster and vector data However OTF is not activated by default To use OTF projection you must activate the C Enable on the fly CRS transformation checkbox in the CRS menu of the i Project Properties dialog There are three ways to achieve this end 1 Select gt Project Properties from the Project Gnome OSX or Settings KDE Windows menu a P 5 CRS status 2 Click on the icon in the lower right hand corner of the statusbar 3 Turn OTF on by default by selecting the CRS tab of the Options dialog and selecting SF Enable on the fly reprojection by default If you have already loaded a layer and want to enable OTF projection the best practice is to open the Coordinate Reference System menu of the P CRS status PP ies transformation checkbox The icon will no longer be greyed out and all layers will be OTF projected to the CRS shown next to the icon The Coordinate Reference System menu of the Project Properties dialog contains five important components as shown in Figure_projection_2 and described below 1 Enable on the fly CRS transformation this checkbox is used to enable or disable OTF projection When off each layer is drawn using the coordinates as read from the data source and the components described below are inactive When on the coordinates in each layer are projected to the coordina
326. ng your own R scripts and executing them Once again this is different in Linux and you just have to make sure that the R folder is included in the PATH environment variable If you can start R just typing R in a console then you are ready to go 182 Bab 17 QGIS kerangka pengolahan QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 To add a new algorithm that calls an R function or a more complex R script that you have developed and you would like to have available from QGIS you have to create a script file that tells the processing framework how to perform that operation and the corresponding R commands to do so Script files have the extension rsx and creating them is pretty easy if you just have a basic knowledge of R syntax and R scripting They should be stored in the R scripts folder You can set this folder in the R settings group available from the processing settings dialog just like you do with the folder for regular processing scripts Let s have a look at a very simple file script file which calls the R method spsample to create a random grid within the boundary of the polygons in a given polygon layer This method belong to the maptools package Since almost all the algorithms that you might like to incorporate into QGIS will use or generate spatial data knowledge of spatial packages like maptools and specially sp is mandatory polyg vector numpoints number 10 output output vector sp group pts spsample polyg numpoints type
327. nggal teridentifikasi e Tentukan Cari radius untuk mengidentifikasi dan menampilkan petunjuk peta sebagai persentase dari lebar peta Alat pengukuran e Tentukan Warna Rubberband untuk peralatan pengukuran e Tentukan Tempat desimal E Perlu satuan dasar e Satuan pengukuran dipilih amp meter atau kaki e Satuan sudut yang dipilih 5 Sudut Radian atau Gon Menggeser dan memperbesar e Tentukan Aksi roda tetikus hd Perbesar Perbesar dan pusat Perbesar pada kursor tetikus Tidak ada e Tentukan Faktor pembesaran untuk roda tetikus Skala yang ditentukan Di sini Anda menemukan daftar skala yang telah ditentukan Dengan tombol dan Anda dapat menambahkan atau menghapus skala individu Anda 9 3 7 Menu Digitalisasi Membuat fitur E Menekan atribut jendela pop up setelah setiap fitur dibuat 3 Gunakan kembali nilai atribut terakhir yang dimasukkan e Validasi geometris Mengedit garis poligon kompleks dengan banyak node menyebabkan render sangat lambat Hal ini karena prosedur standar validasi di OGIS dapat menghabiskan banyak waktu Untuk mempercepat rendering itu dengan memilih validasi geometri GEOS mulai dari GEOS 3 3 atau untuk mematikannya Validasi geometri GEOS jauh lebih cepat tetapi merugikan adalah bahwa hanya masalah geometri pertama akan dilaporkan Rubberband e Tentukan Rubberband Lebar garis dan Warna garis Snapping E Buka opsi mengambil d
328. ngkinkan untuk menentukan tindakan ketika sebuah lapisan baru dibuat atau ketika lapisan tanpa CRS dimuat e Konfirmasi CRS e Gunakan CRS proyek e X4 Gunakan standar CRS ditampilkan dibawah ini 9 3 10 Tab Lokal E Timpah sistem lokal dan Lokal gunakan sebagai pengganti e Informasi tentang sistem lokal aktif 9 3 11 Tab Jaringan Umum e Tentukan WMS cari alamat default http geopole org wms search search 1 amp type rss e Tentukan Timeout untuk permintaan jaringan ms default 60000 e Tentukan Standar periode ekspirasi untuk WMSC WMTS jam default 24 9 3 Opsi 53 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 r Network A General ad System General WMS search address http geopole org wms search search 1 amp type rss Data Sources s Timeout for network requests ms 60000 amp Rendering asal Default expiration period for WMS C WMTS tiles hours 24 peg Canvas amp Legend EX map Tools Cache settings J Digitizing Directory home alexandre ggis2 cache AN Size 51200 ni Clear DA GDAL aie CRS v M Use proxy for web access Host localhost Locale Port 6460 User Password Proxy type DefaultProxy 2 Exclude URLs starting with Add Remove Help cancel NGK Gambar 9 4 Pengaturan proxy di OGIS Pengaturan cache Tentukan Direktori dan Ukuran untuk cache E Gunakan proxy untuk akses web dan tentukan Host Port Pengguna and Kata Sandi e Atur Tipe Proxy I
329. nis Sumber baru Tambah Lapisan Vektor Sekarang klik Lihat untuk memilih lapisan layer vektor 18 Bab 6 Memulai QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 6 Lihat ke folder ggis sample data gml pilih GML dari combobox jenis berkas kemudian pilih berkas GML lakes gm1 dan klik Buka kemudian di dialog Tambah Vektor klik OK 7 Perbesar sedikit ke daerah favorit Anda dengan beberapa danau 8 Dobel klik lapisan layer lakes di legenda peta untuk membuka dialog Properti 9 Klik menu Style dan pilih biru pada isian warna 10 Klik menu Label dan centang SF Label lapisan ini dengan kotak centang untuk mengaktifkan label dan memilih bidang NAMES sebagai bidang isian label 11 Untuk memudahkan pembacaan label Anda dapat menambahkan penyangga buffer putih di sekitar mere ka dengan klik Buffer dalam daftar sebelah kiri periksa A Draw text buffer dan pilih 3 sebagai ukuran penyangga buffer 12 Klik Terapkan periksa apakah hasilnya baik dan terakhir klik OK Anda dapat melihat betapa mudahnya untuk memvisualisasikan lapisan layer raster dan vektor dalam QGIS Mari kita lanjutkan ke bagian berikut untuk mempelajari lebih lanjut tentang fungsi fitur dan pengaturan yang tersedia dan bagaimana menggunakannya 6 4 Memulai dan Menghentikan QGIS Di bagian Sesi Contoh Anda sudah belajar bagaimana memulai QGIS Kami akan mengulanginya di sini dan Anda akan melihat QGIS juga menyediakan opsi baris perintah lebih lanjut
330. ns to the project file See sec annotations for instructions on creating annotations For annotations to be displayed as watermarks on the WMS output the Fixed map position check box in the Annotation text dialog must be unchecked This can be accessed by double clicking the annotation while one of the annotation tools is active For SVG annotations you will either need to set the project to save absolute paths in the General menu of the Project Project Properties dialog or to manually modify the path to the SVG image in a way that it represents a valid relative path Extra parameters supported by the WMS GetMap reguest In the WMS GetMap reguest OGIS Server accepts a couple of extra parameters in addition to the standard param eters according to the OCG WMS 1 3 0 specification e MAP parameter Similar to MapServer the MAP parameter can be used to specify the path to the QGIS project file You can specify an absolute path or a path relative to the location of the server executable ggis mapserv fcgi If not specified OGIS Server searches for ggs files in the directory where the server executable is located Example 14 2 QGIS as OGC Data Server 131 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Peto 7 rocalhost cgi bin ggis mapserv Tegi REQUEST GetMap amp MAP home qgis mymap qgs amp e DPI parameter The DPI parameter can be used to specify the requested output resolution Example http localhost cgi bin qgis_mapserv fcgi REQUEST GetMap amp
331. o ToolBox Orfeo ToolBox OTB algorithms can be run from QGIS if you have OTB installed in your system and you have configured QGIS properly so it can find all necessary files command line tools and libraries As in the case of SAGA OTB binaries are included in the standalone installer for Windows but are not included if you are runing Linux so you have to download and install the software yourself Please check the OTB website for more information Once OTB is installed start QGIS open the processing configuration dialog and configure the OTB algorithm provider In the Orfeo Toolbox image analysis block you will find all settings related to OTB First ensure that algorithms are enabled Then configure the path to the folder where OTB command line tools and libraries are installed 4b usually OTB applications folder point to usr lib otb applications and OTB command line tools folder is usr bin if you use OSGeo4W installer than install otb bin package and enter C OSGeo4W apps orfeotoolbox applications as OTB applications folder and C OSGeo4W bin as OTB command line tools folder This values should be configured by de fault but if you have a different OTB installation configure them to the correspondig values in your system TauDEM To use this provider you need to install TauDEM command line tools 17 7 8 Windows Please visit TauDEM homepage for installation instructions and precompiled binaries for 32bit and 6
332. o item 22 of 26 selected by Create new selection fi Log messages AID close amp Coordinate 804368 5849853 Scale 10911976 9 BM Render EPSG 2964 Gambar 19 27 Analisis Spasial Query regions contain airports 19 17 Plugin SQL Anywhere SQL Anywhere adalah relational database management system RDBMS proprietary dari Sybase SQL Any where termasuk dukungan spasial antara lain OGC shapefile dll dan dibangun dalam fungsi untuk ekspor ke KML GML dan format SVG 19 17 Plugin SQL Anywhere 245 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 g w Add SQL Anywhere laye amp O amp g Create anew SQL Anywhere co 2 y o X SQL Anywhere Connections Connection Information Name Pi wv Host Connect New Edit Delete Port Schema A Table Type SRID Line Interpretation Geometry column Sql Server Database Connection Parameters Username Password _ Save Username Test Connect Save Password Simple Encryption a IS a Search options Estimate table metadata _ Search other users tables Help lemas loo Build Query Close Help V OK Cancel Gambar 19 28 Dialog SQL Anywhere KDE 8 fa SQL Anywhere memungkinkan untuk terhubung ke spasial basisdata SQL Anywhere aktif Dialog Add SQL Anywhere layer mirip dalam dialog dengan fungsi untuk PostGIS dan SpatiaLite 19 18 Topology Checker Plugin 7B EAQ VESLRGAGLA I TRT A 13 gaps regions 14 gaps
333. o open the dialog window and specify the connection parameters See Figure oracle raster 1 e Name Enter a name for the database connection e Database instance Enter the name of the database that you will connect to e Username Specify your own username that you will use to access the database 19 12 Oracle GeoRaster Plugin 237 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 e Password The password associated with your username that is required to access the database g C Create Oracle Connection 7 4 x Name example Database instance orel Username scott Password D w Save Password Gambar 19 18 Create Oracle connection dialog Now back on the main Oracle Spatial GeoRaster dialog window see Figure_oracle_raster_2 use the drop down list to choose one connection and use the Connect button to establish a connection You may also Edit the connection by opening the previous dialog and making changes to the connection information or use the Delete button to remove the connection from the drop down list 19 12 2 Selecting a GeoRaster Once a connection has been established the sub datasets window will show the names of all the tables that contains GeoRaster columns in that database in the format of a GDAL subdataset name Click on one of the listed subdatasets and then click on Select to choose the table name Now another list of subdatasets will show with the names of GeoRaster columns on that table This is usually a short
334. o show selected records only use Show Selected Features from the menu at the bottom left The other buttons at the top of the attribute table window provide following functionality f Toggle editing mode to edit single values and to enable functionalities described below also with Ctr1 E e EF save Baits also with Ctr1 S r Unselect all algo with Ct r1 U E e Move selected to top also with Ctr14T hee Invert selection also with Ct r1 R Th Copy selected rows to clipboard also with Ct r1 C F if J Zoom map to the selected rows also with Ctrl g ob Pan map to the selected rows also with Ct r1 P kang Delete selected features also with Ctrl D gp New Column for PostGIS layers and for OGR layers with GDAL version gt 1 6 also with Ct r1 W e LE Delete Column for PostGIS layers and for OGR layers with GDAL version gt 1 9 also with Ctr1 L e es Open field calculator also with Ctrl I Tip Skip WKT geometry If you want to use attribute data in external programs such as Excel use the Copy selected rows to clipboard button You can copy the information without vector geometries if you deactivate Settings Options Data sources menu fF Copy geometry in WKT representation from attribute table Save selected features as new layer The selected features can be saved as any OGR supported vector format and also transformed into another Coor dinate Reference System CRS Just open the right mouse menu of the layer and
335. ocument is referenced in the attribute information window and the file path is not highlighted in green then it will be necessary to add an entry for the file s filename extension in the Configure External Applications window If the file path is highlighted in green but does not open when double clicked it will be necessary to adjust the parameters in the Options window so the file can be located by eVis If no compass bearing is provided in the Options window a red asterisk will be displayed on top of the vector feature that is associated with the photograph being displayed If a compass bearing is provided then an arrow will appear pointing in the direction indicated by the value in the compass bearing display field in the Event Browser window The arrow will be centered over the point that is associated with the photograph or other document To close the Event Browser window click on the Close button from the Display window 19 6 5 Event ID Tool The Event ID module allows you to display a photograph by clicking on a feature displayed in the QGIS map window The vector feature must have attribute information associated with it to describe the location and name of the file containing the photograph and optionally the compass direction the camera was pointed when the image was acquired This layer must be loaded into QGIS before running the Event ID tool Launch the Event ID module To launch the Event ID module either click on
336. of a joins two values together into a string Hello world LIKE returns 1 if the string matches the supplied pattern ILIKE returns 1 if the string matches case insensitive the supplied pattern ILIKE can be used instead of LIKE to make the match case insensitive IG returns 1 if a is the same as b OR returns 1 when condition a or b is true AND returns 1 when condition a and b are true NOT returns 1 if a is not the same as b column name column name value of the field column name string a string value NULL null value a IS NULL a has no value a IS NOT NULL a has a value 12 5 Field Calculator 109 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 a IN value value a NOT IN value value Conditionals a 1s below the values listed ais not below the values listed This group contains functions to handle conditional checks in expressions CASE CASE ELSE coalesce regexp_match Mathematical Functions evaluates multiple expressions and return a result evaluates multiple expressions and return a result returns the first non NULL value from the expression list returns true if any part of a string matches the supplied regular expression This group contains math functions e g square root sin and cos sqrt a square root of a abs returns the absolute value of a number sin a sinus of a cos a cosinus of a tan a tangens of a asin a arcussinus of a acos a arcuscosinus of a atan a arcustangens of a atan2
337. of the box Bahkan warna landai ramp didukung pengaturan transparansi Set custom default styles for all layer types Kini QGIS memungkinkan Anda mengontrol bagaimana lapisan layer baru akan ditarik ketika mereka tidak memiliki gaya style qml Anda juga dapat mengatur default tingkat transparansi untuk lapisan layer baru dan apakah simbol harus memiliki warna acak Bab 5 Apa yang baru pada QGIS 2 0 5 4 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Penyusun Peta Pokok pokok Peta HTML Anda sekarang dapat menempatkan elemen html ke peta Anda Garis Bantu Otomatis Menyelaraskan item peta sangat penting untuk membuat peta dicetak dengan bagus Garis bantu otomatis telah ditambahkan untuk memudahkan penyelarasan penyusun objek hanya dengan mendekatkan sebuah benda dengan yang lain Garis Bantu Manual Kadang kadang Anda perlu untuk menyelaraskan objek dengan jarak tertentu pada penyusun peta Dengan garis bantu manual Anda dapat menambahkan garis bantu secara manual yang memungkinkan benda menyelaraskan lebih baik menggunakan keselarasan umum Cukup tarik dari atas atau samping untuk menambahkan garis bantu baru Menghasilkan Serangkaian Peta Pernahkah diperlukan cara menghasilkan serangkaian peta Tentu saja Anda membutuhkan Sekarang dalam Penyusun Peta telah disediakan layanan menghasilkan serangkaian peta menggunakan fitur atlas Cakupan lapisan layer bisa titik garis poligon dan sekarang yang fitur data atribut tersedia dalam label untu
338. olliding labels checkbox In the Feature options you can define if every part of a multipart feature is to be labeled In QGIS 2 0 now it s possible to define if the number of features to be labeled is limited and to A Discourage labels from covering features Labeling line layers First step is to activate the C Label this layer checkbox in the Label settings tab and select an attribute column to use for labeling Click amp if you want to define labels based on expressions After that you can define the text style in the Text menu Here the same settings as for point layers are possible Also in the Formatting menu the same settings as for point layers are possible The Buffer menu has the same functions as described in section labeling_point_layers The Background menu has the same entries as described in section labeling_point_layers 80 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Layer labeling settings Project Edit View Layer Settings Plugins Vector Raster Da a AA oe A4 M Labelthislayerwith NAME lt Bs J eBRUR AR Pan oe v Text Buffer sample 4 D A 3 FA a a Q Pa 1 gt s gt DP J jd 3 be 7G IA R Q lorem ipsum aba ery 24 abe ans ae abc C3nome Layers e tone pape e v MA group1 a popp abc Text Text style a Formatting i G g iets i aier Font Ubuntu G 8 h W Background style Bold Italic IKE v storagep _ _emmonak J shadow 2 8 Pla
339. olygon whole polygon Shadow a si 4 Distance 0 0000 4 PV trails t Placement gt Mv rivers J Rendering mm JE gt V railroads v BA Boundaries Group Becharof Lake TR Lp v Data define gt 3 regions v BO alaska NO Coordinate X Y ga Alignment horizontal vertical v D Water Group Rotation Preserve data rotation values ener er Ugashik Lake Eg v Ga s wv Priority gt 8 swamp Low High OO Lay Brow Browser Apply Cancel Lon Kan S5 Coordinate 594841 3221861 z o Gambar 12 17 Labeling of vector polygon layers with data defined override 4b or Ugashik Lake Gambar 12 18 Move labels amp 12 2 3 Fields Menu Within the Fields menu the field attributes of the selected dataset can be manipulated The buttons lp New Column and Is Delete Column can be used when the dataset is yg Editing mode Edit Widget Within the Fields menu you also find an edit widget column This column can be used to define values or a range of values that are allowed to be added to the specific attribute table column If you click on the edit widget button a dialog opens where you can define different widgets These widgets are e Line edit an edit field which allows to enter simple text or restrict to numbers for numeric attributes e Classification Displays a combo box with the values used for classification if you have chosen unique value as legend type in
340. om the drop down box select NAMES and click Insert Field 10 Your action text now looks like this firefox http google com search q NAMES 11 To finalize the action click the Add to action list button 12 2 The Vector Properties Dialog 89 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 This completes the action and it is ready to use The final text of the action should look like this firefox http google com search q NAMES We can now use the action Close the Layer Properties dialog and zoom in to an area of interest Make sure the lakes layer is active and identify a lake In the result box yow ll now see that our action is visible Identify Results Feature Value O lakes cal 11 Actions if View feature Form H Google search P Derived AREA MI 1018 225 cat 11 NAMES lliamna Lake rotation xlabel ylabel ES Ita 5 RRR close Gambar 12 26 Select feature and choose action A When we click on the action it brings up Firefox and navigates to the URL http www google com search q Tustumena It is also possible to add further attribute fields to the ac tion Therefore you can add a to the end of the action text select another field and click on Insert Field In this example there is just no other field available that would make sense to search for You can define multiple actions for a layer and each will show up in the Identify Results dialog You can think of all kinds of uses for actions For exampl
341. ometries have at least one point in common share any portion of space but their interiors do not intersect returns 1 if the supplied geometries have some but not all interior points in common returns true if and only if no points of b lie in the exterior of a and at least one point of the interior of b lies in the interior of a are of the same dimension returns 1 if the Geometries share space but are not completely contained by each other returns 1 if the geometry a is completely inside geometry b returns a geometry that represents all points whose distance from this geometry is less than or egual to distance returns the geometric center of a geometry returns minimum returns the convex hull convex geometry a geometry that of a geometry It represents the that encloses all geometries within the set represents that part of geometry a that does not intersect with geometry a returns the minimum distance based on spatial ref between two geometries in projected units returns a geometry that represents the shared portion of geometry a and geometry b returns a geometry that represents the portions of a and b that do not intersect returns the combination of geometry a and geometry b returns a geometry that represents the point set union of the geometries the Well Known Text WKT geometry without SRID metadata returns representation of the This group contains functions that operate on record identifier
342. on Plugin Alat GDAL Plugin Georeferencer Heatmap Plugin Plugin Interpolasi Plugin Mengedit Diluar Jaringan Offline Oracle GeoRaster Plugin Mengelola Plugin Plugin Raster Analisis Terrain Plugin Grafik Jalan Plugin SQL Anywhere Plugin Spasial Query Plugin Statistik Zonal Plugin Mengambil Koordinat mudah digunakan dan memberikan kemampuan menampilkan koordinat di kanvas peta untuk dua Sistem Koordinat Referensi CRS dipilih 1 Mulai QGIS pilih aN Proyek Properti dari Pengaturan KDE Windows atau menu Berkas Gnome OSX dan klik pada tab Proyeksi Sebagai alternatif Anda juga bisa klik pada ikon CRS status di sudut kanan bawah dari status bar 2 Klik pada kotak centang C Aktifkan proyeksi on the fly dan pilih proyeksi sistem koordinat dari yang Anda pilih lihat juga Working with Projections 3 Muat plugin ambil koordinat ke dalam Manajer Plugin see Memuat QGIS Plugin Inti dan memastikan 214 Bab 19 Plugin QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Coordinate Capture a x Na Copy to clipboard gt Start capture Gambar 19 3 Plugin Mengambil Koordinat bahwa dialog terlihat dengan pergi ke Tampilan Panel dan pastikan bahwa A Ambil Koordinat udah aktif Dialog ambil koordinat seperti dalam gambar figure coordinate capture 1 Alternatif lain Anda juga bisa ke Vektor Ambil Koordinat dan lihat SF Ambil Koordinat sudah aktif aa 4 Klik pada ikon Klik pilih CRS untuk menampilkan koor
343. on dan garis sederhana Merge beberapa fitur ke fitur tunggal berdasarkan kolom ID unik Mengkonversi poligon ke garis poligon multipart untuk beberapa garis singgelpart Mengkonversi garis ke poligon garis multi ke beberapa bagian poligon tunggal Ekstrak simpul dari lapisan garis dan poligon dan keluaran mereka sebagai poin Tabel Ftools 4 fTools Peralatan Geometri Catatan Alat Menyederhanakan geometri dapat digunakan untuk menghapus simpul duplikat di garis dan poligon geometri hanya mengatur parameter Menyederhanakan toleransi ke 0 dan ini akan melakukan trik 19 7 5 Peralatan Tata Kelola Data koj Alat Kegman O O OSOS O Tentukan Tentukan CRS untuk shapefile yang CRS belum ditetapkan proyeksi sekarang Menggabung Menggabung dengan atribut tambahan ke lapisan vektor didasarkan pada hubungan atribut sesuai spasial Atribut dari satu lapisan vektor yang ditambahkan ke tabel atribut dari lokasi lapisan lain dan diekspor sebagai shapefile Membagi lapisan Membagi lapisan masukan ke beberapa lapisan terpisah berdasarkan masukan vektor kolom Menggabung Menggabungkan beberapa shapefile dalam folder ke dalam shapefile baru shapefile menjadi berdasarkan jenis lapisan titik garis area satu Membuat indeks Buat indeks spasial untuk yang didukung format OGR spasial Tabel Ftools 5 fTools Peralatan Tata Kelola Data 228 Bab 19 Plugin QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 19 8 Plugin Alat GDAL 19 8
344. on List click on Fields and Values to view all attributes of the attribute table to be searched To add an attribute to the Field calculator Expression field double click its name in the Fields and Values list Generally you can use the various fields values and functions to construct the calculation expression or you can just type it into the box To display the values of a field you just right click on the appropriate field You can choose between Load top 10 unigue values and Load all unigue values On the right side opens the Field Values list with the unigue values To add a value to the Field calculator Expression box double click its name in the Field Values list 108 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor The Operators Math Conversions String Geometry and Record groups provides several functions In Operators you find mathematical operators Find Math for mathematical functions The Conversions group contains func tions that convert one data type to another The String group provides functions for data strings In the Geometry group you find functions for geometry objects With Record group functions you can add a numeration to your data set To add a function to the Field calculator Expression box click on the gt and then doubleclick the function A short example illustrates how the field calculator works We want to calculate the length in km of the railroads layer from the QGIS sample dataset 1 Load the Shapefile railroads shp in
345. on of this License for any work from that copyright holder and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does not give you any rights to use it 10 FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE The Free Software Foundation may publish new revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns See http www gnu org copyleft Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License or any later version applies to it you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published not as a draft by the Free Software Foundation If the Document does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published not as a draft by the Free Software Foundation If the Document specifies that a 260 Bab 21 Appendix QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 proxy can decide which future versions of this License can be used that pr
346. onfirm selected element by another click Edit attributes of selected element note that one element can represent more features see above Close Close session and save current status rebuilds topology afterwards Table GRASS Digitizing 1 GRASS Digitizing Tools Category Tab The Category tab allows you to define the way in which the category values will be assigned to a new geometry element oo Gp amp Sd T 2 Jo Ya Pa fo A a Q Category Settings Symbology Table Mode Next not used Category Layer 1 v Gambar 16 4 GRASS Digitizing Category Tab e Mode what category value shall be applied to new geometry elements Next not used apply next not yet used category value to geometry element Manual entry manually define the category value for the geometry element in the Category entry field No category Do not apply a category value to the geometry element This is e g used for area boundaries because the category values are connected via the centroid 16 7 Digitizing and editing a GRASS vector layer 145 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 e Category A number ID is attached to each digitized geometry element It is used to connect each geometry element with its attributes e Field layer Each geometry element can be connected with several attribute tables using different GRASS geometry layers Default layer number is 1 Tip Creating an additional GRASS layer with QGIS If you wo
347. onsel di luar jaringan offline di lapangan Setelah kembali ke jaringan perubahan perlu disinkronkan dengan sumber data master misalnya basis data PostGIS Jika beberapa orang bekerja secara bersamaan pada dataset yang sama sulit untuk menggabungkan hasil edit dengan tangan bahkan jika orang tidak mengubah fitur yang sama Plugin W Mengedit Offline Plugin secara otomatis melakukan sinkronisasi dengan menyalin isi dari sumber data bi asanya PostGIS atau WFS T ke basisdata SpatiaLite dan menyimpan suntingan luar jaringan offline ke tabel khusus Setelah terhubung ke jaringan lagi memungkinkan untuk menerapkan secara suntingan luar jaringan offline ke dataset induk 236 Bab 19 Plugin QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 19 11 1 Menggunakan plugin e Buka beberapa lapisan vektor misal dari sumber data PostGIS atau WFS T e Menyimpannya sebagai proyek e Tekan ikon the W Konversikan ke proyek luar jaringan dan pilih lapisan untuk menyimpan Isi dari lapisan disimpan ke tabel SpatiaLite e Edit lapisan luar jaringan Ap Setelah terhubung lagi mengunggah perubahan dengan tombol Synchronize ea BS D lt S BEKU WETA Vos H x i so re l S be gS P 0 BRR h Qa N Re Bn Layers EJ at RE cha WI v M9 geo acoes O lt o v amp P unidadesdegestao IM Agricola e C Caminho Create offline project C Lagoa P Offline data home alex offline sqlite Browse 4 4 E Floresta Select remote layers 4 E
348. onstruction road Symbol v Advanced Restore Default Style Save As Default Load Style Save Style v Help Apply Cancel Ln OK Gambar 12 7 Single symbol line properties 8 e Symbol layer type You have the possibility to use Ellipse markers Font markers Simple markers SVG markers and Vector Field markers e Size e Angle e Colors Border width Offset X Y You can shift the symbol in x or y direction Note that once you have set the size in the lower levels the size of the whole symbol can be changed with the Size menu in the first level again The size of the lower levels changes accordingly while the size ratio is maintained After having done any needed changes the symbol can be added to the list of current style symbols using the Symbol lt I Save in symbol library and then easily be used in the future Furthermore you can use the Save Style button to save the symbol as a QGIS layer style file qml or SLD file sld Currently in version 2 0 SLDs can be exported from any type of renderer single symbol categorized graduated or rule based but when importing an SLD either a single symbol or rule based renderer is created That means that categorized or graduated styles are converted to rule based If you want to preserve those renderers you have to stick to the QML format On the other hand it could be very handy sometimes to have this easy way of converting styles to rule based With the Style manager f
349. or A vector layer e table A table e number A numerical value A default value must be provided For instance depth number 2 4 e string A text string As in the case of numerical values a default value must be added For instance name string Victor e boolean A boolean value Add True or False after it to set the default value For example verbose boolean True e multiple raster A set of input raster layers e multiple vector A set of input vector layers e field A field in the attributes table of a vector layer The name of the layer has to be added after the field tag For instance if you have declared a vector input with mylayer vector you could use myfield field mylayer to add a field from that layer as parameter e folder A folder e file A filename The parameter name is the name that will be shown to the user when executing the algorithm and also the variable name to use in the script code The value entered by the user for that parameter will be assigned to a variable with that name 17 5 Using processing algorithms from the console 177 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 When showing the name of the parameter to the user the name will be edited it to improve its appearance replacing low hyphens with spaces So for instance if you want the user to see a parameter named A numerical value you can use the variable name A_numerical_value Layers and tables values are strings containing the filepath of the corresponding ob
350. original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redis tributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to 253 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 254 any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Pro
351. ot appear in the toolbox tree and also to some additional options to the modules that are in the toolbox with the simplest default parameters This example demonstrates the use of an additional option in the r shaded relief module that was shown above GRASS Tools alaska demo Modules Tree Modules List Browser ID alexandrefPCalexandre g list vect vector files available in mapset demos airports ctour_100 rivers alaska ctour_100_smooth alexandre PCalexandre g region rast gtopo30 ap projection 99 Albers Equal Area zone D datum nad27 ellipsoid clark66 north 7809680 south 1367760 west 7117600 east 4897040 nsres 3280 ewres 3280 rows 1964 cols 3663 cells 7194132 alexandre PCalexandre Jj Gambar 16 13 The GRASS shell r shaded relief module A The module r shaded relief can take a parameter zmult which multiplies the elevation values relative to the X Y coordinate units so that the hillshade effect is even more pronounced e Load the gtopo30 elevation raster as above then start the GRASS toolbox and click on the GRASS shell In the shell window type the command r shaded relief map gtopo30 shade gtopo30_shade2 azimuth 315 zmult 3 and press Enter 152 Bab 16 GRASS GIS Integration QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 After the process finishes shift to the Browse tab and double click on the new gtopo30 shade2 raster to display in QGIS As explained above shift the shaded relief raster below t
352. ou get sun facing slopes lighted and the slopes facing away from the sun in shadow are darkened 16 9 The GRASS toolbox 151 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 e Begin this example by loading the gtopo30 elevation raster Start the GRASS toolbox and under the Raster category double click to open Spatial analysis Terrain analysis e Then click r shaded relief to open the module A e Change the azimuth angle X 270 to 315 Enter gtopo30 shade for the new hillshade raster and click Run e When the process completes add the hillshade raster to the map You should see it displayed in grayscale e To view both the hill shading and the colors of the gtopo30 together shift the hillshade map below the gtopo30 map in the table of contents then open the Properties window of gtopo30 switch to the transparency tab and set its transparency level to about 25 You should now have the gtopo30 elevation with its colormap and transparency setting displayed above the grayscale hillshade map In order to see the visual effects of the hillshading turn off the gtopo30 shade map then turn it back on Using the GRASS shell The GRASS plugin in OGIS is designed for users who are new to GRASS and not familiar with all the modules and options As such some modules in the toolbox do not show all the options available and some modules do not appear at all The GRASS shell or console gives the user access to those additional GRASS modules that do n
353. ou have to do is to import the processing functions with the following line gt gt gt import processing Now there is basically just one interesting thing you can do with that from the console to execute an algorithm That is done using the runalg method which takes the name of the algorithm to execute as its first parameter and then a variable number of additional parameter depending on the requirements of the algorithm So the first thing you need to know is the name of the algorithm to execute That is not the name you see in the toolbox but rather a unique command line name To find the right name for your algorithm you can use the algslist method Type the following line in you console gt gt gt processing alglist You will see something like this Accumulated Cost Anisolcropic H ai gt saga accumulatedcost anisotropic Accumulated Cost ilsetropic s gt saga accumulatedcost isotropic Add Coordinates CO POT gt saga addcoordinatestopoints Add Grid Values to POLOS AA Aa ie ai saga addgridvaluestopoints Add Grid Values To Siap SS AL AA AA Se ia saga addgridvaluestoshapes Add Polygon Attraibutes to Pointg saga addpolygonattributestopoints Aggregat aa eS AAA saga raggregaLe Aggregate Point ObSservat On AA saga aggregatepointobservations Aggregatior Indera AA saga aggregationindex Analytical Hierarchy Process 5 5 55 5 gt saga analyticalhierarchyproces
354. overage layer that if checked will hide the coverage layer but not the other ones during the generation An optional C Features sorting that if checked allows to sort features of the coverage layer The associ ated combobox allows to choose which column will be used as the sorting key Sort order either ascending or descending is set by a two state button that displays an up or a down arrow An optional Feature filtering text area that allows to specify an expression for filtering features from the coverage layer If the expression is not empty only features that evaluate to True will be selected The button on the right allows to display the expression builder An input box Scaling that allows to select the amount of space added around each geometry within the allocated map Its value is meaningful only when using the autoscaling mode A C Fixed scale that allows to toggle between auto scale and fixed scale mode In fixed scale mode the map will only be translated for each geometry to be centered In auto scale mode the map s extents are computed in such a way that each geometry will appear in its whole An Output filename expression textbox that is used to generate a filename for each geometry if needed It is based on expressions This field is meaningful only for rendering to multiple files A C Single file export when possible that allows to force the generation of a single file if this is possible by the chosen output format PD
355. ox when you select the module A more detailed description for adding new modules changing the modules group etc can be found on the QGIS wiki at http hub qgis org projects quantum gis wiki Adding_New_Tools_to_the_GRASS_Toolbox 16 9 The GRASS toolbox 155 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 156 Bab 16 GRASS GIS Integration BAB 17 QGIS kerangka pengolahan 17 1 Pengantar Bab ini memperkenalkan kerangka pengolahan QGIS lingkungan geoprocessing yang dapat digunakan untuk memanggil algoritma asli dan pihak ketiga dari QGIS membuat tugas analisis spasial Anda lebih produktif dan mudah untuk melakukannya Pada bagian berikut kita akan meninjau bagaimana menggunakan unsur unsur grafis dari kerangka kerja ini dan mengambil yang terbaik masing masing dari mereka Ada empat elemen dasar dalam kerangka GUI yang digunakan untuk menjalankan algoritma untuk tujuan yang berbeda Memilih salah satu alat atau lain akan tergantung pada jenis analisis yang akan dilakukan dan karakter istik tertentu dari masing masing pengguna dan proyek Semuanya kecuali untuk antarmuka batch processing yang disebut dari toolbox seperti akan kita lihat bisa diakses dari menu Pengolahan Anda akan melihat lebih dari empat entri Yang tersisa tidak digunakan untuk mengeksekusi algoritma dan akan dijelaskan nanti dalam bab ini e Toolbox Unsur utama dari GUI digunakan untuk menjalankan algoritma tunggal atau menjalankan proses batch berdasarkan algoritma tersebut
356. oxy s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Document 11 RELICENSING Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site or MMC Site means any World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works A public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server A Massive Multiauthor Collaboration or MMC contained in the site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC site CC BY SA means the Creative Commons Attribution Share Alike 3 0 license published by Creative Commons Corporation a not for profit corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco California as well as future copyleft versions of that license published by that same organization Incorporate means to publish or republish a Document in whole or in part as part of another Document An MMC is eligible for relicensing if it is licensed under this License and if all works that were first published under this License somewhere other than this MMC and subsequently incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC 1 had no cover texts or invariant sections and 2 were thus incorporated prior to November 1 2008 The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site under CC BY SA on the same site at any time before August 1 2009 provided the MMC is elig
357. p e g used with an elevation map Multiband color With the multiband color renderer three selected bands from the image will be rendered each band representing the red green or blue component that will be used to create a color image You can choose several Contrast enhancement methods No enhancement Stretch to MinMax Stretch and clip to MinMax and Clip to min 9 max This selection offers you a wide range of options to modify the appearance of your rasterlayer First of all you have to get the data range from your image This can be done by choosing the Extent and pressing Load QGIS can Estimate faster the Min and Max values of the bands or use the Actual slower Accuracy 13 2 Raster Properties Dialog 115 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Style RR General w Band rendering Style Render type Multiband color v P Transparency J Red band Band 1 Gray v Load min max values E Pyramids 3 a Min max 0 61345 ee 20 98 0 A Histogram eee JL Green band Band 2 v e Min max Metadata Min max 0 62337 ett deviation x 1 00 Blue band Band 3 v 3 Extent Accuracy Min max 0 65535 Full Estimate faster Contrast Stretch to MinMax v 2 5 enhancement e Current e Actual slower Gambar 13 2 Raster Renderer Multiband color A Now you can scale the colors with the help of the Load min max values section A lot of images have few very low and high data These outli
358. p could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters or of legal commercial philosophical ethical or political position regarding them The Invariant Sections are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated as being those of Invariant Sections in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none The Cover Texts are certain short passages of text that are listed as Front Cover Texts or Back Cover Texts in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License A Front Cover Text may be at most 5 words and a Back Cover Text may be at most 25 words A Transparent copy of the Document means a machine readable copy represented in a format whose specifi cation is available to the general public that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or for images composed of pixels generic paint programs or for drawings some widely available drawing editor and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup or ab sence of mark
359. part of the new toolbar button or available in the ORACLE node in the QBrowser tree providing drag and drop import support ORACLE Spatial layers are stored in an ORACLE database Creating a stored Connection ej The first time you use a ORACLE Spatial data source you must create a connection to the database that con tains the data Begin by clicking on the Q Add ORACLE Spatial Layer toolbar button selecting the 9 Add ORACLE Spatial Layer option from the Layer menu or typing Ctr1 Shift o To access the connection manager click on the New button to display the Create a New ORACLE Spatial Connection dialog The parameters required for a connection are e Name A name for this connection Can be the same as Database e Database SID or SERVICE NAME of the Oracle instance e Host Name of the database host This must be a resolvable host name the same as would be used to open a telnet connection or ping the host If the database is on the same computer as QGIS simply enter localhost here Port Port number the PostgreSQL database server listens on The default port is 1521 e Username User name used to login to the database e Password Password used with Username to connect to the database Optional you can activate following checkboxes Ti Save Username Indicates whether to save the database user name in the connection configuration 12 1 Supported Data Formats 7 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 E Save Password Indicates
360. pen the Layer Properties dialog Click on the Diagrams menu activate E Display diagrams and from Diagram type combobox select Text diagram In the Appearance tab we choose a light blue as Background color and in the Size tab we set a fixed size to 18 mm In the Position tab Placement could be set to AroundPoint In the diagram we want to display the values of the three columns T F JAN T_F_JUL and T_F_MEAN First select T F JAN as Attributes and click the me button then T_F_JUL and finally T_F_MEAN Now click Apply to display the diagram in the QGIS main window You can now adapt the chart size in the Size tab Deactivate the Ed Fixed size and set the size of the diagrams on the basis of an Attribute with the Find maximum value button and the Size menu If diagrams appear too small on the screen you can activate the C Increase size of small diagrams checkbox and define the Minimum size of the diagrams Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 9 Change the Attribute Colors by double clicking on the color values in the Assigned attributes field Fig ure diagrams 2 gives an impression 10 Finally click Ok 11 MeGrath an ng 34 1 Talkeetna _ 60 27 Anchorage 16 59 36 domen 23 King Salmon 54 45 38 56 Kodiak 34 30 N 54 40 4 Gambar 12 29 Diagram from temperature data overlayed on a map Remember that in the Position tab a C Data defined position
361. points are written into the Error field On line layers the following rules are available end points must be covered by Here you can select a point layer from your project must not have dangles This will show the overshoots in the line layer must not have duplicates Whenever a line feature is represented twice or more it will occur in the Error field must not have invalid geometries Checks whether the geometries are valid must not have multi part geometries Sometimes a geometry is actually a collection of simple single part geometries Such a geometry is called multi part geometry If it contains just one type of simple geometry we call it multi point multi linestring or multi polygon All multi part lines are written into the Error field must not have pseudos A line geometry s endpoint should be connected to the endpoints of two other geometries If the endpoint is connected to only one other geometry s endpoint the endpoint is called a psuedo node On polygon layers the following rules are available must contain Polygon layer must contain at least one point geometry from the second layer must not have duplicates Polygons from the same layer must not have identical geometries Whenever a polygon feature is represented twice or more it will occur in the Error field must not have gaps Adjacent polygons should not form gaps between them Administrative boundaries could be mentioned as an
362. polygonize html 3 Ter Utilitas ini dapat digunakan untuk mengkonversi data raster antar format yang berbeda jemahan berpotensi melakukan beberapa operasi seperti subsettings resampling dan rescaling piksel dalam proses Untuk informasi Anda bisa membaca di http www gdal org gdal_translate html RGB Utilitas ini akan menghitung tabel warna pseudo yang optimal untuk citra RGB yang diberikan ke PCT dengan menggunakan algoritma cut median pada RGB histogram downsampled Kemudian mengubah gambar menjadi gambar berwarna pseudo menggunakan tabel warna Konversi ini menggunakan Floyd Steinberg dithering difusi error untuk memaksimalkan keluaran visual gambar kualitas Utilitas ini juga dijelaskan pada http www gdal org rgb2pct html PCT Utilitas ini akan mengkonversi sebuah pita pseudocolor pada berkas masukan ke berkas keluaran ke RGB RGB dari format yang diinginkan Untuk informasi lebih lanjut lihat http www gdal org pct2rgb html Ekstraksi C Program ini menghasilkan berkas kontur vektor dari masukan data elevasi raster DEM Pada Kontur http www gdal org gdal_contour html Anda bisa menemukan banyak informasi Utilitas ini memungkinkan untuk klip ekstrak bagian raster menggunakan batas yang dipilih atau Clip berdasarkan masker lapisan batas Informasi lebih lanjut dapat ditemukan di per http www gdal org gdal translate html 230 Bab 19 Plugin Analisis am f lel lel Sieve DI Hampir Hitam Isi tidak
363. ponding URL in the Advertised URL field Further more you can restrict the maximum size of the maps returned by the GetMap request by entering the maximum width and height into the respective fields under Maximums for GetMap request In the WFS capabilities area you can select the layers that you want to provide as WFS and specify if they will allow the update insert and delete operations If you enter a URL in the Advertised URL field of the WFS capabilities section QGIS Server will advertise this specific URL in the WFS GetCapabilities response Now save the session in a project file alaska qgs To provide the project as a WMS WFS we create a new folder usr lib cgi bin project with admin privileges and add the project file alaska qgs and a copy of the ggis mapserv fcgi file that s all Now we test our project WMS and WFS add the WMS and WFS as described in Loading WMS WMTS Layers and WFS and WFS T Client to QGIS and load the WMS The URL is http localhost cgi bin project ggis mapserv fcgi Fine tuning your OWS For vector layers the Fields menu of the Layer Properties dialog allows you to define for each attribute if it will be published or not By default all the attributes are published by your WMS and WES If you want a specific attribute not to be published uncheck the corresponding check box in the WMS or WFS column You can overlay watermarks over the maps produced by your WMS by adding text annotations or SVG annotatio
364. por sumber data yang sama lagi sebagai lapisan layer yang terpisah lalu salin tempel dan atribut simbologi e Multi layer toggle editing commands Pengguna sekarang dapat memilih beberapa lapisan layer dalam legenda dan jika salah satu dari mereka adalah lapisan layer vektor dalam mode sunting pilih untuk meny impan save atau rollback atau membatalkan cancel suntingan saat ini Pengguna juga dapat memilih untuk menerapkan tindakan tindakan di semua lapisan terlepas dari seleksi 5 11 Peramban e Improvements to in app browser panel Direktori dapat disaring oleh wildcard atau ekspresi regex Rumah Proyek baru direktori induk dari proyek saat ini Lihat properti direktori yang dipilih dalam dialog Pilih direktori untuk memindai cepat Pilih tambah direktori langsung ke Favorit melalui dialog peramban filesystem Volumes baru pada Mac direktori tersembunyi untuk akses ke drive eksternal Grup OWS baru pengumpulan koneksi server peta yang tersedia Buka peramban kedua Lihat gt Panel gt Peramban 2 untuk interaksi drag n drop antara panel peramban Saat ini ikon disaring berdasarkan tipe grup filesystem basis data server peta Saat ini properti lapisan layer memiliki visual layout lebih baik 16 Bab 5 Apa yang baru pada AGIS 2 0 BAB 6 Memulai Bab ini memberikan gambaran singkat cara memasang QGIS beberapa contoh data dari QGIS halaman web dan menjalankan sesi pertama memvisua
365. positori QGIS surel dikirim ke daftar ini Jika Anda in gin mendapatkan informasi terbaru setiap perubahan basis kode saat ini Anda bisa berlangganan di http lists osgeo org mailman listinfo qgis commit 20 1 5 qgis trac Daftar ini memberikan notifikasi surel yang terkait dengan manajemen proyek termasuk laporan bug tugas dan permintaan fitur Anda dapat berlangganan di http lists osgeo org mailman listinfo qgis trac 249 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 20 1 6 qgis komunitas tim Daftar ini berkaitan dengan topik seperti dokumentasi konteks bantuan panduan pengguna pengalaman online termasuk situs web blog milis forum dan upaya penerjemahan Jika Anda ingin bekerja pada panduan pengguna juga dalam daftar ini adalah titik awal yang baik untuk mengajukan pertanyaan Anda Anda dapat berlangganan di http lists osgeo org mailman listinfo qgis community team 20 1 7 ggis rilis tim Daftar ini berkaitan dengan topik seperti proses rilis pemaketan binari untuk berbagai OS dan mengumumkan rilis baru ke dunia pada umumnya Anda dapat berlangganan di http lists osgeo org mailman listinfo qgis release team 20 1 8 qgis ir Daftar ini berkaitan dengan upaya penerjemahan Jika Anda ingin bekerja pada penerjemahan panduan atau grafis antarmuka pengguna GUI dalam daftar ini adalah titik awal yang baik untuk mengajukan pertanyaan Anda Anda bisa berlangganan di http lists osgeo org mailman listinfo qgis tr 20 1 9 qgis edu Da
366. procedure for editing GRASS layers is different see Section Digitizing and editing a GRASS vector layer for details Tip Concurrent Edits 12 3 Editing 93 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Layer Properties regions A n ay Sa gt Attribution bel Labels gt MetadataUrl Labels v Properties deprecated Fields Storage type of this layer C Display ESRI Shapefile Aiai Description of this provider o lt Join a ee pene oe GDAL OGR library version 1 7 3 running against ry version 1 7 3 Is Diagrams Source for this layer Metadata data Dropbox Trabalho QGIS qgis_sample_data shapefiles regions shp Geometry type of the features in this layer Polygon The number of features in this layer 26 Editing capabilities of this layer Add Features Delete Features Change Attribute Values Add Attributes Create Spatial Index Fast Access to Features at ID Change Geometries Restore Default Style Save As Default Load Style Save Style v Help Apply Cancel Laman Gambar 12 30 Metadata menu in vector layers properties dialog This version of QGIS does not track if somebody else is editing a feature at the same time as you The last person to save their edits wins 12 3 1 Setting the Snapping Tolerance and Search Radius Before we can edit vertices we must set the snapping tolerance and search radius to a value that allows us an optimal editing of the vector layer geometries Snapping tolerance Snapping tolera
367. provides access to raster data in forms that are useful for client side render ing as input into scientific models and for other clients The WCS may be compared to the WFS and the WMS 14 1 QGIS as OGC Data Client 127 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 As WMS and WES service instances a WCS allows clients to choose portions of a server s information holdings based on spatial constraints and other query criteria QGIS has a native WCS provider and supports both version 1 0 and 1 1 which are significantly different but currently it prefers 1 0 because 1 1 has many issues each server implements it in different way with various particularities The native WCS provider handles all network requests and uses all standard QGIS network settings especially proxy It is also possible select cache mode always cache prefer cache prefer network always network and the provider also supports selection of time position if temporal domain is offered by server 14 1 3 WFS and WFS T Client In OGIS a WFS layer behaves pretty much like any other vector layer You can identify and select features and view the attribute table Since QGIS 1 6 editing WFS T is also supported In general adding a WFS layer is very similar to the procedure used with WMS The difference is there are no default servers defined so we have to add our own Loading a WFS Layer As an example we use the DM Solutions WFS server and display a layer The URL is http www2 dmsolu
368. r 129 QSpatiaLite 71 Ouantile 76 Ouery Builder 106 Raster 113 Raster Calculator 120 Renderer Categorized 75 Renderer Graduated 76 Renderer Point Displacement 78 Renderer Single Symbol 74 Rendering 37 Rendering tergantung skala 37 Rendering Mode 191 Rendering Rule based 78 Revert Layout Actions 206 ring polygons 101 Indeks Rotate Point symbols 102 Rotated North Arrow 197 Rule based Rendering 78 Scalebar Map Scalebar 200 Search Radius 94 Secured OGC Authentication 127 Select using Query 107 SFS 121 Shapefile 63 Shared_Polygon_Boundaries 96 Shortcut Papanketik 36 shp2pssgl 68 Single Band Raster 115 Single Symbol Renderer 74 Skala 37 SLD 129 SLD SE 129 Snapping 94 Snapping On Intersections 96 Snapping Tolerance 94 Spatialite 70 Spatialite Manager 71 Split Features 102 SQLite 70 SRS 124 ST Shift Longitude 69 Symbology 74 115 tata letk toolbar 29 tetikus perbesar 32 Three Band Color Raster 115 Tiger Format 65 Toggle Editing 96 tombol mengarahkan 32 Topological Editing 95 Transparency 118 UK National Transfer Format 65 US Census Bureau 65 Vertex 98 Vertices 98 visibilitas lapisan 29 WCS 121 127 Web Coverage Service 127 WES 121 128 WES T 128 WES_ Transactional 128 WKT 57 98 WMS 121 WMS C 125 WMS 1 3 0 127 WMS client 121 WMS_identify 126 WMS_layer_transparency 124 WMS metadata 126 Indeks QGIS User Guide Rili
369. r canvas You can define its outline and fill color the outline width and a clockwise rotation Item Properties E Shape Main properties Triangle Rotation 0 Position and size v amp Frame B color Thickness 0 30 m v if Background Color b Item ID P Rendering Gambar 18 21 Shape Item properties Tab 4b The Arrow Item properties tab allows to draw an arrow in the print composer canvas You can define color outline and arrow width and it is possible to use a default marker and no marker and a SVG marker For the SVG marker you can additionally add a SVG start and end marker from a directory on your computer 18 3 Composer Items 203 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Main properties Item Properties Arrow Main properties color Line width 1 00 mm Arrow head width 4 00 mm Arrow markers Default None Start marker End marker ad dad t SVG Gambar 18 22 Arrow Item properties Tab e For Basic shapes this dialog allows you to choose a Ellipse Rectangle or Triangle shape and its rotation e Unlike the other items line style line color and background color of a basic shape are adjusted with the Frame and Background dialog No frame is drawn e For arrows you can define here the line style Color Line width and Arrow head width e Arrows markers can be adjusted If you want to set a SVG Start marker and or End marker browse to your SVG file by clicking on
370. r tata letak tab dan memperkenalkan kotak kelompok dilipat ke dalam banyak dialog untuk membuat berbagai pilihan navigasi yang lebih mudah dan untuk membuat lebih baik menggunakan layar real estat Notifikasi halus Dalam banyak kasus kami ingin memberitahu Anda tentang sesuatu tetapi kami tidak ingin menghentikan pekerjaan anda Dengan sistem notifikasi baru Iqll dapat memberitahu Anda tentang pentingnya informasi lewat bar pesan warna tergantung pada pentingnya pesan yang muncul di bagian atas kanvas peta tapi tidak mengganggu Anda untuk berurusan dengan itu jika Anda sedang sibuk melakukan pekerjaan yang lain Programmer dapat membuat notifikasi tersebut misalnya dari plugin menggunakan API python kami Application custom font and Qt stylesheet Sistem huruf yang digunakan untuk aplikasi antarmuka peng guna sekarang dapat diatur Plugin C atau Python yang merupakan anak dari aplikasi GUI QGIS atau telah disalin menerapkan aplikasi GUI stylesheet dapat mewarisi gaya yang berguna untuk perbaikan GUI di seluruh platform dan bila menggunakan kustom widget Qt QGIS seperti QgsCollapsibleGroupBox Live color chooser dialogs and buttons Setiap warna tombol pemilih seluruh antarmuka telah diperbarui untuk memberikan umpan balik visual apakah memiliki transparan warna saat ini atau alpha komponen Warna pemilih dibuka oleh tombol warna baru sekarang akan menjadi default untuk sistem operasi Jika pengguna menggunakan live update dialog pemilih
371. ram or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or exe cutable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be dis tributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software inter change or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or Bab 21 Appendix QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it cont
372. random output SpatialPointsDataFrame pts as data frame pts The first lines which start with a double Python comment sign tell QGIS the inputs of the algorithm de scribed in the file and the outputs that it will generate They work exactly with the same syntax as the SEXTANTE scripts that we have already seen so they will not be described here again Check the processing_scripts section for more information When you declare an input parameter QGIS uses that information for two things creating the user interface to ask the user for the value of that parameter and creating a corresponding R variable that can be later used as input for R commands In the above example we are declaring an input of type vector named polyg When executing the algorithm QGIS will open in R the layer selected by the user and store it in a variable also named polyg So the name of a parameter is also the name of the variable that we can use in R for accesing the value of that parameter thus you should avoid using reserved R words as parameter names Spatial elements such as vector and raster layers are read using the readOGR and brick commands you do not have to worry about adding those commands to your description file QGIS will do it and stored as Spatial xDataFrame objects Table fields are stored as strings containing the name of the selected field Tables are opened using the read csv command If a table entered by the user is not in C
373. ransformation type Linear v Resampling method Nearest neighbour v Compression NONE Create world file Output raster Target SRS EPSG 31467 Generate pdf map H He E Generate pdf report V Set Target Resolution Horizontal 100 00000 lt gt lt gt Vertical 100 00000 Use 0 for transparency when needed v Load in QGIS when done Help amp OK Cancel Gambar 19 15 Pengaturan mendefinisikan transformasi Algoritma Transformasi Tersedia Tergantung pada berapa banyak titik kontrol lapangan yang telah direkam Anda mungkin ingin menggunakan algoritma transformasi yang berbeda Pilihan algoritma transformasi juga tergantung pada jenis dan kualitas masukan data dan jumlah distorsi geometris Anda bersedia untuk memasukkan kepada hasil akhir Saat ini berikut ini Tipe tipe Transformasi tersedia Algoritma Linear adalah digunakan untuk membuat berkas dunia dan berbeda dari algoritma yang lain karena tidak benar benar mengubah raster Algoritma ini kemungkinan besar tidak akan cukup jika Anda berurusan dengan bahan yang dipindai Transformasi Helmert melakukan scaling dan rotasi transformasi sederhana Algoritma 1 3 Polynomial yang paling banyak digunakan algoritma yang diperkenalkan untuk menco cokkan sumber dan tujuan poin kontrol lapangan Paling banyak digunakan algoritma polinomial adalah urutan kedua transformasi polinomial yang memungkinkan beberapa kelengkungan Urutan pertama tr
374. rary result that will be used as the input of another algorithm and should not be kept as a final result just do not edit that text box Typing anything on it means that the result is a final one and the text that you supply will be the description for the output which will be the one the user will see when executing the model Selecting the value of each parameter is also a bit different since there are important differences between the context of the modeler and the toolbox one Let s see how to introduce the values for each type of parameter e Layers raster and vector and tables They are selected from a list but in this case the possible values are not the layers or tables currently loaded in QGIS but the list of model inputs of the corresponding type or other layers or tables generated by algorithms already added to the model e Numerical values Literal values can be introduced directly on the text box But this text box is also a list that can be used to select any of the numerical value inputs of the model In this case the parameter will take the value introduced by the user when executing the model e String Like in the case of numerical values literal strings can be typed or an input string can be selected Table field The fields of the parent table or layer cannot be known at design time since they depend of the selection of the user each time the model is executed To set the value for this parameter type the name of a
375. rce and destination layers use the same projection then the pasted features will have geometry identical to the source layer However if the destination layer is a different projection then QGIS cannot guarantee the ge ometry is identical This is simply because there are small rounding off errors involved when converting between projections Deleting Selected Features 1 If we want to delete an entire polygon we can do that by first selecting the polygon using the regular E Select Single Feature too You can select multiple features for deletion Once you have the selection set use the 4g Delete Selected too to delete the features The Cut Features tool on the digitizing toolbar can also be used to delete features This effectively deletes the feature but also places it on a spatial clipboard So we cut the feature to delete We could then use the Paste Features too to put it back giving us a one level undo capability Cut copy and paste work on the currently selected features meaning we can operate on more than one at a time Saving Edited Layers When a layer is in editing mode any changes remain in the memory of QGIS Therefore they are not commit ted saved immediately to the data source or disk If you want to save edits to the current layer but want to continue editing without leaving the editing mode you can click the i Save Layer Edits button When you turn editing mode off with the J Toggle editing gr quit QGIS
376. rena itu Anda dapat membuat salinan pengaturan berkas asli dan ganti namanya Baris perintah configpath 20 Bab 6 Memulai QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Pilihan ini mirip dengan yang di atas tapi selanjutnya menimpa path default qgis untuk konfigurasi pengguna dan QSettings untuk menggunakan direktori ini juga Hal ini memungkinkan pengguna mis membawa instalasi QGIS pada flash drive bersama dengan semua plugin dan pengaturan 6 6 Proyek Sesi QGIS Anda dianggap sebagai Project QGIS bekerja pada satu proyek pada satu waktu Pengaturan yang baik dianggap sebagai per proyek atau sebagai default untuk proyek proyek baru lihat Bagian Opsi QGIS dapat menyimpan kerja Anda ke dalam sebuah berkas proyek dengan menggunakan pilihan menu Proyek Simpan atau Proyek Simpan Sebagai Memuat proyek tersimpan ke dalam sesi OGIS menggunakan Proyek 5 Buka Project Baru dari tem plate atau Proyek Buka yang baru teradi A Jika Anda ingin membersihkan sesi Anda dan memulai baru lagi pilih Proyek Baru Pilihan menu ini akan meminta Anda untuk menyimpan proyek yang telah ada jika perubahan yang telah dibuat sejak dibuka atau yang terakhir disimpan Jenis jenis informasi yang disimpan dalam berkas proyek meliputi e Lapisan layer yang ditambahkan e Properti lapisan layer termasuk simbolisasi e Proyeksi untuk tampilan peta e Tampilan terkahir Berkas proyek disimpan dalam format XML sehingga memung
377. ribut dan tabel fitur amp Buka tabel atribut di dock window dibutuhkan restart OGIS E Salin geometri di representasi WKT dari tabel atribut Ketika menggunakan Salin baris yang dipilih ke papan klip dari menu Tabel atribut kemudian ini memiliki hasil yang juga koor dinat titik atau simpul disalin ke papan klip e Perilaku tabel atribut 7 Ada tiga kemungkinan Tampilkan semua fitur Tampilkan fitur dipilih dan Tampilkan fitur terlihat pada peta e Tabel atribut baris cache 1 Baris cache ini memungkinkan untuk menyimpan baris x atribut terakhir dimuat sehingga proses tabel atribut akan lebih cepat Cache akan dihapus ketika menutup tabel atribut Representasi untuk nilai NULL Here you can define a value for data fields containing a NULL value Di sini Anda dapat menentukan nilai untuk bidang data yang berisi nilai NULL Menangani sumber data 50 e Pindai item yang valid di isi berkas dock Browser Anda dapat memilih antara Periksa ekstensi dan Periksa e Pindai isi dari berkas yang dikompresi zip di browser dock nj Tidak Pindai dasar and Pindai ful memungkinkan e Konfirmasi subl lapisan raster saat membuka Beberapa raster mendukung sublapisan mereka disebut subdataset di GDAL Contohnya adalah berkas netcdf jika ada banyak variabel netcdf GDAL melihat setiap variabel sebagai sub dataset Pilihan ini untuk mengontrol bagaimana menang
378. rom the Symbol I menu you can administrate your symbols You can adakan pat ms remove item and 2 share tem Marker symbols Line symbols Fill patterns and Color ramps can be used to create the symbols see defining_symbols The symbols are assigned to All Symbols Groups or Smart groups then Categorized Renderer The Categorized Renderer is used to render all features from a layer using a single user defined symbol which color reflects the value of a selected feature s attribute The Style menu allows you to select e The attribute using the Column listbox e The symbol using the Symbol dialog e The colors using the Color Ramp listbox 12 2 The Vector Properties Dialog 75 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 The Advanced button in the lower right corner of the dialog allows to set the fields containing rotation and size scale information For convenience the list in the center of the menu lists the values of all currently selected attributes together including the symbols that will be rendered The example in figure_symbology_2 shows the category rendering dialog used for the rivers layer of the QGIS sample dataset Layer Properties majrivers Style S General N v Layer rendering sida Layer transparency 0 Layer blending mode Normal Feature blending mode Normal 2 Labels deprecated Categorized r E Fields Column DECRIPTION se CD Displ
379. rted in capabilities use given URI from URL field above URI Ignore C Ignore GetFeaturelnfo URI reported in capabilities use given URI from URL field GetFeatureInfo above URI Table OGC 1 WMS Connection Parameters If you need to set up a proxy server to be able to receive WMS services from the internet you can add your proxy server in the options Choose menu Settings Options and click on the tab Network amp Proxy There you can add your proxy settings and enable them by setting the A Use proxy for web access Make sure that you select the correct proxy type from the Proxy type dropdown menu Once the new WMS Server connection has been created it will be preserved for future QGIS sessions Tip On WMS Server URLs Be sure when entering in the WMS server URL that you have the base URL For example you shouldn t have fragments such as request GetCapabilities orversion 1 0 0 in your URL Loading WMS WMTS Layers Once you have successfully filled in your parameters you can use the Connect button to retrieve the capabilities of the selected server This includes the Image encoding Layers Layer Styles and Projections Since this is a network operation the speed of the response depends on the quality of your network connection to the WMS server While downloading data from the WMS server the download progress is visualized in the left bottom of the WMS dialog Your screen should now look a bit like figure OGR 1
380. runs the command Stype will be replaced by w if you are downloading waypoints r if you are downloading routes and t if you are downloading tracks These are command line options that tell GPSBabel which feature type to download Sin will be replaced by the port name that you choose in the download window and Sout will be replaced by the name you choose for the GPX file that the downloaded data should be stored in So if you create a device type with the download command gpsbabel type i garmin o gpx Sin Sout this is actually the download command for the predefined device type Garmin serial and then use it to download waypoints from port dev ttyS0 to the file output gpx QGIS will replace the keywords and run the command gpsbabel W 1 garmin 6 gpx devy ttyS0 output gpx The upload command is the command that is used to upload data to the device The same keywords are used but in is now replaced by the name of the GPX file for the layer that is being uploaded and out is replaced by the port name You can learn more about GPSBabel and it s available command line options at http www gpsbabel org Once you have created a new device type it will appear in the device lists for the download and upload tools 15 1 GPS Plugin 135 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 15 2 Live GPS tracking To activate Live GPS tracking in QGIS you need to select Settings Panels A GPS information You will get a new docked window on the left si
381. ry ER identify layers Organization QGIS project amp X Default styles Online resource K3 OWS server Person Macros E Mail Phone This Layer shows the boundary of Alaska from the Abstract qgis_sample_dataset Fees Access constraints Keyword list wv WMS capabilitities v amp Advertised extent v CRS restrictions Min X 15512975 76062264107167721 EPSG 2964 Min Y 3074751 1649017259478569 Max X 5054333 97227352298796177 Max Y 11645863 0162187609821558 Use Current Canvas Extent amp Used gt Exclude composers gt Exclude layers M Add WKT geometry to feature info response Advertised URL Help Apply Cancel aslam Gambar 14 6 Definitions for a QGIS Server WMS WES project KDE Then go to the OWS Server menu of the Project Project Properties dialog and give some information about the OWS in the fields under Service Capabilities This will appear in the GetCapabilities response of the WMS or WES If you don t check A Service capabilities QGIS Server will use the information given in the wms_metadata xml file located in the cgi bin folder In the WMS capabilities section you can define the extent advertised in the WMS GetCapabilities response by entering the minimum and maximum X and Y values in the fields under Advertised extent Clicking Use Current Canvas Extent sets these values to the extent currently displayed in the QGIS map canvas By checking A CRS restrictions you can restrict in which coordi
382. s As you can see it is possible to enter a search string in the text field and hit the Search button After a short while the search result will be populated into the list below the text field Browse the result list and inspect your search results within the table To visualize the results select a table entry press the Add selected row to WMS list button and change back to the tab Layers QGIS automatically has updated your server list and the selected search result is already enabled in the list of saved WMS servers in the Layers tab You only need to request the list of layers by clicking the Connect button This option is quite handy when you want to search maps by specific keywords Basically this option is a frontend to the API of http geopole org Tilesets When using WMTS Cached WMS Services like http opencache statkart no gatekeeper gk gk open_wmts service WMTS amp request GetCapabilities you are able to browse through the tab Tilesets given by the server Additional information like tile size formats and supported CRS are listed in this table In combination with this feature you can use the tile scale slider from the Settings Panels KDE and Windows or View Panels Gnome and MacOSX then choose Tile scale which gives you the available scales from the tileserver with nice slider docked in 14 1 QGIS as OGC Data Client 125 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Using the Identify Tool Once you have added a WM
383. s Srownum Sid Sscale Fields and Values returns the number of the current row returns the feature id of the current row returns the current scale of the map canvas Contains a list of fields from the layer Sample values can also be accessed via right click Select the field name from the list then right click to access context menu with options to load sample values from the selected field 112 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor BAB 13 Pekerjaan dengan Data Raster 13 1 Working with Raster Data This Section describes how to visualize and set raster layer properties QGIS uses the GDAL library to read and Write raster data formats including Arc Info Binary Grid Arc Info ASCII Grid GeoTIFF Erdas Imagine and many more GRASS raster support is supplied by a native QGIS data provider plugin The raster data can also be loaded in read mode from zip and gzip archives into QGIS At the date of this document more than 100 raster formats are supported by the GDAL li brary see GDAL SOFTWARE SUITE Literatur dan Referensi Web A complete list is available at http www gdal org formats list html Catatan Not all of the listed formats may work in OGIS for various reasons For example some reguire external commercial libraries or the GDAL installation of your OS was not built to support the format you want to use Only those formats that have been well tested will appear in the list of file types when loading a raster into O
384. s Pred yoke Hilleohading SS gt saga analyticalhillshading Average With Mask l a lt lt S lt lt s lt 5 gt Ssaga averagewithmaskl Average With Mask 2 eos 546 an gt Ssaga averagewithmask2 Average With Thereshold S gt Ssaga averagewiththeresholdl Average With Thereshold 2 Ss53S3s5 Ss5 s gt Ssaga averagewiththereshold2 Pyerage With Theresho d Os gt Ssaga averagewiththereshold3 Bepe Aperox iat 1 On Se gt saga b splineapproximation 174 Bab 17 QGIS kerangka pengolahan QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 That s a list of all the available algorithms alphabetically ordered along with their corresponding command line names You can use a string as a parameter for this method Instead of returning the full list of algorithm it will only display those that include that string If for instance you are looking for an algorithm to calculate slope from a DEM type alglist slope to get the following result DIM Filter silope based aa an gt saga dtmfilter slope based Downs Lope Distance Griadd Lemb gt saga downslopedistancegradient Relative Heights and Slope Positions gt saga relativeheightsandslopepositions Slope Length a a a ee eS bag gt saga slopelength Slope Aspect Curvature gt saga slopeaspectcurvature Ups lope ALOR LL LL LA a gt saga upslopearea Vegetation Index slope based
385. s 2 0 WMS properties 126 WMS tiles 125 WMTS 125 WMTS client 121 Work with Attribute Table 104 Zoom In Zoom Out 95 267
386. s can be interpreted as html code check the C Render as HTML You can now insert a url an clickable image that link to a web page or something more complex e You can also insert an expression Click on the Insert an expression to open a new dialog Build an expression by clicking the functions available in the left side of the panel On the right side of the Insert an expression dialog is displayed the help file associated with the function selected Two special categories can be useful particularly associted with the Atlas functionnality geometry functions and records functions On the bottom side a preview of the expression is shown 196 Bab 18 Print Composer QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Main properties QGIS Render as HTML insert an expression Font Font color Gambar 18 9 Label Main properties Dialog 8 e Define font and font color by clicking on the Font and Font color buttons Alignment and Display The Alignment and Display dialogs of the Label Item Properties tab provide following functionalities see Fig ure composer 10 v Alignment Horizontal Left Center Right Vertical Top Middle Bottom v Display Margin 1 00 mm m Rotation 0 00 Gambar 18 10 Label Alignment and Display Dialogs e You can define the horizontal and vertical alignment in the Alignment zone e In the Display tag you can define a margin in mm and or a rotation angle in degrees for the
387. s found on the table can be of one of the following types e A raster layer to select from a list of all the ones available currently opened in QGIS The selector contains as well a button on its right hand side to let you select filenames that represent layers currently not loaded in QGIS e A vector layer to select from a list of all the ones available in the QGIS Layers not loaded in QGIS can be selected as well as in the case of raster layers but only if the algorithm does not require a table field selected from the attributes table of the layer In that case only opened layers can be selected since they need to be open so as to retrieve the list of field names available You will see a button by each vector layer selector as shown in the figure below Points points EPSG 23030 Gambar 17 8 Vector iterator button 7 If the algorithm contains several of them you will be able to toggle just one of them If the button corresponding to a vector input is toggled the algorithm will be executed iteratively on each one of its features instead of just once for the whole layer producing as many outputs as times the algorithm is executed This allows for automating the process when all features in a layer have to be processed separately e A table to select from a list of all the ones available in QGIS Non spatial tables are loaded into QGIS like vector layers and in fact they are treated as such by the program Curr
388. s labeling of features smaller than in the Feature options Layer labeling settings Project Edit View Layer Settings Plugins Vector Ras D Sea re i D O a N Va BO A De RI g tabelthistayerwith names La A Z gt A A i Ti FF l gt gt p f 3 3 O AS Aa v Text Buffer sample Lorem Ipsum eg eg lt Layers 3x pa v Gi group1 AT i Lorem Ipsum a i popp Naknek Lake abe Text Peak ab v airports c Formatting offset from centroid Horizontal slow abe Buffer A d centroid F l duka W Background round centroi ree slow Oo J Shadow Using perimeter gt trails 5 Placement Centroid visible polygon whole polygon gt i J Renderin s Neng 9 Quadrant kabel abc Kabel 4 gt railroads v Boundaries Group Gabe c be gt regions 7 Becharof Lake alalla YB alaska 4 l Offset X Y 0 0000 0 0000 v amp water Group gt BV majrivers Ugashik Lake mm v MO lakes Rotation 0 00 gt B gt swamp w Nata defined Lay Brow Browser Apply Cancel OK S Coordinate 671139 3203444 Store rate a gt di hl ee el Gambar 12 16 Smart labeling of vector polygon layers Using data defined override for labeling With the data defined override functions the settings for the labeling are overwritten by entries in the attribute table You can activate deactivate the function with the right mouse button Hover over the symbol and you s
389. s option just check the Use min covering grid system for resampling option All the other settings will be ignored and the minimum extent that covers all the input layers will be used The cellsize of the target layer is the maximum of all cellsizes of the input layers For algorithms that do not use multiple raster layers or for those that do not need a unique input grid system no resampling is performed before calling SAGA and those parameters are not used 17 7 5 Limitations for multi band layers Unlike QGIS SAGA has no support for multi band layers If you want to use a multiband layer such as an RGB or multispectral image you first have to split it into single banded images To do so you can use the SAGA Grid Tools Split RGB image algorithm which creates 3 images from an RGB image or the SAGA Grid Tools Extract band algorithm to extract a single band 17 7 6 Limitations in cellsize SAGA assumes that raster layers have the same cellsize in the X and Y axis If you are working with a layer with different values for its horizontal and vertical cellsizes you might get unexcepted results In this case a warning will be added to the processing log indicating that an input layer might not be suitable to be processed by SAGA 17 7 7 Logging When QGIS calls SAGA it does it using its command line interface thus passing a set of commands to perform all the required operation SAGA show its progress by writing informat
390. se it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Prog
391. section describes how to work with several common formats ESRI Shapefiles PostGIS layers SpatiaLite layers OpenStreetMap vectors etc Many of the features available in QGIS work the same regardless of the vector data source This is by design and includes the identify select labeling and attributes functions 12 1 1 ESRI Shapefiles The standard vector file format used in QGIS is the ESRI Shapefile Support is provided by the OGR Simple Feature Library http www gdal org ogr A shapefile actually consists of several files The following three are required 1 shp file containing the feature geometries 2 dbf file containing the attributes in dBase format 3 shx index file Shapefiles also can include a file with a prj suffix which contains the projection information While it is very useful to have a projection file it is not mandatory A shapefile dataset can contain additional files For further details see the ESRI technical specification at http www esri com library whitepapers pdfs shapefile pdf Loading a Shapefile To load a shapefile start QGIS and click on the Va Add Vector Layer toolbar button or simply type Ctrl Shift v This will bring up a new window see figure vector 1 63 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Add vector layer Source type File Directory Database Protocol Encoding UTF 8 Source Dataset Browse Help conce SRR Gambar 12 1 Add Vector Layer Dialog 8 From the avai
392. see those folders Instead you must make sure that SAGA is properly installed and its folder is added to the PATH environment variable Just open a console and type saga_cmd to check that the system can find where SAGA binaries are located 17 7 4 About SAGA grid system limitations Most of SAGA algorithms that require several input raster layers require them to have the same grid system That is to cover the same geographic area and have the same cellsize so their corresponding grids match When calling SAGA algorithms from QGIS you can use any layer regardless of its cellsize and extent When multiple raster layers are used as input for a SAGA algorithm QGIS resamples them to a common grid system and then passes them to SAGA unless the SAGA algorithm can operate with layers from different grid systems The definition of that common grid system is controlled by the user and you will find several parameters in the SAGA group of the setting window to do so There are two ways of setting the target grid system e Setting it manually You define the extent setting the values of the following parameters Resampling min X Resampling max X 17 7 Configuring external applications 181 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Resampling min Y Resampling max Y Resampling cellsize Notice that QGIS will resample input layers to that extent even if they do not overlap with it Setting it automatically from input layers To select thi
393. select only regions that are borough in the Provider specific filter expression box of the Query builder Figure_attributes_2 shows an example of the Query builder populated with the regions shp layer from the QGIS sample data The Fields Values and Operators sections help the user to construct the SQL like query regions Fields Values NAME_1 Borough NAME_2 Census Area HASC 2 Municipality TYPE_2 City And Borough Sample All Use unfiltered layer Operators lt gt LIKE IN NOT IN lt gt l ILIKE AND OR NOT e Query Result Provider specific filter expression TYPE 2 Borough W The where clause returned 12 row s Help Test Clear Cancel OK Gambar 12 38 Query Builder amp The Fields list contains all attribute columns of the attribute table to be searched To add an attribute column to the SQL where clause field double click its name in the Fields list Generally you can use the various fields values and operators to construct the query or you can just type it into the SQL box The Values list lists the values of an attribute table To list all possible values of an attribute select the attribute in the Fields list and click the all button To list the first 25 unique values of an attribute column select the attribute column in the Fields list and click the Sample button To add a value to the SQL where clause field double click its name in the Values list The Operators section contains all us
394. si Jika peta dimuat didefinisikan dengan sistem koordinat geografis lintang bujur hasil dari garis atau daerah pengukuran akan salah Untuk memperbaiki ini Anda perlu mengatur peta sesuai sistem koordinat lihat Bagian Working with Projections Semua modul pengukuran juga menggunakan pengaturan snapping dari modul digitalisasi Hal ini berguna jika Anda ingin mengukur garis atau area di lapisan vektor Untuk memilih alat ukur klik di dan pilih alat yang ingin digunakan 38 Bab 8 Peralatan Umum QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 8 5 1 Mengukur panjang area dan sudut mm Mengukur Garis QGIS mampu mengukur jarak nyata antar poin yang diberikan sesuai dengan ellipsoid yang didefinisikan Untuk mengonfigurasinya pilih menu opsi Pengaturan Opsi klik tab Peralatan Peta dan pilih ellipsoid yang tepat Di sana Anda juga dapat mendefinisikan warna karet gelang rubberband dan satuan pen gukuran pilihan Anda meter atau feet dan satuan sudut derajat radian dan gon Kemudian memungkinkan Anda untuk mengklik titik pada peta Setiap panjang segmen serta total muncul dalam jendela ukuran Untuk menghentikan pengukuran klik tombol tetikus sebelah kanan Measure Segments meters 1652 795 763 002 598 548 Total 3 014 km Gambar 8 3 Mengukur Panjang Gnome mm Mengukur Area Area juga dapat diukur Pada jendela mengukur muncul ukuran daerah akumulasi Selain itu alat ukur akan mengambil snap ke lapisan yang sedang dipilih asalkan l
395. sing the buttons on the lower part of the window 172 Bab 17 QGIS kerangka pengolahan QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Once the size of the table has been set it has to be filled with the desired values 17 4 3 Filling the parameters table For most parameters setting its value is trivial Just type the value or select it from the list of available options depending on the parameter type The main differences are found for parameters representing layers or tables and for output filepaths Regarding input layers and tables when an algorithm is executed as part of a batch process those input data objects are taken directly from files and not from the set of them already opened in QGIS For this reason any algorithm can be executed as a batch process even if no data objects at all are opened and the algorithm cannot be run from the toolbox Filenames for input data objects are introduced directly typing or more conveniently clicking on the button on the right hand of the cell which shows a typical file chooser dialog Multiple files can be selected at once If the input parameter represents a single data object and several files are selected each one of them will be put in a separate row adding new ones if needed If it represents a multiple input all the selected files will be added to a single cell separated by semicolons Output data objects are always saved to a file and unlike when executing an algorithm from the toolbox sa
396. st left arrow key to pan west up arrow key to pan north and down arrow key to pan south You can also use the spacebar to temporarily cause mouse movements to pan then map The PgUp and PgDown keys on your keyboard will cause the map display to zoom in or out without interrupting your digitizing session 12 3 3 Topological editing Besides layer based snapping options you can also define some topological functionalities in the Snapping op tions dialog in the Settings or File menu Here you can define C Enable topological editing and or for 12 3 Editing 95 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 polygon layers you can activate the column A Avoid Int which avoids intersection of new polygons Enable topological editing The option A Enable topological editing is for editing and maintaining common boundaries in polygon mosaics QGIS detects a shared boundary in a polygon mosaic and you only have to move the vertex once and QGIS will take care about updating the other boundary Avoid intersections of new polygons The second topological option in the C Avoid Int column called Avoid intersections of new polygons avoids overlaps in polygon mosaics It is for quicker digitizing of adjacent polygons If you already have one polygon it is possible with this option to digitize the second one such that both intersect and QGIS then cuts the second polygon to the common boundary The advantage is that users don t have to digitize all vertices o
397. st click on OK Progress of the global batch task will be shown in the progress bar in the lower part of the dialog 17 5 Using processing algorithms from the console The console allows advanced users to increase their productivity and perform complex operations that cannot be performed using any of the other GUI elements of the processing framework GUI Models involving several algo rithms can be defined using the command line interface and additional operations such as loops and conditional sentences can be added to create more flexible and powerful workflows There is not a proccesing console in QGIS but all processing commands are available instead from the QGIS built in Python console That means that you can incorporate those command to your console work and connect processing algorithms to all the other features including methods from the QGIS API available from there The code that you can execute from the Python console even if it does not call any specific processing method can be converted into a new algorithm that you can later call from the toolbox the graphical modeler or any other component just like you do with any other algorithm In fact some algorithms that you can find in the toolbox are simple scripts In this chapter we will see how to use processing algorithms from the QGIS Python console and also how to write your own algorithms using Python 17 5 1 Calling algorithms from the Python console The first thing y
398. straction library http www gdal org 2013 GRASS PROJECT Geographic ressource analysis support system http grass osgeo org 2013 NETELER M AND MITASOVA H Open source gis A grass gis approach 2008 OGR SOFTWARE SUITE Geospatial data abstraction library http www gdal org ogr 2013 OPEN GEOSPATIAL CONSORTIUM Web map service 1 1 1 implementation specification http portal opengeospatial org 2002 OPEN GEOSPATIAL CONSORTIUM Web map service 1 3 0 implementation specification http portal opengeospatial org 2004 POSTGIS PROJECT Spatial support for postgresql http postgis refractions net 2013 263 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 264 Bab 22 Literatur dan Referensi Web Pm 88 Actions 88 Alat Analisis 226 Alat Alat Georeferensi 232 anotasi 42 apache 129 apache2 129 Arc Info ASCII Grid 113 Arc Info Binary Grid 113 ArcInfo Binary Coverage 65 Atlas Generation 207 attribute table 105 Attribute Actions 88 Attribute Table 204 Attribute Table Selection 105 Avoid Intersections Of Polygons 96 baris perintah 19 bookmark 43 bookmark spasial lihat bookmark 43 Browse Maps 61 Calculator Field 108 CAT 121 Categorized Renderer 75 CGI 129 Colliding labels 80 Color interpolation 117 Color Ramp 76 ColorBrewer 76 Colormap 117 Common Gateway Interface 129 Compose Maps 189 Composer Manager 209 Composer Template 190 Contrast enhancement 116 Coordinate R
399. strength hn Here you can see the signal strenght of the satellites you are receiving signals from GPS Information Bal Cd L esy 8 Disconnect Gambar 15 4 GPS tracking signal strength 15 2 3 GPS polar window XI If you want to know where in the sky all the connected satellites are you have to switch to the polar screen You can also see the ID numbers of the satellites you are receiving signals from GPS Information EJ 2 ia SS Sa sen Gambar 15 5 GPS tracking polar window 15 2 4 GPS options 8 In case of connection problems you can switch between e Autodetect e Internal e Serial device e gpsd selecting Host Port and Device your GPS is connected to 15 2 Live GPS tracking 137 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 GPS Information ox C 4 Ell Connect Connection Autodetect Serial device e gpsd Host localhost Port 2947 Device Digitizing __ Automatically save added feature Track v Automatically add points 2 width Color v Cursor Map centering always _ when leaving 0 never Log File Gambar 15 6 GPS tracking options window 4b A click on Connect again initiates the connection to the GPS receiver You can activate fF Automatically save added features when you are in editing mode Or you can can activate A Automatically add points to the map canvas with a certain width and color p Activating C Cursor you can use a slid
400. t can be printed or exported to image formats Postscript PDF or to SVG export to SVG is not working properly with some recent Qt4 versions you should try and check individual on your system You can save the layout as template and load it again in another session Finally generating several maps based on a template can be done throught the Atlas generator See a list of tools in table composer 1 Icon Purpose Icon Purpose So He FL T Nol Ea e dos EE a al Save Project Duplicate Composer Load from template Export to an image format Export print composition to SVG Zoom to full extent Zoom out Revert last change Add new map from QGIS map canvas Add label to print composition Add new scalebar to print composition Add arrow to print composition Add a HTML Frame Select Move item in print composition Group items of print composition Raise selected items Move selected items to top Align selected items left Align selected items center Align selected items top Table Composer 1 Print Composer Tools All Print Composer tools are available in menus and as icons in a toolbar The toolbar can be switched off and on New Composer Composer Manager Save as template Export as PDF Print or export as Postscript Zoom in Refresh view Restore last change Add image to print composition Add new legend to print composition Add basic shape to print composition Add attribute table
401. t of raster 18 6 Creating Output 209 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 18 7 Manage the Composer With the Saya as template and F Load from template icons you can save the current state of a print composer session asa gpt template and load the template again in another session The LN Composer Manager button in the QGIS toolbar and in Composer Composer Manager allows to add a new composer template create a new composition based on a previously saved template or to manage already existing templates Composer manager alaska1 alaska2 A4 wv New from template Empty composer Add Open template directory user default Show Duplicate Remove Rename Close Gambar 18 31 The Print Composer Manager 4b By default the composer manager searches for user templates in qgis2 composer_template The Lo Do COMPOSE and La Duplicate Composer buttons in the QGIS toolbar and in Composer New Composer and Composer Duplicate Composer allow to open a new composer dialog or to duplicate an existing composition from a previously created one Finally you can save your print composition with the Save Project button This is the same feature as in the QGIS main window All changes will be saved in a QGIS project file 210 Bab 18 Print Composer BAB 19 Plugin 19 1 Plugin QGIS QGIS telah dirancang dengan arsitektur plugin Hal ini memungkinkan banyak fitur baru fungsi dapat dengan mudah ditambahkan
402. t raster These values are also linked to the Cell size X and Cell size Y values Increasing the number of rows or colums will decrease the cell size and increase the file size of the output file The values in Rows and Columns are also linked so doubling 240 Bab 19 Plugin QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 the number of rows will automatically double the number of columns and the cell sizes will also be halved The geographical area of the output raster will remain the same Cell size X and Cell size Y control the geographic size of each pixel in the output raster Changing these values will also change the number of Rows and Columns in the output raster Kernel shape The kernel shape controls the rate at which the influence of a point decreases as the distance from the point increases Different kernels decay at different rates so a triweight kernel gives features greater weight for distances closer to the point then the Epanechnikov kernel does Consequently triweight results in sharper hotspots and Epanechnikov results in smoother hotspots A number of standard kernel functions are available in QGIS which are described and illustrated on Wikipedia e Decay ratio can be used with Triangular kernels to futher control how heat from a feature decreases with distance from the feature A value of 0 minimum indicates that the heat will be concentrated in the centre of the given radius and be completely extinguished at the edge
403. t to edit It is impossible to edit data layers ina MAPSET that is not yours even if you have write permissions 460 Bab 16 GRASS GIS Integration QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 GRASS Edit lt i D Gp pan il B Boa fa Oo KB BO Category Settings Symbology Table Layer al v Column Type Length Add Column Create Alter Table Gambar 16 7 GRASS Digitizing Table Tab 16 8 The GRASS region tool The region definition setting a spatial working window in GRASS is important for working with raster layers Vector analysis is by default not limited to any defined region definitions But all newly created rasters will have the spatial extension and resolution of the currently defined GRASS region regardless of their original extension and resolution The current GRASS region is stored in the SLOCATION SMAPSET WIND file and it defines north south east and west bounds number of columns and rows horizontal and vertical spatial resolution It is possible to switch on off the visualization of the GRASS region in the QGIS canvas using the M Display current GRASS region button With the 1448 Edit current GRASS region icon you can open a dialog to change the current region and the symbology of the GRASS region rectangle in the QGIS canvas Type in the new region bounds and resolution and click OK It also allows to select a new region interactively with your mouse on the QGIS canvas Therefore click with the left mouse butto
404. ta entry jobs see figure_fields_2 Choose Drag and drop designer and an attribute column Use the Icon to create a category that then will be shown during the digitizing session see figure_fields_3 Next step will be to assign the relevant fields to the 84 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 category with the D Icon You can create more categories and use the same fields again When creating a new category QGIS will insert a new tab for the category in the built in form Other options in the dialog are Autogenerate and Provide ui file Autogenerate just creates Editors for all fields and tabulates them The Provide ui file option allows you to use complex dialogs made with the Qt Designer Using an Ul file allows a large freedom in creating a dialog For detailed information see http nathanw net 201 1 09 05 qgis tips custom feature forms with python logic QGIS dialogs can have a python function that is called when the dialog is opened Use this function to add extra logic to your dialogs An example is in module MyForms py def open dialog layer feature geom feature geometry control dialog findChild QWidged My line edit Reference in Python Init Function like so MyForms open MyForms py must live on PYTHONPATH qgis2 python or inside the project folder nr General Hai J Attribute editor layout Drag and drop designer lt wy Style z Python
405. tance a vector layer can be stored in a database or even uploaded to a remote server using a WFS T service Although solutions like these are not yet implemented the processing framework is prepared to handle them and we expect to add new kinds of output channels in a near feature To select an output channel just click on the button on the right side of the text box That will open a save file dialog where you can select the desired filepath Supported file extensions are shown in the file format selector of the dialog depending on the kind of output and the algorithm The format of the output is defined by the filename extension The supported formats depend on the ones supported by the algorithm itself To select a format just select the corresponding file extension or add it if you are directly typing the filepath instead If the extension of the filepath you entered does not match any of the supported ones a default extension usually dbf for tables t if for raster layers and shp for vector ones will be appended to the filepath and the file format corresponding to that extension will be used to save the layer or table If you do not enter any filename the result will be saved as a temporary file and in the corresponding default file format and will be deleted once you exit QGIS take care with that in case you save your project and it contains temporary layers You can set a default folder for output data objects Go to the con
406. tays active for this feature and tool If the node tool couldn t find any features a warning will be displayed Important is to set the property Settings Options 5 Digitizing Search Radius 0 to a number greater than zero i e 10 Otherwise QGIS will not be able to tell which vertex is being edited Tip Vertex Markers The current version of QGIS supports three kinds of vertex markers Semi transparent circle Cross and None To change the marker style choose Options from the Settings menu and click on the Digitizing tab and select the appropriate entry Basic operations o Start by activating the amp Node Tool of this feature and selecting a feature by clicking on it Red boxes will appear at each vertex e Selecting vertices You can select vertices by clicking on them one at a time by clicking on an edge to select the vertices at both ends or by clicking and dragging a rectangle around some vertices When a vertex is selected its color changes to blue To add more vertices to the current selection hold down the Ctrl key while clicking Hold down Ctrl or Shift when clicking to toggle the selection state of vertices vertices that are currently unselected will be selected as usual but also vertices that are already selected will become unselected e Adding vertices To add a vertex simply double click near an edge and a new vertex will appear on the edge near to the cursor Note that the vertex will
407. te reference system defined for the map canvas 58 Bab 10 Working with Projections Project Properties Coordinate Reference System CRS RK General amp amp Enable on the fly CRS transformation amp CRS Filter li tJ Identify layers Recently used coordinate reference systems ay Default styles Coordinate Reference System Authority ID F3 ows server WGS 84 Pseudo Mercator EPSG 3857 p NAD27 Alaska Albers EPSG 2964 G Macros Datum 73 Modified Portuguese Grid EPSG 27493 i WGS 84 EPSG 4326 Coordinate reference systems of the world Hide deprecated CRSs Coordinate Reference System Authority ID GDA94 Australian Albers EPSG 3577 Hawaii_Albers_Equal_Area EPSG 102007 NAD27 Alaska Albers EPSG 2964 NAD27 California Albers EPSG 3309 NAD27 Conus Albers EPSG 5069 NAD83 Alaska Albers EPSG 3338 Selected CRS NAD27 Alaska Albers proj aea lat_1 55 lat_2 65 lat_0 50 lon_0 154 x_0 0 y_0 0 datum NAD27 units us ft no_defs Help Apply Cancel pa Gambar 10 2 Project Properties Dialog A 2 Coordinate Reference System this is a list of all CRS supported by QGIS including Geographic Pro jected and Custom coordinate reference systems To define a CRS select it from the list by expanding the appropriate node and selecting the CRS The active CRS is preselected 3 Proj4 text this is the CRS string used by the Proj4 projection engine This text is read only and provided for informationa
408. ter akan muncul di wilayah kerja utama dialog Setelah raster dimuat kita bisa mulai untuk memasukkan titik titik acuan 232 Bab 19 Plugin QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Georeferencer spearfish topo24 tif IS Da oe IS Ip a ra D ra n nog C LA sa moi aaa a amp on off id srcX srcY dstx dsty dx pixels dyY pixels residual pixels g 0 594324 70 4925379 62 594323 07 4925378 72 0 07 0 66 0 67 Ti 1 600163 35 4925580 09 600162 18 4925582 35 0 16 0 90 0 92 i 2 608468 69 4924874 29 608468 40 4924874 14 0 17 0 27 0 32 EM AA FA ANATOOT FT ZAIKAA ON ANAT rr AM Oo AM n Linear Translation 589998 4 928e 06 Scale 2 00019 2 00019 Rotation 0 Mean error 98113 492324 Gambar 19 13 Dialog Plugin Georeferencer gt al 2 Menggunakan tombol ga Tambah Poin menambahkan poin poin untuk wilayah kerja utama dan memasukkan koordinat mereka lihat Gambar figure georeferencer 2 Untuk prosedur ini Anda memiliki tiga pilihan e Klik pada poin di gambar raster dan masukkan koordinat X dan Y secara manual e Klik pada poin gambar raster dan pilih tombol L dari kanvas peta untuk menambahkan koordinat X dan Y dengan bantuan peta georeferensi sudah dimuat dalam kanvas peta QGIS PT e Dengan tombol f D Anda bisa menggeser GCP di dalam jendela jika mereka berada di tempat yang salah 3 Lanjutkan memasukkan titik titik Anda harus memiliki setidaknya 4 poin dan semakin banyak koordi nat yang dapat And
409. ter format For QGIS this would typically be JPEG or PNG WMS is generically a REST Representational State Transfer service rather than a fully blown Web Service As such you can actually take the URLs generated by QGIS and use them in a web browser to retrieve the same images that QGIS uses internally This can be useful for troubleshooting as there are several brands of WMS servers in the market and they all have their own interpretation of the WMS standard WMS layers can be added quite simply as long as you know the URL to access the WMS server you have a serviceable connection to that server and the server understands HTTP as the data transport mechanism 121 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Overview of WMTS Support QGIS can also act as a WMTS client WMTS is an OGC standard for distributing tile sets of geospatial data This is a faster and a more efficient way of distributing data than WMS because with WMTS the tile sets are pre generated and the client only requests the transmission of the tiles and not their production A WMS request typically involves both the generation and transmission of the data A well known example of a non OGC standard for viewing tiled geospatial data is Google Maps In order to display the data at a variety of scales close to what the user might want the WMTS tile sets are produced at several different scale levels and are made available for the GIS client to request them This diagram illustrates the conc
410. text 18 3 3 Adding an Image item to the Print Composer h To add an image click the H3 dd imase icon place the element with the left mouse button on the print composer canvas and position and customize its appearance in the image tem Properties tab The image Item Properties tab provides following functionalities see figure composer 11 Main properties Search directories and Rotation The Main properties and Search directories dialogs of the Image Item Properties tab provide following function alities see Figure_composer_12 18 3 Composer Items 197 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Item Properties x Picture gt Main properties b Search directories b Rotation gt Position and size b Frame gt amp Background gt Item ID p Rendering Gambar 18 11 Image Item properties Tab 8 w Main properties Path lation bed and breakfast svg w Search directories MAAR Ar a HK TEE OMS i SPP ATAA IA tOO 1724 KY W t X KOK H Image search paths usr share ggis svg si Remove Add Rotation 0 00 Sync with map Gambar 18 12 Image Main properties Search directories and Rotation Dialogs 198 Bab 18 Print Composer QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 e The Main properties dialog shows the current image that is displayed in the image item Click on the button to select a file on your computer e This dialog shows all pictures stored in the selected directories
411. the button after selecting SVG radio button Catatan Unlike other items background color for a basic shape is the shape background and not the frame one 18 3 7 Add attribute table values to the Print Composer It is possible to add parts of a vector attribute table to the print composer canvas click the RSI tuert table icon place the element with the left mouse button on the print composer canvas and position and customize their appearance in the Item Properties tab The Item properties of a attribute table item tab provides following functionalities see figure composer 23 204 item Properties Attribute table p Main properties b amp Show grid b Fonts b Position and size gt Frame b KJ Background b Item ID pb Rendering E Gambar 18 23 Scalebar Item properties Tab Bab 18 Print Composer QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Main properties Show grid and Fonts The Main properties Show grid and Fonts dialogs of the attribute table Item Properties tab provide following functionalities see figure composer 24 Item Properties Attribute table w Main properties Layer airports A Attributes amp Show only visible Features Composer map Map 0 Maximum rows 10 Margin 1 00 amp Show grid Stroke width 0 50 color Fonts Header Font Content Font Gambar 18 24 Attribute table Main properties Show grid and Fonts Dialog Select attributes NA3 ELEV El
412. the corresponding entry Along with algorithm executions the processing framework communicates with the user using the other groups of the registry namely Errors Warnings and Information In case something is not working properly having a 17 6 The history manager 179 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 look at the Errors might help you to see what is happening If you get in contact with a developer to report a bug or error the information in that group will be very useful for him to find out what is going wrong When executing third party algorithms this is usually done calling their command line interfaces which com municate with the user using the console Although that console is not shown a full dump of it is stored in the Information group each time you run one of those algorithms If for instance you are having problems executing a SAGA algorithm look for an entry name SAGA execution console output to check all the messages generated by SAGA and try to find out where the problem is Some algorithms even if they can produce a result with the given input data might add comments or additional information to Warning block in case they detect potential problems from that data in order to warn you about them Make sure you check those messages in case you are having unexpected results 17 7 Configuring external applications The processign framework can be extended using additional applications Currently SAGA GRASS OTB Orfeo
413. the Style menu of the properties dialog 12 2 The Vector Properties Dialog 83 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 R General Fields p D Z A E Attribute editor layout Autogenerate ay Style Python Init Function abe Labels ee Id Name Type Type name Length Precision Comment Edit widget Alias WMS WFS deprecated 0 cat int Integer 10 0 Line edit g T Ge Display 2 AREA_MI double Real sa Line edit Editable Actions 3 xlabel int Integer Classificati amp Label on top oK 4 ylabel int Integer Range Joins Unique valt PT igi 5 rotation int Integer Filename Allows one to set numeric values from a specified a Value map range The edit widget can be either a slider or a aa Enumeratic spin box Immutable Hidden Editable Checkbox Text edit Minimum 1 Calendar Value relat Maximum 30 UUID genet Photo Step 1 Webview Color Current minimum for this value is 2147483648 and current maximum is 2147483647 cancel NGK Restore Default Style Save As Default Load Style Save Style v Help Apply Cancel Len Ka Gambar 12 19 Dialog to select an edit widget for an attribute column e Range Allows to set numeric values from a specific range The edit widget can be either a slider or a spin box e Unique values The user can select one of the values already used in the attribute table If editable is activated a line edit is shown with autocompletion support otherwise a combo box is used e File name Simplifies the selection
414. the database Connect A button to connect to the database using the parameters defined above Output Console The console window where messages related to processing are displayed Username Username for use when a database is password protected Password Password for use when a database is password protected O AI A A A N Predefined Queries Tab to open the Predefined Queries window _ Database Connection Tab to open the Database Connection window SQL Query Tab to open the SQL Query window ph mah NO Help Displays the on line help _ Oo OK Close the main Database Connection window 19 6 eVis Plugin 221 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Database Connection Predefined Queries db Database Connection E Database Type SOLITE JO Database Name Jtialite_db sqlite dl Connect Connection Status connected SQL Query Output Console gt Spatiallndex gt polygons gt idx_polygons_geometry gt idx_polygons_geometry_node gt idx_polygons_geometry_rowid gt idx_polygons_geometry_parent gt regions Help Q x Gambar 19 9 The eVis Database connection window Running SQL queries SQL queries are used to extract information from a database or ODBC resource In eVis the output from these queries is a vector layer added to the QGIS map window Click on the SQL Query tab to disp
415. the workflow defined by the model will not be available if they cause circular dependencies Select the new values and then click on the OK button as usual The connections between the model elements will change accordingly in the modeler canvas 17 3 5 Activating and deactivating algorithms Algorithms can be deactivated in the modeler so they will not be executed once the model is run This can be used to test just a given part of the model or when you do not need all the outputs it generates To deactivate an algorithm right click on its icon in the model canvas and select the Deactivate option You will see that the algorithm is represented now with a red label under its name indicating that is not active Catchment Area Parallel deactivated Gambar 17 24 Deactivate 7 170 Bab 17 QGIS kerangka pengolahan QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 All algorithms depending directly or undirectly on that algorithm will also appear as inactive since they cannot be executed now To activate an algorithm just right click on its icon and select the Activate option 17 3 6 Editing model help files and meta information You can document your models from the modeler itself Just click on the Edit model help button and a dialog like the one shown next will appear Rx gt Algorithm description 2 m E put parameters Algorithm description Clipping layer Outputs Algorithm created by Input parameters Algorithm help written
416. though it is possible to mix geometry elements it is unusual and even in GRASS only used in special cases such as vector network analysis Normally you should prefere to store different geometry elements in different layers It is possible to store several layers in one vector dataset For example fields forests and lakes can be stored in one vector Adjacent forest and lake can share the same boundary but they have separate attribute tables It is also possible to attach attributes to boundaries For example the boundary between lake and forest is a road so it can have a different attribute table 16 4 Importing data into a GRASS LOCATION 143 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 The layer of the feature is defined by layer inside GRASS Layer is the number which defines if there are more than one layer inside the dataset e g if the geometry is forest or lake For now it can be only a number in the future GRASS will also support names as fields in the user interface Attributes can be stored inside the GRASS LOCATION as DBase or SOLITE3 or in external database tables for example PostgreSQL MySQL Oracle etc Attributes in database tables are linked to geometry elements using a category value Category key ID is an integer attached to geometry primitives and it is used as the link to one key column in the database table Tip Learning the GRASS Vector Model The best way to learn the GRASS vector
417. tion Entitled Endorsements provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties for example statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front Cover Text and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back Cover Text to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version Only one passage of Front Cover Text and one of Back Cover Text may be added by or through arrangements made by any one entity If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of you may not add another but you may replace the old one on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one The author s and publisher s of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version 5 COMBINING DOCUMENTS You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents unmodified and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaim
418. tions ca cgi bin mswfs gmap 1 Click on the Ve Add WES Layer too on the Layers toolbar the dialog Add WFS Layer from a Server appears Click on New Enter DM Solutions as name Enter the URL see above Click OK nA A Ww N Choose DM Solutions from the dropdown list Server Connections Gad Click Connect Wait for the list of layers to be populated O 0 AI A Select the Parks layer in the list 10 Click Apply to add the layer to the map Note that proxy settings you have set in your preferences are also recognized Add WFS Layer from a Server Server connections dmsolutions 2 Connect New Edit Delete Load Save Filter Title 4 Name Abstract Cache Feature Filter Parks park Cities popplace Tj Use title for layer name Coordinate reference system EPSG 42304 Change Help Add Build query Close Gambar 14 4 Adding a WFS layer You ll notice the download progress is visualized in the left bottom of the QGIS main window Once the layer is loaded you can identify and select a province or two and view the attribute table 128 Bab 14 Pekerjaan dengan Data OGC QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Only WES 1 0 0 is supported At this point there have not been many tests against WFS versions implemented in other WFS servers If you encounter problems with any other WFS server please do not hesitate to contact the development team Please refer to Section Bantuan dan Dukungan for further informat
419. tizing lihat Advanced digitizing lihat Advanced digitizing lihat Advanced digitizing lihat Advanced digitizing lihat Advanced digitizing lihat Advanced digitizing lihat Advanced digitizing lihat Digitizing an existing layer lihat Advanced digitizing menu Edit tergantung pada jenis lapisan titik garis atau poligon 7 1 3 Edit ekstra Bihan Menu Shoricui Digitalisasi Lanjutan Digitalisasi Lanjutan Digitalisasi Digitalisasi Digitalisasi Digitalisasi Digitalisasi Digitalisasi Digitalisasi Lanjutan Digitalisasi Lanjutan Digitalisasi Lanjutan Digitalisasi Lanjutan Digitalisasi Lanjutan Digitalisasi Lanjutan Digitalisasi Lanjutan Digitalisasi Lanjutan Digitalisasi Lanjutan Digitalisasi Lanjutan Digitalisasi Lanjutan Digitalisasi Digitalisasi Lanjutan untuk lapisan layer Anda menemukan ikon Add Feature di 3 3 Tambah Fitur lihat Digitizing an existing layer Digitalisasi Tambah Fitur lihat Digitizing an existing layer Digitalisasi ca Tambah Fitur lihat Digitizing an existing layer Digitalisasi 7 1 Bar Menu 25 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 71 4 Tampilan Pilihan Menu Shortcut Jin Uu Pan Peta E gt oe Perbesar P Perkecil Pilih gt Q Identifikasi Fitur Mengukur Geser Peta untuk Menyeleksi 3 Perbesar semua o Perbesar ke lapisan 3 J Perbesar yang diseleksi a Perbesaran Terakhir pe Perbesar Selanjutnya KET Perbesar Ukuran Aktual Dekorasi
420. to a transparency of 20 The following steps are neccessary 1 Load the rasterfile Landcover 2 Open the Properties dialog by double clicking on the raster name in the legend or by right clicking and choosing Properties from the popup menu 3 Select the Transparency menu 4 From the Transparency band menu choose None QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 5 Click the E Add values manually button A new row will appear in the pixel list 6 Enter the raster value we use 0 here in the From and To column and adjust the transparency to 20 7 Press the Apply button and have a look at the map You can repeat the steps 5 and 6 to adjust more values with custom transparency As you can see this is quite easy to set custom transparency but it can be quite a lot of work Therefore you can use the button Export to file to save your transparency list to a file The button E import from fit loads your transparency settings and applies them to the current raster layer 13 2 4 Pyramids Menu Large resolution raster layers can slow navigation in QGIS By creating lower resolution copies of the data pyra mids performance can be considerably improved as QGIS selects the most suitable resolution to use depending on the level of zoom You must have write access in the directory where the original data is stored to build pyramids Several resampling methods can be used to calculate the pyramids e Nearest Neighbour e Averag
421. ts to a temporary file which will be later opened once R execution has finished Both graphics and console results will be shown in the processing results manager For more information please check the script files provided with SEXTANTE Most of them are rather simple and will greatly help you understand how to create your own ones Catatan rgdal and maptools libraries are loaded by default so you do not have to add the correspond ing library commands you have to make sure however that those two packages are installed in your R distribution However other additional libraries that you might need have to be explicitly loaded Just add the necessary commands at the beginning of your script You also have to make sure that the corresponding packages are installed in the R distribution used by QGIS The processing framework will not take care of any package installation If you run a script that requires an uninstalled package the execution will fail and SEXTANTE will try to detect which packages are missing You must install those missing libraries manually before you can run the algorithm GRASS Configuring GRASS is not much different from configuring SAGA First the path to the GRASS folder has to be defined but only if you are running Windows Additionaly a shell interpreter usually msys exe which can be found in most GRASS for Windows distributions has to be defined and its path set up as well By default the processign
422. ttings Settings Plugins Vector Ras Project NEB RRA ERA Edit View Layer Label this layer with NAM e afi Bo v Text Buffer sample a amp t1 9 D A ra eSP SPP ys Ka i paan lorem ipsum Gbg E 24 abc abg abc abe ta Layers SN T Pi BA group1 p Lorem Ipsum Ea v Oo f s sii ave i P ade Text Placement v B airports ra Psi 2 NA Formatting eae AT S bE ae Buffer Parallel Curved Horizontal E storagep 7 we WW Background o J Shadow n trails o Placement Position Above line Online Below line gol Ns gt MV rivers riva Ml Rendering amp Line orientation dependent position gt Os A s anda s 2 Distance 1 0000 v Md Boundaries Group X gt amp regions A 7 mm v g alaska 7 Maximum angle between curved characters v Water Group Ta inside 20 0 outside 20 0 gt MV majrivers ate v MO lakes S gt Data defined gt B swamp d ag gt Priority Lay Brow Browser Apply Cancel lam Kama MW Coordinate 858443 5642424 Scare Gambar 12 15 Smart labeling of vector line layers 9 Labeling polygon layers First step is to activate the A Label this layer checkbox and select an attribute column to use for labeling Click 5 if you want to define labels based on expressions In Text menu define the text style The entries are the same as for point and line layers 12 2 The Vector Properties Dialog 81 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 The
423. tton in the desired direction to rotate the selected feature s Simplify Feature P The D Simplify Feature too allows to reduce the number of vertices of a feature as long as the geometry doesn t change You need to select a feature it will be highlighted by a red rubber band and a slider appears Moving the slider the red rubber band is changing its shape to show how the feature is being simplified Clicking OK the new simplified geometry will be stored If a feature cannot be simplified e g MultiPolygons a message shows up Add Ring You can create ring polygons using the Add Ring icon in the toolbar This means inside an existing area it is possible to digitize further polygons that will occur as a hole so only the area in between the boundaries of the outer and inner polygons remain as a ring polygon Add Part You can add part polygons to a selected multipolygon The new part polygon has to be digitized outside the selected multipolygon Delete Ring CT The E Pelete Ring tool allows to delete ring polygons inside an existing area This tool only works with polygon layers It doesn t change anything when it is used on the outer ring of the polygon This tool can be used on polygon and multi polygon features Before you select the vertices of a ring adjust the vertex edit tolerance Delete Part The amp Pelete Part too allows to delete parts from multifeatures e g to delete polygons from a multipolygon f
424. ttribute entries Rotate Point Symbols The C Rotate Point Symbols allows to change the rotation of point symbols in the map canvas You have to define a rotation column from the attribute table of the point layer in the Advanced menu of the Style menu of the Layer Properties Also you have to go into the SVG marker and choose Data defined properties Activate C Angle and choose rotation as field Without these settings the tool is inactive 326 Gambar 12 34 Rotate Point Symbols 102 Bab 12 Pekerjaan dengan Data Vektor QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 To change the rotation select a point feature in the map canvas and rotate it holding the left mouse button pressed A red arrow with the rotation value will be visualized see Figure edit 4 When you release the left mouse button again the value will be updated in the attribute table Catatan If you hold the Ct rl key pressed the rotation will be done in 15 degree steps 12 3 6 Creating new Vector layers QGIS allows to create new Shapefile layers new SpatiaLite layers and new GPX Layers Creation of a new GRASS layer is supported within the GRASS plugin Please refer to section Creating a new GRASS vector layer for more information on creating GRASS vector layers Creating a new Shapefile layer To create a new Shape layer for editing choose New Ve New Shapefile Layer from the Layer menu The New Vector Layer dialog will be displayed as shown in Figure_
425. tuk memberikan penampilan lebih tiga dimensi untuk peta relief berbayang e Indeks Ketidakrataan Sebuah pengukuran kuantitatif dari medan heterogenitas seperti yang dijelaskan oleh Riley et al 1999 Hal ini dihitung untuk setiap lokasi dengan meringkas perubahan elevasi dalam kisi 3x3 piksel e Relief Membuat peta relief berbayang dari data elevasi digital Diimplementasikan metode memilih warna elevasi menganalisis frekuensi distribusi 19 131 Menggunakan plugin 1 Mulai QGIS dan muat layer raster gt opo30 dari contoh lokasi GRASS 19 13 Plugin Raster Analisis Terrain 239 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Elevation layer gtopo30 Output layer P Output Format GeoTIFF Z factor 1 0 amp Add result to project Cancel GK Gambar 19 20 Plugin Raster Pemodelan Terrain perhitungan kemiringan 2 Muat plugin Raster Analisis Terrain plugin di Pengelola Plugin lihat Bagian Memuat OGIS Plugin Inti 3 Pilih metode analisis dari menu e g Raster Analisis Terrain Kemiringan Dialog Kemiringan seperti dalam gambar Figure raster terrain 1 4 Spesifikasi keluaran berkas path dan keluaran tipe berkas 5 Klik OK 19 14 Heatmap Plugin The Heatmap plugin uses Kernel Density Estimation to create a density heatmap raster of an input point vector layer The density is calculated based on the number of points in a location with larger numbers of clustered points resulting in larger values Heatmaps allow easy identifi
426. tuk memulai TopoViewer Menu Tabel memungkinkan untuk membuat dan mengedit tabel dan menghapus tabel dan tampilan Hal ini juga memungkinkan untuk mengosongkan tabel dan untuk memindahkan tabel dari skema satu ke skema lain Seperti fungsionalitas lebih lanjut Anda dapat melakukan VACUUM dan kemudian ANALYZE untuk setiap tabel yang dipilih VACUUM sederhana mengambil kembali ruang dan membuatnya tersedia untuk digunakan kembali dan ANALYZE update statistik untuk menentukan cara yang paling efisien untuk mengeksekusi query Akhirnya Anda dapat mengimpor lapisan berkas jika mereka dimuat dalam OGIS atau ada dalam sistem berkas Dan Anda dapat mengekspor tabel basisdata untuk Shape dengan fitur Ekspor berkas Jendela Tree daftar semua database yang ada didukung oleh OGIS Dengan doble klik Anda bisa koneksi ke basisdata Dengan tombol tetikus kanan Anda bisa mengubah nama dan menghapus skema dan tabel yang ada Tabel juga dapat ditambahkan ke kanvas OGIS dengan menu konteks Jika terkoneksi ke sebuah basisdata jendela utama dari Pengelola DB menyediakan tiga tab Tab Info mem berikan informasi tentang tabel dan geometri serta tentang kolom yang ada Kendala dan Indeks Hal ini juga memungkinkan untuk menjalankan Vacuum Analis dan untuk membuat indeks spasial pada tabel yang dipilih 19 4 Plugin Pengelola DB 215 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 DB Manager S B amp amp Refresh SOLwindow Import layer file Export to file Tree Info Table Preview
427. tup yang berbeda untuk kasus penggunaan yang berbeda juga Sebelum perubahan diterapkan Anda harus me restart QGIS 9 4 Penyesuaian Customization 55 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 56 Bab 9 Konfigurasi QGIS BAB 10 Working with Projections QGIS allows users to define a global and project wide CRS Coordinate Reference System for layers without a pre defined CRS It also allows the user to define custom coordinate reference systems and supports on the fly OTF projection of vector and raster layers All these features allow the user to display layers with different CRS and have them overlay properly 10 1 Overview of Projection Support QGIS has support for approximately 2 700 known CRS Definitions for each of these CRS are stored in a SQLite database that is installed with QGIS Normally you do not need to manipulate the database directly In fact doing so may cause projection support to fail Custom CRS are stored in a user database See Section Custom Coordinate Reference System for information on managing your custom coordinate reference systems The CRS available in QGIS are based on those defined by the European Petroleum Search Group EPSG and the Institut Geographique National de France IGNF and are largely abstracted from the spatial reference tables used in GDAL EPSG identifiers are present in the database and can be used to specify a CRS in QGIS In order to use OTF projection your data must contain information about
428. ture symbology or as Symbol layer symbology If you have used symbol layers it is recommended to use the second setting 12 2 2 Labels Menu The 88 Labels core application provides smart labeling for vector point line and polygon layers and only reguires a few parameters This new application also supports on the fly transformated layers The core functions of the application have been redesigned In OGIS 2 0 there are now a number of other features which improve the labeling The following menus have been created for labeling the vector layers e Text e Formatting e Buffer e Background e Shadow e Placement e Rendering Let us see how the new menus can be used for various vector layers Labeling point layers 12 2 The Vector Properties Dialog 79 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Start QGIS and load a vector point layer Activate the layer in the legend and click on the Payer Labeling Opuons icon in the QGIS toolbar menu First step 1s to activate the A Label this layer with checkbox and select an attribute column to use for labeling Click if you want to define labels based on expressions The following steps describe a simple labeling without using the Data defined override functions that are situated next to the drop down menus You can define the text style in the Text menu see Figure labels 1 A new function is the Type case option where you can influence the text rendering You have the possibility to render the t
429. ual Contain Cover are CoveredBy Cross Disjoint Intersect Overlap Touches and are Within each other It depends on your individual questions which topology rules you apply to your vector data E g normally you won t accept overshoots in line layers but if they depict dead end streets you won t remove them from your vector layer QGIS has the built in topological editing feature which is great for creating new features without errors But existing data errors and user induced errors are hard to find out This plugin helps you find out such errors through a list of rules It is very simple to create topology rules with the Topology Checker plugin On point layers the following rules are available 246 Bab 19 Plugin QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 must be covered by Here you can choose a vector layer from your project Points that aren t covered by the given vector layer occur in the Error field must be covered by endpoints of Here you can choose a line layer from your project must be inside Here you can choose a polygon layer from your project The points must be inside a polygon Otherwise QGIS writes an Error for the point must not have duplicates Whenever a point is represented twice or more it will occur in the Error field must not have invalid geometries Checks whether the geometries are valid must not have multi part geometries All multi part
430. uaran dalam lapisan vektor dengan awalan user defined g Dialog wy wy Xx Raster layer landcover Polygon layer containing the zones alaska Output column prefix WY OK Cancel Gambar 19 30 Dialog Statistik Zonal KDE A 248 Bab 19 Plugin BAB 20 Bantuan dan Dukungan 20 1 Milis QGIS masih aktif dikembangkan dan karena itu tidak akan selalu bekerja seperti yang Anda harapkan Cara yang lebih disukai untuk mendapatkan bantuan adalah dengan bergabung di milis qgis pengguna Pertanyaan Anda akan menjangkau khalayak yang lebih luas dan jawabannya juga akan menguntungkan orang lain 20 1 1 qgis pengguna Milis ini digunakan untuk membahas QGIS secara umum serta pertanyaan pertanyaan spesifik mengenai in stalasi dan penggunaan Anda dapat berlangganan milis qgis pengguna dengan mengunjungi tautan URL http lists osgeo org mailman listinfo qgis user 20 1 2 fossgis talk liste Untuk audien berbahasa Jerman FOSSGIS e V menyediakan milis fossgis talk liste Milis ini digunakan untuk diskusi GIS open source secara umum termasuk QGIS Anda dapat berlangganan dengan mengunjungi URL https lists fossgis de mailman listinfo fossgis talk liste 20 1 3 qgis pengembang Jika Anda seorang pengembang menghadapi masalah yang bersifat teknis Anda mungkin ingin bergabung dengan milis qgis pengembang di sini http lists osgeo org mailman listinfo qgis developer 20 1 4 qgis commit Setiap kali komit dibuat untuk kode re
431. uld however find no problems at all with vector layers since QGIS automatically converts from the original file format to one accepted by the external application before passing the layer to it This adds an extra 180 Bab 17 QGIS kerangka pengolahan QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 processing time Which might be significant if the layer has a large size so do not be surprised if it takes more to process a layer from a DB connection that one of a similar size stored in a shapefile Providers not using external applications can process any layer that you can open in QGIS since they open it for analysis through QGIS Regarding output formats all formats supported by QGIS as output can be used both for raster and vector layers Some provider do not support certain formats but all can export to common formats raster layers that can be later transformed by QGIS automatically As in the case of input layers if this conversion is needed that might increase the processing time If the extension of the filename specified when calling an algorithm does not match the extension of any of the formats supported by QGIS then a suffix will be added to set a default format In the case of raster layers the tif extension is used while shp is used for vector layer 17 7 3 A note on vector layer selections External applications are also aware of the selection that exist in vector layers within QGIS However that re quires rewritting all input vector lay
432. uld like to add more layers to your dataset just add a new number in the Field layer entry box and press return In the Table tab you can create your new table connected to your new layer Settings Tab The Settings tab allows you to set the snapping in screen pixels The threshold defines at what distance new points or line ends are snapped to existing nodes This helps to prevent gaps or dangles between boundaries The default is set to 10 pixels oo ap f pm li D E lo Ya Ya Yo fa O Category Settings Symbology Table Snapping in screen pixels 10 Gambar 16 5 GRASS Digitizing Settings Tab Symbology Tab The Symbology tab allows you to view and set symbology and color settings for various geometry types and their topological status e g closed opened boundary GRASS Edit oo D pP pP p E l T 3 fo Ya Pa Yo fo Category Settings Symbology Table Line width 1 Marker size 9 mi Disp Color Type Index G Boundary no area 5 Y Boundary 1 area 6 WY Boundary 2 areas 7 Gy Centroid in area 8 Gambar 16 6 GRASS Digitizing Symbolog Tab Table Tab The Table tab provides information about the database table for a given layer Here you can add new columns to an existing attribute table or create a new database table for a new GRASS vector layer see Section Creating a new GRASS vector layer Tip GRASS Edit Permissions You must be the owner of the GRASS MAPSET you wan
433. um distance below which an item is snapped to the grid Snap to alignements shows helping lines when the borders or axis of two items are aligned 18 1 4 Composer items general options Composer items have a set of common properties you will find on the bottom of the Item Properties tab Position and size Frame Background Item ID and Rendering See figure composer 2 18 1 The Position and size dialog lets you define size and position of the frame that contains the item You can also choose which Reference point will be set at the X and Y coordinates previously defined The E Frame shows or hides the frame around the label Click on the Color and Thickness buttons to adjust those properties the A Background enables or disables a background color Click on the Color button to display a dialog where you pick a color ou choose frome a custom setting Transparency can also be adjusted throught the alpha field Use the Item ID to create a relationship to other print composer items Rendering mode can be selected in the option field See Rendering_Mode First steps 191 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 v Position and size Reference point x 10 Y 10 g 0C width 277 TU Height 187 E Y Frame D v amp Background Color Y Item ID Id Uuid read only b39 441f 9767 6c91199bd36c Gambar 18 2 Common Item properties Dialogs 18 2 Rendering mode QGIS now allows advanced rendering for composer items just like
434. ungkinkan untuk mengambil keuntungan dari konsol Python terintegrasi Hal ini dapat dibuka dari menu Plugins Python Console Konsol terbuka sebagai jendela utilitas non modal Untuk interaksi dengan lingkungan QGIS ada variabel ggis utils iface yang merupakan contoh dari Qgs Inter face Interface ini memungkinkan akses ke kanvas peta menu toolbar dan bagian lain dari aplikasi OGIS Untuk informasi lebih lanjut tentang bekerja dengan plugin dan aplikasi Python Console dan Programming Pylqgl silakan lihat http www ggis org html en docs pyggis developer cookbook index html 4 7 Python Console 9 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 10 Bab 4 Keistimewaan BAB 5 Apa yang baru pada QGIS 2 0 Harap dicatat bahwa ini adalah rilis dalam cutting edge seri rilis kami Dengan demikian mengandung fitur baru dan memperluas program antarmuka dibanding QGIS 1 8 0 Kami menyarankan agar Anda menggunakan versi ini daripada rilis sebelumnya Rilis yang ini meliputi ratusan perbaikan kesalahan bug dan banyak fitur baru dan perangkat tambahan akan dijelaskan dalam panduan ini Juga bandingkan dengan visual log perubahan changelog di http changelog linfiniti com qgis version 200 5 1 5 2 Antarmuka Pengguna Tema ikon baru Kami telah memperbarui tema ikon kami untuk menggunakan tema GIS memperke nalkan peningkatan konsistensi dan profesionalisme antar muka pengguna QGIS Tab samping kotak kelompok lipat Kami memiliki standa
435. untuk meningkatkan kinerja dari menampilkan dan memilih spasial fitur Anda bisa mendefinsikan E Gunakan Indeks Subset dan E Watch file untuk melihat perubahan berkas dengan aplikasi lain sementara QGIS berjalan Sebagai contoh sebuah berkas teks yang valid kita mengimpor berkas data elevasi titik elevp csv dengan contoh dataset QGIS Lihat Bagian Contoh data 8 10 Menambahkan Lapisan Teks Delimited Delimited Text Layer 45 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 X Y ELEV 3 001207 70999607 T3 694 36007 79620740752 1640 7512840 3 Pa Beberapa item dari catatan tentang berkas teks adalah 1 Contoh berkas teks menggunakan semicolon sebagai delimiter Beberapa karakter bisa digunakan untuk kolom delimit Baris pertama adalah baris header Ini berisi X Y dan ELEV Tidak ada kutipan digunakan untuk bidang teks delimit Koordinat X diisi dalam bidang X a Koordinat Y diisi dalam bidang Y 8 10 1 Menggunakan fungsi 1 TE Klik ikon toolbar Tambah Lapisan Teks Delimited qi toolbar Kelola Lapisan membuka dialog Membuat Lapisan dari Berkas Teks Delimited seperti yang tampil dalam figure_delimited_text_1 Create a Layer from a Delimited Text File File Name data Dropbox Trabalho OGIS ggis sample data csv elevp csv Browse Layer name elevp Encoding UTF 8 File Format CSV comma separated values Custom delimiters Regular expression delimiter Comma Tab Space Colon amp Semicolon Other delimiters
436. up has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text A copy that is not Transparent is called Opaque Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup Texinfo input format LaTeX input format SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD and standard conforming simple HTML PostScript or PDF designed for human modification Examples of transparent image formats include PNG XCF and JPG Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word pro cessors SGML or XML for which the DTD and or processing tools are not generally available and the machine generated HTML PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only The Title Page means for a printed book the title page itself plus such following pages as are needed to hold legibly the material this License requires to appear in the title page For works in formats which do not have any title page as such Title Page means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work s title preceding the beginning of the body of the text The publisher means any person or entity that distributes copies of the Document to the public A section Entitled XYZ means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains X
437. ution console output E Thu Oct 10 2013 13 07 46 GRASS execution commands i Thu Oct 10 2013 13 07 35 SAGA execution console output E Thu Oct 10 2013 13 07 29 SAGA execution commands WARNING E dj ALGORITHM E Thu Oct 10 2013 13 07 46 processing runalg grass v voronoi C Users Volaya qgis2 python plugins proces M E Thu Oct 10 2013 13 07 29 processing runala saga polygoncentroids C Users Volaya qgis2 python plugins amp ERROR C Users Wolaya Desktop saga cmd shapes polygons Polygon Centroids POLYGONS Users Volaya qgis2 python plugins processing tests data polygons shp CENTROIDS Users Volaya WppData Local Temp processing 6e25336e9644496 5b442c5ec eet APA shp SERA FF PERAS FF FFF FFF FF FFF FSH FSH SS FHSS SSS FFF FEFFE PERAI FSS SF FF FEE SES FS library path c saga21 modules shapes_polygons dll library name Shapes Polygons module name Polygon Centroids author c 2003 by O Conrad Gambar 17 30 History 7 Process information is kept as a command line expression even if the algorithm was launched from the toolbox This makes it also useful for those learning how to use the command line interface since they can call an algorithm using the toolbox and then check the history manager to see how that same algorithm could be called from the command line Apart from browsing the entries in the registry processes can be re executed simply double clicking on
438. variabel untuk mengatur alat eksternal yang dikendalikan oleh pengolahan toolbox seperti GRASS dan untuk menyalakan keluaran debugging untuk bagian tertentu dari kode sumber 2 Gunakan penyesuaian variabel dibutuhkan restart termasuk pemisah Anda bisa Tambah dan Hapus variabel Ligkungan variabel sekarang ditampilkan dibawah dan ini memungkinkan SF Tampilkan hanya variabel spesifik QGIS Plugin path e Tambah atau Hapus Path s untuk mencari tambahan C librari Plugin 9 3 Opsi 49 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 8090 Options R General Data Sources amp Rendering Ey Canvas amp Legend Ci Map Tools Al Digitizing a cbir GDAL SS CRS a Locale Network Help System Environment M Use custom variables restart required include separators Add Remove Apply Variable Value ia QGIS_LOG_FILE Users larrys OGIS github com agis log Overwrite If Undefined f QGIS_DEBUG 5 QGIS_DEBUG_FILE Users larrys QGIS github com Quantum GIS src core qgspallabeling cpp Prepend Append ment variables read only bold indicates modified at startup Variable Value PATH Jusr bin bin usr sbin sbin TMPDIR var folders gp t4z6pfyh8xlgcd001s6xg0q00000gn T SHELL bin bash HOME Users larrys Show only OGIS specific variables Plugin paths Path s to search for additional C plugins libraries Add Remove Cancel Lor Gambar 9 3 Sistem lingkungan variabel dalam QGIS 9 3 3 Menu sumber data At
439. vector and raster layers v Rendering Blending mode Lighten Transparency 0 Gambar 18 3 Rendering mode e Transparency you can make the underlying item in the composer visible with this tool Use the slider to adapt the visibility of your item to your needs You can also make a precise definition of the percentage of visibility in the the menu beside the slider e Blending mode you can achieve special rendering effects with these tools that you previously only know from graphics programs The pixels of your overlaying and underlaying items are mixed through the settings described below Normal This is the standard blend mode which uses the alpha channel of the top pixel to blend with the Pixel beneath it the colors aren t mixed Lighten It selects the maximum of each component from the foreground and background pixels Be aware that the results tend to be jagged and harsh Screen Light pixels from the source are painted over the destination while dark pixels are not This mode is most useful for mixing the texture of one layer with another layer E g you can use a hillshade to texture another layer Dodge Dodge will brighten and saturate underlying pixels based on the lightness of the top pixel So brighter top pixels cause the saturation and brightness of the underlying pixels to increase This works best if the top pixels aren t too bright otherwise the effect is too extreme Addition This b
440. ving to a temporary one is not permitted You can type the name directly or use the file chooser dialog that appears when clicking on the accompanying button Once you select the file a new dialog is shown to allow for autocompletion of other cells in the same column same parameter UP Autofill mode Do not autofill low ce Parameter to use Elevation al Gambar 17 28 Batch Processing Save If the default value Do not autocomplete is selected it will just put the selected filename in the selected cell from the parameters table If any of the other options is selected all the cells below the selected one will be automatically filled based on a defined criteria This way it is much easier to fill the table and the batch process can be defined with less effort Automatic filling can be done simply adding correlative numbers to the selected filepath or appending the value of another field at the same row This is particularly useful for naming output data object according to input ones Slope CABocuments and Settings usuario Mis documentos slope tif CABocuments and Settingslusuario1Mis documentos slope3 tif CABocuments and Settingsusuario1Mis documentos slope tif Gambar 17 29 Batch Processing File Path 7 17 4 The batch processing interface 173 QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 17 4 4 Executing the batch process To execute the batch process once you have introduced all the necessary values ju
441. way you do it for WMTS services Just add tiled true at the end of the url See http wiki osgeo org wiki Tile_Map_Service_Specification for more information about this specification When you read WMTS you can often think WMS C also Selecting WMS WMTS Servers The first time you use the WMS feature there are no servers defined 122 Bab 14 Pekerjaan dengan Data OGC QGIS User Guide Rilis 2 0 Begin by clicking the G Add WMS layer button inside the toolbar or through the Layer Add WMS Layer menu The dialog Add Layer s from a Server for adding layers from the WMS server appears You can add some servers to play with by clicking the Add default servers button This will add two WMS demo servers for you to use the WMS servers of the DM Solutions Group and Lizardtech To define a new WMS server in the tab Layers select the New button Then enter the parameters to connect to your desired WMS server as listed in table OGC 1 Name A name for this connection This name will be used in the Server Connections drop down box so that you can distinguish it from other WMS Servers URL URL of the server providing the data This must be a resolvable host name the same format as you would use to open a telnet connection or ping a host Username Username to access a secured WMS server This parameter is optional Password Password for a basic authenticated WMS server This parameter is optional Ignore GetMap C Ignore GetMap URI repo
442. whether to save the database password in the connection settings Passwords are saved in clear text in the system configuration and in the project files 2 Only look in meta data table Restricts the displayed tables to those that are in the all sdo geom metadata view This can speed up the initial display of spatial tables E c Only look for user s tables When searching for spatial tables restrict the search to tables that are owner 2 by the user g Also list tables with no geometry Indicates that tables without geometry should also be listed by default E Use estimated table statistics for the layer metadata When the layer is setup various metadata is required for the Oracle table This includes information such as the table row count geometry type and spatial extents of the data in the geometry column If the table contains a large number of rows determining this metadata is time consuming By activating this option the following fast table metadata operations are done Row count is determined from all_tables num_rows Table extents are always determined with the SDO_TUNE EXTENTS_OF function even if a layer filter is applied The table geometry is determined from the first 100 non null geometry rows in the table 2 Only existing geometry types Only list the existing geometry types and don t offer to add others Once all parameters and options are set you can test the connection by clicking on the Test Connect button Tip OGIS User
443. with tshe other In case of negative values black is displayed Since QGIS 2 0 the old symbology is no longer available In this version the new symbology has been redesigned and revised Renderers The renderer is responsible for drawing a feature together with the correct symbol There are four types of renderers single symbol categorized graduated and rule based There is no continuous color renderer because it is in fact only a special case of the graduated renderer The categorized and graduated renderer can be created by specifying a symbol and a color ramp they will set the colors for symbols appropriately For point layers there is a point displacement renderer available For each data type points lines and polygons vector symbol layer types are available Depending on the chosen renderer the Style menu provides different following sections On the bottom right of the symbology dialog there is a Symbol button which gives access to the Style Manager see Section vector_style_manager The Style Manager allows you to edit and remove existing symbols and add new ones Tip Select and change multiple symbols The Symbology allows to select multiple symbols and right click to change color transparency size or width of selected entries Single Symbol Renderer The Single Symbol Renderer is used to render all features of the layer using a single user defined symbol The properties that can be adjusted in the Style menu depend p
444. xels aren t too bright otherwise the effect is too extreme Addition This blend mode simply adds pixel values of one layer with the other In case of values above 1 in the case of RGB white is displayed This mode is suitable for highlighting features Darken Creates a resultant pixel that retains the smallest components of the foreground and back ground pixels Like lighten the results tend to be jagged and harsh Multiply It multiplies the numbers for each pixel of the top layer with the corresponding pixel for the bottom layer The results are darker pictures Burn Darker colors in the top layer causes the underlying layers to darken Can be used to tweak and colorise underlying layers Overlay Combines multiply and screen blending modes In the resulting picture light parts of the picture become lighter and dark parts become darker Soft light Very similar to overlay but instead of using multiply screen it uses color burn dodge This one is supposed to emulate shining a soft light onto an image Hard light Hard light is very similar to the overlay mode It s supposed to emulate projecting a very intense light onto an image Difference Difference subtracts the top pixel from the bottom pixel or the other way round to always get a positive value Blending with black produces no change as values for all colors are 0 Subtract This blend mode simply subtracts pixel values of one layer
445. y General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the
446. y clicking the Save button Note that the Parameters must begin with a proj block to represent the new coordinate reference system You can test your CRS parameters to see if they give sane results by clicking on the Calculate button inside the Test block and pasting your CRS parameters into the Parameters field Then enter known WGS 84 latitude and longitude values in North and East fields respectively Click on Calculate and compare the results with the known values in your coordinate reference system 60 Bab 10 Working with Projections BAB 11 QGIS Peramban Peramban QGIS adalah panel di QGIS yang memungkinkan Anda dengan mudah menavigasi dalam basisdata Anda Anda memiliki akses ke berkas berkas vektor umum seperti berkas ESRI shapefile atau MapInfo basis data seperti PostGIS Oracle Spatialite atau MSSQL Spatial dan koneksi WMS WFS Anda juga bisa melihat data GRASS Anda untuk mendapatkan data ke QGIS lihat GRASS GIS Integration QGIS Browser sa Refresh P Manage WMS Ia New Shapefile 4 Set layer CRS v IB shapefiles 4 airports shp 2 alaska shp builtups shp 2 grassland shp 2 lakes shp 2 landice shp majrivers shp pipelines shp popp shp A railroads shp regions shp rivers shp storagep shp swamp shp trails shp trees shp tundra shp gt VP WFS 8 MSSQL D Ac Metadata Preview Attributes General Storage type of this layer ESRI Shapefile Source for this layer home alexandre Drop
447. you can still choose a Field to be displayed when hovering over a feature on the map it is now possible to insert HTML code that creates a complex display when hovering over a feature To activate Map Tips select the menu option View MapTips Figure Display 1 shows an example of HTML code Layer Properties regions Displ Rr General Map Tip display text Na Style Field Gbel Labels HTML lt b gt Name of feature lt b gt NAME 2 lt br gt Labels lt b gt Is this place a Borough lt b gt lt br gt deprecated CASE WHEN TYPE 2 Borough THEN Yes ELSE No It is a TYPE_2 END S Fields CJ Display SO Actions ef Joins iy Diagrams Metadata Insert expression NAME 1 Insert field Restore Default Style Save As Default Load Style Save Style v Help Apply Cancel OK Gambar 12 23 HTML code for map tip 8 DILLINGHAM K Name of Feature Dillingham Is this place a Borough No It is a Census Area BRISTOL BAY Gambar 12 24 Map tip made with HTML code rs 12 2 6 Actions Menu QGIS provides the ability to perform an action based on the attributes of a feature This can be used to perform any number of actions for example running a program with arguments built from the attributes of a feature or passing parameters to a web reporting tool Actions are useful when you frequently want to run an external application or view a web page based on one or more values in your vector

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

仕様書  NSB alta efficienza INGLESE_SPAGNOLO.indb  takeMS 1GB CFC HyperSpeed 120x  http://lewebpedagogique.com/bouchaud 14vivant2.docx Séance 2 : l  Bosch BGL35MOVE4 vacuum cleaner  Trasduttore TEEx  CHAUDIÈRE À CONDENSATION, À VENTILATION DIRECTE  BEAUTÉcheveux CHIC LE CHIGNON TWIST  User Manual - Perfect Light Nederland  AP赤緯体セット取扱説明書  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file